Skip to main content

Full text of "A manual of occultism,"

See other formats


1 MAIMUA^ C)F 
OCCUI^riSM 

SEPHARIAL 



Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2013 



http://archive.org/details/manualofoccultis01seph 



A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



A MANUAL OF 
OCCULTISM 

BY 

"SEPHARIAL" 

author of 

"the manual of astrology," " kabalistic astrology," 
"the kabala of numbers," etc., etc. 



LONDON 

WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Ltd. 

I9I4 



" Sorcery has been called Magic : but 
Magic is Wisdom, and there is no wisdom 
in Sorcery/" 

Paracelsus. 



INTRODUCTION 



It is not my intention in these pages to attempt 
an exposition of the deeper arcana in connection 
with the various subjects treated of; but rather to 
place before the lay reader a number of methods 
by means of which he will be able to demonstrate 
to his own satisfaction, and that of others, that 
there is a deep substratum of truth in what is usually 
called " Occultism," and that the occult arts are 
sure and definite means of exploring them. 

The ancient Hermetic philosophers were well 
aware of a certain subtile correspondence or analogy 
existing between the superior and inferior worlds, 
the world of causation and that of effects. They 
traced a connection between the noumenal and the 
phenomenal, between the mind of man and his 
bodily condition, between the spiritual and the 
natural. They affirmed all this in a trite axiom : 
As above, so below. This philosophy extended to 
concrete observations, and became a science which 
they embodied in the Doctrine of Correspondences. 
The hieroglyphic writings of the Chinese, Egyptians 
and Assyrians are the outcome of this science, 
portions of which are current in our own thought 
and language. Thus when we speak of commerce, 



vi 



INTRODUCTION 



the merchant and the market, we are going back 
to traditional knowledge which associated the 
" winged messenger " of the gods with the ship in 
fuU sail; the word merx (trade) being at the root 
of the name Mercury, and the symbol ^ the hiero- 
gljrph for all that the name imports. We call the 
Sun *'he" and the Moon "she," tracing unconsciously 
a subtile correspondence between the daj^ and the 
active male function in nature, and between the 
night and the passive female function. We speak 
of jovial men and infer their connection with the 
planet Jupiter; and all our destructive and hurtful 
ideas are embodied in such words as "to mar," 
" martial," " murder," etc., linking them to their 
source in the root mama (to strike), because the 
destructive element in nature is represented in our 
system by the planet Mars. 

This Doctrine of Correspondences is at the root 
of all occult interpretation. It is our human 
presentation of the Universal Law which binds 
the Microcosm to the Macrocosm as an effect to its 
antecedent cause. The mystic, the poet and the 
creative artist are all unconscious interpreters of 
this universal law. They have in some degree 
the universal sense by which their souls are rendered 
responsive to the pulsations of Nature's own heart- 
beat. The sybil, the diviner and the seer are in 
even closer touch with the Great Life, while they have 
less conscious enjoyment of that intimacy. Others 
there are who reach to the heart of things by a clear 
and conscious intellection, understanding what they 



INTRODUCTION 



vii 



see, analyzing and interpreting what they feel. 
These are the Occultists, the true masters of the 
secret knowledge. Here it is perhaps necessary to 
mark the distinction which exists between occult- 
ism and mediumism, between the voluntary conscious 
effort of the trained intellect and the automatic 
functioning of the natural " sensitive," in their 
respective relations to the occult world. 

The Occultist is one who intelligently and con- 
tinuously applies himself to the understanding of 
the hidden forces in nature and to the laws of the 
interior world, to the end that he may consciously 
co-operate with nature and the spiritual intelligences 
in the production of effects of service to himself 
and to his fellow-beings. This entails upon him 
a close study of the mystery and power of sound, 
number, colour, form; the psychological laws 
underlying all expression of faculty; the laws of 
sympathy and antipathy ; the law of vibration ; of 
spiritual and natural affinity ; the law of periodicity, 
of cosmic energy, planetary action; occult correspond- 
ences, etc. To these labours he must bring a natural 
gift of understanding, an unusual degree of patience 
and devotion, and a keen perception of natural facts. 
The Medium, or natural sensitive, is one who holds 
himself in negative relations to the interior worlds, 
and submits himself to the operation of influences 
proceeding from things and persons, as well as 
to that of discarnate intelligences. The medium 
cultivates an unusual degree of responsiveness to 
environment and to the emanations (atomic, mag- 



viii 



INTRODUCTION 



netic or psychic) and suggestions of other persons. 
The phenomena developed by this process of 
mediumism include automatism (temporary loss 
of control over the motor nerves), as in the pheno- 
mena of involuntary speech and automatic writing ; 
hypercesthesia, as in the function of clairvoyance, 
clairaudience, psychometry, etc. ; trance, with its 
attendant phenomena of unconscious cerebration, 
obsession, and a variety of physical effects of a 
supernormal character. In its highest manifesta- 
tion, following upon the " crucifying of the flesh," 
the subjugation of the passions, and a process of 
intense rehgious aspiration, mediumism is frequently 
followed by spiritual revelation and spontaneous 
prophecy. " But this sort cometh not but by 
fasting and prayer." 

The various forms of divination to which recourse 
is had in so-called occult circles rest largely upon 
the exercise of a faculty which is compounded of 
occultism and mediumism. They are seen to employ 
the automatic faculty in conjunction with an em- 
pirical knowledge of certain occult methods of 
interpretation. 

The following pages are intended to place the lay 
reader in possession of some of the principal methods 
of the occultists and mediums ; and although nothing 
of a purely esoteric nature is divulged, it will never- 
theless be found that everything necessary to an 
initial understanding and practice of the various 
occult arts is included in this work. It is within 
the author's purpose to place so much information 



INTRODUCTION 



ix 



at the disposal of the student as will effectually 
debar him from any excuse of ignorance concerning 
the psychic powers latent in man and the verity 
of the occult sciences. It is within the power of 
everybody to be convinced, and to convince others, 
while he who perseveres to the point of perfection in 
the exercise of his faculty may justly be dignified 
by the name of Adept. The Magi of ancient times 
were astrologers, diviners and prophets all, and he 
who would aspire to their high degree must pursue 
their methods and live their life. They have 
committed to us the following maxims, which are 
stiU preserved in the schools — 

Know — Will — Dare — Keep Silent ; 

and as to the rule of life they enjoin — 

Right Thought — Right Feeling 
Right Speech — Right Action 
Right Living. 



CONTENTS 



PART I 
THE OCCULT SCIENCES 

CHAP. PAQK 

Introduction ....... v-ix 

ASTROLOGY— Section I 

I THE ALPHABET, ETC 3 

II THE ASPECTS 11 

III THE SIGNS ....... 14 

IV THE HOUSES . . . . . .21 

ASTROLOGY— Section II 

I MAKING A HOROSCOPE . . . . .27 

II FOREIGN HOROSCOPES . . . . .34 

ASTROLOGY— Section III 

I PERSONAL APPEARANCE . . . . .37 

II THE CONSTITUTION . . . . .41 

III HEALTH ....... 42 

IV CHARACTER ....... 44 

V ACCIDENTS . . . . . . .48 

VI THE FORTUNES . . . . . .50 

VII THE POSITION . . . . . .52 

xi 



xii 


CONTENTS 




CHAP. 




PAGE 


VIII 


THE OCCUPATION ..... 


04: 


IX 


MARRIAGE ...... 


t 


X 


PROGENY ...... 


AA 
OU 


XI 


TRAVELLING ...... 




XII 


FRIENDS AND ENEMIES .... 


65 


XIII 


KIND OF DEATH ..... 


67 




astrology—Section iv 




I 


THE MEASURE OF TIME .... 


oy 


II 


EXAMPLE OF DIRECTIONS 


1 O 


III 


SECONDARY DIRECTIONS 


7o 


IV 


TRANSITS AND ECLIPSES, ETC. 


QA 


V 


MUNDANE ASTROLOGY .... 


91 


VI 


OTHER METHODS . . . . 


. 97 




PALMISTRY 




I 


TYPES OF HANDS ..... 


lUO 


II 


MOUNTS OR CUSHIONS .... 


111 
ill 


III 


THE PHALANGES ..... 


lib 


IV 


THE LINES ...... 


1 1 o 


V 


NINE PRINCIPAL LINES .... 


. 123 


VI 


INCIDENTAL MARKS .... 


. 134 




THAUMATURGIC ART 




I 


THE KABALA ..... 




II 


THE CALCULATORY ART 


1 AA 


III 


OF EVIL SPIRITS ..... 


156 


IV 


man's SPIRITUAL FREEDOM 


. 161 





CONTENTS 


xiii 


CHAP. 




PAGE 


V 


ON TALISMANS ..... 


. 166 


VI 


NUMEROLOGY ..... 


. 178 


HYPNOTISM AND MESMERISM . 


. 193 




PART II 






THE OCCULT ARTS 




I 


Divination. ..... 


. 213 


II 


THE tarot ...... 


. 218 


III 


Cartomancy ..... 


. 233 


IV 


VARIOUS METHODS .... 


. 240 


V 


Crystal-gazing ..... 


. 247 


VI 


PRELIMINARIES AND PRACTICE 


. 253 


VII 


VISIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 


260 


VIII 


SOME EXPERIENCES .... 


. 264 


IX 


Geomancy ...... 


. 269 


X 


CASTING AND JUDGING THE FIGURE 


. 275 


XI 


SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES . 


. 282 


XII 


PSYCHOMETRY . . . 


. 310 


XIII 


Dreams ...... 


. 320 


XIV 


Sortileges ...... 


. 333 


ALCHEMY 


. 344 



PART I 



THE OCCULT SCIENCES 

THE VOLITIONAL FACULTY— THE WILL AND 
IMAGINATION — ADEPTSHIP — ASTROLOGY 
—KABALISM— TALISMANS— NUMEROLOGY 
—PALMISTRY— HYPNOTISM, 
Etc., Etc. 



B 



ERRATA. 

Paoe 7— lines 14-15: for "specific gravities" read 
" atomic weights." 

Page 8— line 3 et scq : for " specific gravities " read 
" atomic weights." 



A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



SECTION 1 

CHAPTER I 
ASTROLOGY 

The astrologic art is held to be the key to all the 
occult sciences. Certainly it is the most ancient, 
and that which most readily lends itself to scientific 
demonstration. 

Much that is contained in this and the following 
chapters is traditional knowledge, but some portion 
of it is the result of modern discovery and experi- 
ment. Thus the nature and significations of the 
signs of the zodiac and the planets, the aspects 
and some other parts of the groundw ork of astrology, 
have come down to us from times immemorial; but 
the methods of computing the periods, the exact 
times of events, together with some methods of in- 
terpretation, are of modern or comparatively recent 
origin. Of course, all that is known of Neptune 
and Uranus is the result of modern discovery. 

3 B2 



4 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



The subject before us can be divided into three 
parts : — 

1. The alphabet. 

2. The reading. 

3. Time measures. 

I will deal in this chapter with 

The Alphabet 

This includes the symbols and names of the planets 
and the signs, their groupings and dominions. - 

The Planets (including, for convenience of 
phrasing, the Sun and Moon) are nine in number. 
Stated in the order of their distances from the earth 
they are as follows : — 

]) The Moon, which returns to the same place 
in the zodiac in about 27 days, and to its conjunction 
with the Sun in about 29 days. Every 19 years 
the New Moons fall in the same part of the zodiac. 

The Moon's characteristic is change or mobility. 

$ Venus, which returns to the same part of the 
zodiac about the same date in 8 years. It is at its 
nearest to the earth when in inferior conjunction 
with the Sun. Its characteristic is placidity or 
peace. It is called by the Greeks Aphrodite. 

5 Mercury, when in inferior conjunction with 
the Sun, is next in distance from the earth. It 
returns to the same longitude on the same date 
in 79 years. Its characteristic is activity. 

O The Sun is the chronocrater of our system, 
and all time is measured by its apparent movements. 
It has an apparent motion round the earth in 24 



ASTROLOGY 



5 



hours and 4 minutes, and an annual motion through 
the zodiac in 365 days 5 hours 48 minutes 49 seconds. 
The earth is nearer the sun than it used to be, the 
day is shorter, and the precession of the equinoxes 
is greater. The equinoxes pass through each sign 
in about 2,160 years. The vernal equinox is now in 
the constellation Pisces, and in about 700 years will be 
in Aquarius. The characteristic of the Sun is vitality. 

f Mars returns to the same part of the zodiac 
about the same time at the end of 79 years. Conse- 
quently it forms its conjunction with ^ in the same 
part of the zodiac at the end of that period. Its 
characteristic is energy. 

% Jupiter returns to the same longitude about 
the same date every 83 years. It is called the 
Greater Fortune. Its characteristic is expansion. 

h Saturn has a period of 59 years, after which 
it comes to the same longitude about the same date. 
It is called the Greater Infortune. Its characteristic 
is privation. 

9 Uranus has a synodic period of 84 years. Its 
characteristic is disruption. 

Neptune has a period of about 165 years and 
its characteristic is chaos. 

The periods of the planets according to the 
Chaldeans are — 

]) 4 years, ^ 10 years, $ 8 years, © 19 years, ^ 
15 years, 1L 12 years, and 30 years. Thus the 
D rules the life from birth to 4 years of age and is 
succeeded by ^ up to 14, then $ to the age of 22, 
followed by the Sun from 22 to 41, to which ^ 



6 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



succeeds until 56, and is followed by ii, who rules 
the life up to the age of 68, the last 30 years, up to 
the age of 98, being dominated by Saturn. 

These are the periods recited by Shakespeare in 
his famous passage in .45 You Like It, beginning 
"All the world's a stage, and all the men and women 
merely players." Thus the J) is the babe, "mewling 
and puking in its nurse's arms." ^ is the 
scholar, $ the lover, ^ the soldier, u the judge 
" with good capon lined," and the " lean and slip- 
pered pantaloon."' The last stage of all is that of B 
(disruption), the paralytic senilit}^ of which condition 
is so aptty described by the Bard. 

Planetary Colours. 

Neptune. — Mauve, lilac, heliotrope (admixtures 
of pale blue and scarlet). 

Uranus. — Grey, black and white mixed, in checks 
or stripes. 

Saturn. — Dark brown, black. 

Jupiter. — Violet, purple. 

Mars. — Scarlet, crimson. 

Sun. — Orange, gold. 

Venus. — Pale blue, turquoise. 

Mercury. -^Indigo, dark blue. 

Moon. — Opal, iridescent sheens, yellow, and in 
watery signs (s, TT[, :<) sea green. 

Planetary Numbers. 
The following numbers transmitted by John 
Heydon in the sixteenth century have been proved 
correct : — 



ASTROLOGY 



7 



h 8, ^3, ^9, 96, 55; 
(negative) 4, (positive) 1, 



7. 



Planetary Metals. 
^ (unknown) ; ^ iron ; 

uranium ; 9 copper ; 

h lead ; 5 quicksilver ; 

1^ tin ; ]) silver ; 

O gold. 

The atomic weights of the ancient metals are not 
presumed to have been known to the ancient astrolo- 
gers, yet we find they named the planets and ascribed 
their dominions in the mineral world in exact accord- 
ance with the facts of modern science. The specific 
gravities of the various pure metals known to them 
are contained in the following glyph : — 



D 




8 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



This seven-pointed star is read from the ray 
marked towards the left. The result is — 



6 


iron, specinc 


gravity 56 


V 


coppei J 


, uo 


D 


silver , 


108 


% 


tin , 


118 





gold 


196 




quicksilver , 


200 


b 


lead , 


207. 



Read alternately in the reverse order we have 






ruling 


r Sunday, 


D 


;> 


Monday, 


6 


55 


Tuesday, 


5 


55 


Wednesday, 




55 


Thursday, 


9 


55 


Friday, 


1^ 


55 


Saturday. 



If we read from point to point so as to make a 
heptagram or seven-pointed star, or a star of seven 
angles, we have the order of the planets according 
to the Chaldean system : 

b ^ c? 9 5 ]). 
Sympathies. 

The followmg glyph (see page 9) exhibits at a 
glance the sympathies and antipathies of the 
planets — 

Thus Saturn is opposed to the Sun and Moon, 
Jupiter to Mercury, and Venus to Mars. 
This is exhibited in detail by reference to the 



ASTROLOGY 



9 



Dominions 

of the planets, which are set forth in the following 
schedule — 

fp governs ^ and 

opposed to 
governing ^ and 

'^l governs $ and 

opposed to 
^ governing n and np 
(5 governs y and Tr[ 

opposed to 
9 governing £:= and y . 




The " Dominions " are sometimes called " Houses " 
from domus, a house, but as other divisions of the 



10 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



heavens are so called, I prefer to use the term 
" dominions " to describe the signs of the zodiac 
ruled over by the planets. 

In a general sense, and having regard to the 
specific nature of each planet, Saturn is in sympathy 
with Mars, Mars with the Sun, Jupiter with the 
Moon and Venus ; while Mercury is variable, taking 
its radical tincture from that planet to which it is 
in closest aspect at birth. 

The following figure shows at a glance the signs 
owned or ruled by the planets and the luminaries : — 




It will be observed that each planet has two signs, 
the Sun and Moon one each. Neptune is found to 
have affinity with the sign x, Pisces, and Uranus 
with , Aquarius ; but these are modern empiricisms 
and for some time must be received with caution. 



CHAPTER II 



THE ASPECTS 

The ancients have handed dov/n a tradition which 
informs us that the triangle is a symbol of the spirit 
and is efficacious for good, while the cross Avhich is 
formed on the square is a symbol of matter and is 
of evil import. 

In practical astrology we find this dictum to be 
true. Thus the aspect, or angular distance between 
two celestial bodies, or points of the zodiac, is the 
means by which we determine whether a planet 
favours our fortunes or the reverse. 

The trine /\ aspect of 120° is good, and produces 
harmonizing effects whenever andAvherever it occurs. 

The -)(- sextile aspect of 60° is half the trine, and is 
good in like manner but in less degree. 

The V semisextile of 30° is similarly propitious, 
but in a very subsidiary degree. It serves, however, 
to turn the scales when the influences are conflicting. 

These, then, are the good aspects : — 
A -X- V 
120° 60"^ 30° 
and to these are added the conjunctions of and 
$ , and of 5 when in good aspect to another planet. 

The evil aspects are : — 
11 



12 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



The opposition t? of 180'\ which makes for dis- 
union and inharmonious results. 

The sesquiquadrate or square and a half 
aspect of 135" is powerful for evil. 

The □ square or quadrature of 90°, which is only 
a degree less evil than the direct opposition. 

The L semisquare of 45°, which is similarly, but 
in less degree, evil. 

To these are added the conjunctions of ^, h 
and , together with ^ when in bad aspect to 
another body; for ^ is the interpreter of the 
gods, and brings to us the message of that sphere 
with which it is found in association at any time we 
may consult the heavens. 

The astrological aspects are found to be those 
angles at which the superior metals crystallize. 
Water crj^stallizes at an angle of 60°. Again, the 
angles or complemental angles of any regular poly- 
gon which may be inscribed in a circle will be found 
to be comprehended by the astrological aspects. 
Thus our earliest progenitors are found to have 
been both metallurgists and geometers. 

The evil aspects are all included in this ancient 
glyph :— 



THE ASPECTS 



13 



and similarly the good aspects are included in 
the following symbol, known as " the seal of 
Solomon " : — 



Seal. Sigil. 




Key, 
4 9 2 



3 5 7 
8 1 I 6 

The key was found engraved on the back of the 
Great Tortoise, discovered b}^ Yaou, the Chinese 
patriarch and ruler, in the Yellow River, about 
2,300 B.C. It forms the basis of interpretation to the 
oldest book in the world, known as the Yih King, or 
Book of Transformations. It is used by the Chinese 
for aU purposes of divination, and is the basis of 
their astrological .system. 

Besides these there are many other points of 
interest vested in the astrological aspects, and as I 
shall have occasion to refer to them in the next 
chapter of this section, 1 will pass them for the 
moment. 



CHAPTER III 



THE SIGNS 

The signs of the zodiac are the symbols of those 
h'ving forms which among the ancients stood for 
certain cosmic prijiciples and evohitional processes. 
]n the zodiacal scroll the gifted interpreter of 
symbols will find the history of the human race 
already depicted. The typical forms represent 
various stages of human evolution, as Avell individual 
as rcicial. But w e are not now concerned with these 
esoteric matters, but rather with the exposition 
of astrological principles. Observe, then, that the 
zodiac is composed of asterisms which, in the year 
25,400 B.C., corresponded with the solar signs 
bearing the same names. The signs are counted 
from the vernal equinox, or that point where the 
sun's path crosses the earth's equator. The line 
traversed by the sun in its annual path through the 
asterisms is called The Ecliptic. 

This ecliptic circle is divided into twelve equal 
parts, called Signs, which, counted from the vernal 
equinox, are as follows : SP Aries, y Taurus, U 
Gemini, ^ Cancer, Leo, fiJJ Virgo, =a Libra, \ 
Scorpio, f Sagittarius, 1^ Capricornus, :r Aquarius, 
j{ Pisces. 

14 



THE SIGNS 



15 



They have the following relationships and group- 
ings 

^ is opposed by JX 

n „ 



The Elemeyital Natures of the signs, with their 
human correspondences, are shown in the following 
tabular scheme : — 



Element. 
A Fiery signs 
= Aerial 
V Watery 
+ Earthy ,, 



Sign. Principle. 

cp a ? Spirit 
11 ii Mind 

25 ITl }{ Soul 

y -njj vj Body 



Property, 
Inspiration 
Reason 
Emotion 

Sensation. 



The majority of the planets being in the Fire 
signs, shows that the life is expressed chiefly in the 
inspirational, aspirational and intuitive faculties. 
In Air signs, the intellectual life will be dominant. 
In Water signs the passional, emotional and imagi- 
native qualities are more pronounced; while if the 
majority of the planets are in Earth signs, the more 
material, matter-of-fact and sordid aspects of the 
nature absorb the vital powers. These groups are 
otherwise known as the igneous, gaseous, fluidic 
and mineral, analogous to the upward evolution 
of the material universe, which is counterbalanced 



16 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



by the downward involution of the corresponding 
immaterial principles. 

The analysis of the sign groupings shows that the 
A and = signs are related to the formless or superior 
universe, while the V and + signs relate to the 
inferior or formative world. Again, it will be noticed 
the air and fire are mutually conformable, ignition 
depending on atmosphere ; w^hile similarly water 
is necessary to the earth for its fertilization. These 
sets of signs are in mutual sextile to one another. 
Thus 

SP is >(c to n and ; 
y is >)< to 25 and ; 
n is -^f to SP and ^ ; 
and 25 is >(c to y and VC^, 

The Constitutional Natures of the signs are derived 
from another grouping. They are known as the 

□ Fixed or Basic ; 
/TN Common or Flexed ; 
A Movable or Cardinal. 

The}^ may very appropriately be expressed as the 
acute A , the grave □ and the circumflex /tn . 

The groupmg for this division of the signs is 
thus : — 

Acute, ^ qE 

Grave, « SI ^ 

Circumflex, IT ^ I ^ 

When the majority of the planets are found at the 
birth of a person to be in 
Fixed Signs — the nature will be independent, 



THE SIGNS 



17 



self-reliant, pivotal, seK-centred, original, cautious, 
firm and steadfast. 

Common Signs. — The nature is versatile, flexible, 
complacent, sjTiipatlietic, suave, and capable of 
adapting itself to changes of company and environ- 
ment. 

Movable Signs. — The nature shows ambition, 
aptitude, executive abiHty, capable of cutting out 
a line in life for itself and making headway in the 
face of obstacles. 

The driving power is represented by the fixed 
signs, the sharp instrument by the cardinal or acute 
signs, and the body that is riven or shaped is denoted 
by the common or flexed signs. 

The thinkers, philosophers, inventors and origina- 
tors are of the basic or fixed type. The pioneers, 
the executive, the partisans and zealots are of the 
acute or cardinal type. The common populace, the 
passive crowd; the numerous agents, fetchers and 
carriers of business; and whomsoever works at the 
direction and under the leadership of others, all and 
sundry are of the flexed type. 

The hand of the archer is fixed, the arrow is direct 
and acute, and the bow is flexed. These correspond- 
ences are the keys to the interpretation of many 
occult mysteries. 

Sex of Signs. 

The signs are alternately male and female, 
namely : — 

c 



18 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Male. Female. 

n 25 

SI w 

— ni 

I vy 

^ ¥i 

The signs are divided into three parts, each of 10°, 
called decanates. These are related to the superior, 
middle and lower regions of the zones governed by 
them, or to which they correspond. The ancients 
had a conception of the macrocosm under the 
image of a man, which they called the Grand Man 
or Adam Kadmon, and to which the microcosm or 
individual corresponded more or less perfectly at all 
points. The zones of the body covered by the signs 
are, in this scheme, as follows : — 

the head ; the loins ; 

y the neck; TT[ the excretors; 

n the arms ; J the thighs ; 

3d the breast ; VJ the knees ; 

the heart; cx: the shins; 

VP^ the bowels ; ^ the feet. 

From what has been said above it mil be seen 
that if a planet is in it has its location in the 
superior region of the head, while one in the 17th 
degree of TT)J would be located in the middle region 
of the bowels. As to whether it be upon the right 
or left side of the body will depend on the location 



THE SIGNS 



19 



of the planet in the heavens, which involves a know- 
ledge of the Houses. These are dealt with in the 
next chapter. 

If in the 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th, 9th or 11th House, the 
left side in a male and the right side in a female is 
denoted ; and mutatis mutandis if in one of the other 
Houses. Thus a planet in n 5° in the 6th House 
would denote the right upper arm in a male and the 
left upper arm in a female. This example will 
doubtless serve for all others. 

The signs are also said to have dominion over 
certain places and countries, but as these do not 
form an essential part of the doctrine of Nativities 
which I am noAV considering, I may be allowed to 
pass it by. 

The signs, however, have an affinity with those 
elements to which they belong in the elemental 
grouping, and this will be found of practical use in 
the interpretation of horoscopes. 

The Lunar Mansions begin at ^ 0° and are 13° 
20' each in extent. The Arabians gave them 
specific names and influences. Modern astrologers 
have for the most part given them little attention. 
Yet they are at the root of the Oriental system of 
astrology, and are by them known as the Stations 
of the Moon, or nakshatrams. They have analogy 
with the diurnal motion of the Moon. 

The Mansions are 27 in number, each of 800' 
extent. The Moon changes its signification as it 
goes from one to another Mansion. The critical 
degrees, or points of change, are as follows : — 



20 



A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



T SI I 



0° 0'; 13° 20' 
10° 0' ; 23° 20' 
6° 40'; 20° 0' 
3° 20' ; 16° 40. 



26° 40' ; 



There are thus nine divisions or Mansions in each 
120°. The Hindus ascribe a specific planetary 
influence to each of them, and give to each a period 
of dominion over the life. (See " Hindu Astrology/' 
in the Manual of A strology, by Sepharial.) 

The student will do well to consult also the system 
which divides the zodiac into 28 parts, each quadrant 
being subject to a sevenfold division. 



CHAPTER IV 



THE HOUSES 

If you face the south where the sun is at noon, 
there is a point on your horizon to the left, one 
immediately over your head and another on your 
horizon to the right. An imaginary circle drawn 
through these three points and continued round the 
earth is called the Prime Vertical. An equal division 
of this circle into 12 parts gives rise to what are called 
the Twelve Houses. They are numbered, for pur- 
1 poses of reference, from the east horizon below the 
' earth to the west horizon, and thence through the 
zenith to the east horizon again. The diagram on 
the next page will perhaps conve}' the idea better 
than words. 

The horizon east forms the cusp of the 1st House, 
the upper meridian forms the cusp of the 10th 
House, the west horizon forms the cusp of the 
7th House, and the lower meridian that of the 
4th House. 

The 1st and 7th Houses are also called the 

" Ascendant " and " Descendant " respectively. 

The 1st, 10th, 4th and 7th are called the Angles. 

The 2nd, 11th, 5th and 8th are called Succeedent. 

The 3rd, 6th, 9th and 12th are called Cadent Houses. 
[ 21 
i 



22 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Planets in the Angles of a horoscope are by that 
position rendered more powerful in their action 
and are more conspicuous in the life of one born 
when they are so placed. Many planets in Cadent 





/ 7"// 

6 \ 


\ / 3 


\ ^ 7 



Houses will render the career inconspicuous and in a 
measure servile. Many planets in Siicceedent Houses 
are an indication of a career that is helped by 
persistent endeavour. 

Thus the angular Houses correspond with the 
cardinal signs, the succeedent with the fixed signs, 
and the cadent with the flexed signs; and this 



THE HOUSES 



23 



correspondence may be traced throughout the 
circle, with the 1st House, y with the 2nd, 
n with the 3rd, and so on. 

The Kabala of the Houses 
shows them to be divided into four groups, viz. : — 

Individual, 1st, 5th, 9th ; 

Possessive, 2nd, 6th, 10th; 

Relative, 3rd, 7th, 11th; 

Terminal, 4th, 8th, 12th. 

Of these, among the Individual group, the 1st is 
external and relates to the person or body of the 
man; the 5th is intermediate and has relation to the 
psychic nature or soul ; and the 9th is internal and is 
related to the spiritual nature or individuality. 
Hence all the Houses are either physical (1st, 2nd. 
3rd and 4th), psychic (5th, 6th, 7th and 8th), or 
spiritual (9th, 10th, 11th and 12th.) 

The close study of these intimate relationships of 
the Houses and their correspondence with the signs 
of the zodiac is the most profound work of the 
astrologer. It is the foundation of the Avhole art of 
correct foreknowledge. 

For practical purposes we may brief the domina- 
tions and significations of the Houses as follows : — 

Significations of the Houses 
The 1st House governs the body, personal appear- 
ance, physical well-being, and accidents happening 
to the person. 



24 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



The 2nd House governs the personal property, 
money in hand, personal effects. 

The 3rd House rules the personal relations, the tie 
of consanguinity, brothers and sisters ; also means of 
communication, whether by vehicle, letter post, 
telegraph or other means whatsoever. It denotes 
cables, bridges, telegraph wires, viaducts and other 
means of connection; writings, letters. 

The 4th House governs the end of the physical 
life, the grave ; material products, mines, farming 
produce; land, houses, freeholds, leases, tenancies 
and hence landlords. 

The 5th House is the extension of the 1st and 
governs the psychic nature; progeny; passions, 
pleasures, love affairs; hence theatres, places of 
amusement, sport, etc. ; the younger generation 
and such things and persons as tend to their well- 
being. 

The 6th House is an extension of the 2nd; it 
governs the food, clothing, servants, personal com- 
forts, relative possessions generally; also the work 
or profession in which the subject engages; what- 
ever contributes to the well-being of the subject's 
possessions. 

The 7th House is an extension of the 3rd; it 
governs the tie of conjugality, the marriage 
partner; persons in contract; rivals (as opposing 
the 1st House). 

The 8th House is an extension of the 4th; it 
governs the dissolution of the vital forces; death, 
matters relating to the dead; wills, legacies, etc., and 



THE HOUSES 



25 



(being the 2nd from the 7th) dowry or personalty 
of the marriage partner. 

The 9th House is an extension of the 5th; it 
governs the spiritual nature; ''the far-off land," 
whether it be that across the ocean or beyond 
the veil, teleological subjects, theology, philosophy; 
pubHcations; the law, lawj^ers; insurances; dreams, 
visions and other- world experiences. 

The 10th House is an extension of the 6th; it 
denotes the ambitions, success, attainments of the 
subject; honour, credit, public esteem; the father 
or mother. (The 10th is always of the same sex 
as the 1st, and in a female horoscope denotes the 
mother.) 

The 11th House is an extension of the 7th, and 
denotes the tie of friendship ; congeners ; associates ; 
syndicates, companies, leagues, clubs, associations 
of which the subject is a member; his confederates 
and supporters. 

The 12th House is an extension of the 8th, and 
denotes privation, confinement, restraint; the hos- 
pital, prison or other place of detention; seques- 
tration, exile; ambushes, plots, secret enemies; the 
occult. 

It will be seen that many other interpretations 
apply to the House by reflection. Thus the 1st being 
the subject of the horoscope and the 7th his wife; 
the 3rd his relatives and the 9th his wife's relatives, 
the latter house comes to mean brothers- and sisters- 
in-law, i.e. marriage relatives. 



26 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



The 10th being the father and the 4th the mother 
(in a male horoscope), the 7th is the maternal 
grandfather and the 1st the maternal grandmother. 

The 6th being the uncles or aunts on the mother's 
side (i. e. maternal aunts or uncles), the relatives of 
the mother, the 5th (progeny) from the 6th (i. e. 
the 10th House) will denote maternal cousins. 
Similarl}^ with all those relations which " a man 
may not marr}^," as expounded in the Book of 
Common Prayer. 

We have now before us the whole of the alphabet 
of astrology, and may now proceed to frame a 
horoscope and read it by the language of the 
heavens. 

It is important that the whole of the planet arj^ 
natures should be learned, together with those of 
the signs and the significations of the Houses, 
before the next step is taken. When the alphabet 
has become a language, that language may be 
interpreted. Until then we are faced only by dead 
symbols. 



SECTION 11 



CHAPTER I 

MAKING A HOROSCOPE 

For the practical pursuit of astrology a horoscope 
must be drawn for the moment of a birth. 

It is of first importance to understand clearly 
what is meant by birth " in the astrological sense. 
Observe, then, that there are three stages in the 
process of obstetrics : (1) Extrusion, (2) Abscission, 
(3) Independent and sustained breathing. The 
moment of birth is that at which the first breath, 
usually accompanied by a cry, is taken and followed 
by regular breathing. For it should be noted that a 
spasmodic breath, followed by a cry, may be only 
the first of a series of intermittent breathings, 
regular breathing being established only after a 
considerable interval. 

The beginning of regular breathing having been 
noted, the astrologer may thereafter draw a correct 
horoscope of the birth. This horoscope, which 
shows the relative positions of the celestial bodies 
at the time of the nativity as regards one another, 
and their positions as seen from the place of birth, 
is called the Radix. It is the root from which springs 

27 



28 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



the whole tree of life. It represents the environ- 
ment of the new life, the conditions under which the 
incoming soul will be required to express itself, develop 
its powers, and gain its new load of experience. 

That which, as environment, presses it most 
closely, is the physical body with all its hereditary 
tendencies and acquired habits. Beyond this there 
are the wills of other units of life, all strivmg towards 
the satisfaction of common human needs, and 
spurred by individual ambitions. The horoscope of 
birth is in this sense accidental and not incidental, 
and cannot be consulted in any matter prior to 
the act of birth, nor in regard to the essential 
nature, origin, power and motive of the soul. 

There is a system of horoscopy which claims to go 
deeper, and to concern itself wholly with the evolu- 
tion of the soul and its migrations ; but this has no 
part in my present scheme and may be conveniently 
ignored. 

In order to draw a horoscope of the birth, it will 
be necessary to obtain (1) an Ephemeris of the 
planets' places for the year of birth; (2) a Table of 
Houses for the place of birth, or an approximate 
latitude; (3) a set of Transit Tables extending over 
a hundred years. 

An Ephemeris is an astronomical calendar show- 
ing the positions of the celestial bodies at noon each 
day throughout the year. This information is 
extracted from the Nautical Almanac or the French 
contemporary Connaissance de Temps. It gives the 
geocentric longitudes and the latitudes and declina- 



MAKING A HOROSCOPE 29 



tions of the bodies, the sidereal time of the day 
corresponding to the Sun's true Right Ascension at 
noon; and the aspects formed between the planets 
(called ''Mutual" aspects) and also the solar and 
lunar aspects. Some of these terms need explana- 
tion to the lay reader. 

Geocentric lo7igitude is the position of a body in 
the ecliptic as seen from the centre of the earth. 

Heliocentric longitude, from which geocentric longi- 
tude is converted, is the ecliptic position as seen 
from the Sun. In astrology we use the geocentric 
longitudes because we are considering the action 
of the planets upon the earth and its inhabitants. 
If we lived on Mars we should have to take the 
positions as seen from Mars. The ignorant conten- 
tion that the discovery of the hehocentricity of the 
system invalidates astrology is of course wijbhout 
rational foundation. 

Declination is distance from the equator north 
or south. It corresponds to geographical latitude. 
The line apparently traversed by a star or planet 
in its diurnal passage round the earth is called 
the "parallel of decUnation." 

Latitude of a celestial body is distance north or 
south of the ecUptic. 

Sidereal time is the Sun's true Right Ascension at 
noon, measured on the equator from the vernal 
equinox and corrected by the difference between 
Right Ascension and mean or clock time. It may 
be expressed in °, or in h., m., s., the circle of 
the equator being equal to 24 hours. 



30 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Tables of Houses are computed for various 
latitudes (as for New York, Paris, London, Liver- 
])ool, etc.), and serve for all places of the same or 
approximate latitude as these towns, whether north 
or south of the equator. The Tables show the points 
of the ecliptic cut by the cusps of the Houses ; thus 
the cusp of the 10th House is the same as the 
meridian of longitude, and the point of the echptic 
thereon, at the time for which the calculation is 
made, will be that which is on the meridian and 
culminating. 

Local time is the time corresponding to Green- 
wich time at any moment. The correction to be 
applied to Greenwich time in order to find the 
local time is 4 mins. for every degree of longitude 
east or west. If east, add to Greenwich time; if 
west, subtract from Greenwich time in order to get 
the local time. 

With the ephemeris in hand, turn now to the 
date of the birth. 

Against this date, in the left-hand column, you will 
find the sidereal time at noon. 

To this sidereal time add the local time elapsed 
since the preceding noon, together with an equation 
at the rate of 10 sees, for each hour. 

The sum will be the sidereal time on the mid- 
heaven at the time of birth. 

Next turn to the Tables of Houses for the latitude 
of the place of birth and find this sidereal time. 
Against it, under the column marked 10 (10th 
House), you will find the degree of the ecliptic which 
is on the meridian. This is technically called the 



MAKING A HOROSCOPE 



31 



" midheaven." In the next column (11) you will 
find the degree of the zodiac which is on the cusp 
of the 11th House. In the next column that which 
is on the cusp of the 12th House. In the next 
column, marked " Ascendant " or " Asc./' you have 
the degree which is rising in the east ; the next 
column gives the degree on the cusp of the 2nd 
House, and the last column that which is on the * 
cusp of the 3rd House. 

The 4th House will hold the same degree of the 
opposite sign to that which is on the 10th cusp. 
The 5th cusp holds the opposite to the 11th, and the 
6th the opposite to the 12th, and so on to the 7th. 
8th and 9th cusps. The " skeleton " figure is then 
complete. 

The planets' places must next be inserted, and as 
the ephemeris is constructed for Greenwich mean 
time, the Greemvich time of the birth must be used 
instead of the local time. The places being given 
for each day at noon, the longitudes can readily be 
found by proportion for any intermediate hour. 

For the purpose of illustration we may take the 
horoscope of King George V. The King was born 
on the 3rd of June, 1865, in London, at 1 hr. 18 mm. 
a.m. In the ephemeris for 1865 we find against 
the 2nd of June, at noon preceding the birth — 



H. M. s. 



Sidereal time 

To which add time since 

And equation at 10" per hour 



4 43 52 
13 18 
2 13 



S.T. on midheaven at birth 18 4 5 



32 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



This sidereal time corresponds with the 1st degree of 
Capricorn, which therefore occupies the midheaven. 
The skeleton is then completed from the Tables of. 
Houses for London ; and the planets' places and those 
of the luminaries are taken from the ephemeris 
for the 3rd of June, at 1.18 a.m., and in effect we 
have the horoscope as follows : — 





1^ ;^i3 rr^ip 


H 
V3 






25 10 








\2. 26 

29 


2 e" 3 8 










I ;z^2o ^14- 



Aspects, etc. 
* ^ c?, A D 

D c? T, 5' * c?, A0, D^, c? Asc. 
9 □ ?,A¥ 

3A, 2+ 4i=, V 
3A, 3a, 3.7N 

It is to be observed that the planets are in 
"aspect" to one another when at birth they are 
within 5 degrees of the exact angle; and the lumi- 
naries are in aspect at a distance of 7° from the 
exact angle; and that angle to which they are 
severally nearest must be taken as the aspect then 
in operation. Thus, with the Sun in T 0° and $ in 



MAKING A HOROSCOPE 



33 



y 17°, the angle is 47°, which is nearest the z semi- 
square of 45°. The Sun is then semisquare Mars. 
•But if with the in T 0° Mars should be in y 23°, 
at an angle of 53°, then the nearest aspect is the 
>[c of 60°, and the Sun is then said to be in sextile 
to Mars. 

It is to be observed that the groupings of the 
Signs already given in Chap. II will be of much 
use in the computation of the aspects ; for all signs 
of the same Elemental nature are in trine to one 
another ; those of the same Constitutional nature 
are in square aspect to one another. 

Any form of horoscopical figure may be used, 
and each has its advantages. That given above 
dispenses with the circle and consists of a series of 
straight lines, representing the celestial sphere on 
a Mercatorial projection. 



D 



CHAPTER II 



FOREIGN HOROSCOPES 

Suppose that the birth took place abroad, let us 
say m Berlin. The " skeleton " is set for the local 
time, and the planets' place are taken, from the 
Greenwich ephemeris, for the corresponding Green- 
wich time. The Tables of Houses used must be 
those for the latitude of Berlin. 

In aU cases the Midheaven is calculated for local 
time, and the Tables for the Houses must be those 
due to the latitude of the place. And in aU cases 
where the Greenwich ephemeris is used, the corre- 
sponding Greenwich time is employed when calcula- 
ting the planets' places. 

South Latitude 
When the figure is to be set for places south of 
the Equator, calculate the Midheaven for local time 
as before. Then add 12 hours to the sidereal time 
on the Midheaven, refer to the tables for the cor- 
responding North latitude, and take the opposite 
signs to those found on the cusps of the Houses, 
retaining, however, the same degrees . 

34 



FOREIGN HOROSCOPES 35 



Thus, if a birth has taken place in latitude 51° 
30' south, at 1.18 a.m. on the 3rd of June, 1865 (see 
horoscope of King George V), the sidereal time on the 
Midheaven is found to be 18 h. 4 m. 5 s. As the lati- 
tude is south we must add 12 hrs., thus — 

H. M. s. 

S.T. on M.C. at birth . . ..1845 
Add 12 



30 4 5 

Subtract the circle . . . . 24 



S.T. on lower meridian . . 6 4 5 

Referrmg now to the Tables of Houses for 
latitude 51° 30' (London) against sidereal time 
6 h. 4 m. 5 s., you wiU find 1°. 

Place this on the lower meridian, which is the cusp 
of the 4th House, and follow with ^ 7° on the 5th 
cusp, Xtjl T on the 6th, ic= 0° 47' on the Descendant, 
or 7th, zDz 25° on the 8th, and \ 25° on the 9th cusp, 
as you find them in the Tables. Then complete the 
circle by inserting the same degrees of the opposite 
signs on the remaining cusps. , The places of the 
celestial bodies are then calculated for the Greenwich 
time corresponding to the local time of the place of 
birth. 

The student who finds any difficulty in following 
these instructions will probably be better guided 
by carefully following some of the many examples 

D 2 



36 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



published in the text-books, manuals and guides, 
which are very plentiful and moderate in price. 
C'esi le premier pas qui coute, it is true, but once the 
initial stages of Astrology are passed successfully, 
a world of fascinating study will reward the careful 
and patient worker. 

Note. — It should be observed that the Midheaven 
and Ascendant are the only points which are 
mathematically determined by the calculation of a 
horoscope. The degrees on the cusps of the other 
Houses may conveniently, and indeed rationally, 
be allotted by dividing the entire degrees contained 
in each quadrant by three and adding the result 
to the degree on the Midheaven, or the Ascendant, 
according to quadrant involved. This is the 
method I myself use in practice. 



SECTION 111 



READING THE HOROSCOPE 
CHAPTER I 

PERSONAL APPEARANCE 

The personal appearance at maturity is to 
be judged from a combination of the following 
elements : — 

1. The rising sign. 

2. The sign occupied by its ruler. 

3. Planets in the rising sign. 

4. Those planets in exact aspect to the rising 
degree. 

Note that Saturn rising makes the complexion 
darker and the face thinner. Jupiter rising gives 
a fuller habit. Mars rising disposes to more 
colour or ruddiness and increases the stature. 
Thus a child born on the 7th of July, 1909, at 10.20 
p.m., with the Moon and Mars rising in Pisces, showed 
giant proportions before she was a year old, being 
then of dimensions equal to a well-nourished child 
of four years. The Sun rising gives a fair complexion 
I but often freckled or sunburnt in appearance. 

1 37 

I 



38 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Venus gives a beautiful and florid type. Mercury 
gives an alert look, with rather small, wizened 
features. The Moon gives fulness and disposes to 
lymphatic pallor. Mars rising generally gives a 
red mark, scar, cut or mole upon the face. Chaucer 
the poet, who was born with the rising of Mars in 
Taurus, says of himself : " Yet have I Martes mark 
upon my face." 

There are usually to be found moles or marks 
upon that part of the body which is ruled by the 
rising sign; that which is on the cusp of the 6th 
House; and the sign occupied by the Moon. This is 
so generally the case that I have frequently used 
these marks successful!}?- in planning a horoscope 
where the time of birth was in doubt. 

Neptune rising usually gives blue eyes, with a 
mystical expression. When this is absent, the 
deportment is often limp and the expression drowsy 
and dazed. 

Uranus rising gives angularity and slenderness 
to the body, together with a marked hrusquerie or 
eccentricity of action. , 

The Typal Forms 
due to the rising of the twelve signs are briefly 
as follows : — 

Aries. — Slender figure, lean body, long neck, 
broad forehead, narrow chin, curling hair, either 
sandy or black. 

Taurus, — Full body, strong shoulders^ full neck, 
waving brown hair. 



PERSONAL APPEARANCE S9 



Gemini, — Tall, well formed; long limbs, slender 
hands, long nose, rather wide mouth, brown hair, 
generally fine and straight. 

Cancer. — Short stature, broad chest, rounded 
features, broAvn hair, usually of a light tinge; full, 
fleshy body; small hands and feet. 

Leo. — Tall, well-developed and upright figure; 
curhng or wavy hair, florid complexion and large 
grey eyes. 

Virgo. — Lean body, large forehead, high cheek- 
bones, square jaws, long upper lip, brown hair. 

Libra. — Elegant figure, oval face, neat features, 
good complexion; rich brown hair, good teeth and 
nails. 

Scorpio. — Thick- set figure, sturdy appearance, 
swarthy complexion, wavy or curling hair ; glittering 
bright eyes. 

Sagittarius. — Tall, well-developed figure; high 
forehead, long features ; full, expressive eyes ; brown 
hair. 

Capricornus. — Strong, prominent features, mode- 
rate or small stature; dusky complexion, dark hair, 

Aquarius. — Well-developed and full figure; fine 
complexion; blue eyes; flaxen or light- brown hair; 
defective teeth. 

Pisces. — Small but full figure, small hands and 
feet; full eyes; pale, dusky complexion; black, 
straight hair. 

It is to be observed that pure types are seldom met 
with, but when a planet rises in its own sign it may 
be regarded as astrologically pure, if at the same 



40 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



time no planet is in close aspect to the rising degree. 
There remains, however, the fact of heredity, which 
will always operate towards the reproduction of the 
family type ; so that it becomes a matter of great 
experience and skill to correctly depict a person 
from the horoscope alone. It is a fact, however, 
that astrologers learn to recognize the various 
zodiacal types with great facility. King George V, 
it will be seen, is of the Aries type, blended with that 
of Leo in which Mars is posited. Neptune is rising, 
and the King early espoused the naval profession. 
Many of the King's portraits reflect the "drowsy" 
look peculiar to the planet Neptune. 



\ 



CHAPTER II 

THE CONSTITUTION 

is governed by the Sun and the rising sign. The 

vital signs are SP SI ^> ^i^y ^ig^^ ^^^^ 
vital ; while the weakest are £5 VJ 'nj and . 

The well aspected shows a strong constitution, 
with freedom from hereditary taint or organic 
disease. When badly aspected it shows organic 
troubles which in favouring circumstances will 
readily develop. Hereditary disorders are also thus 
discovered. 

The affliction being from fixed signs shows diseases 
of the heart, throat, blood and excretory system; 
flexed signs, the lungs, bowels and nervous system ; 
cardinal signs, the head, loins, stomach and skin. 

Saturn denotes obstructions, defects, privations; 
Jupiter enlargements and congestion; Mars inflam- 
matory action, lesions and remedies by the knife; 
Uranus shows paralysis and rupture ; Neptune hyper- 
sesthesia and neuropathic conditions, hysteria, etc., 
and all insidious wasting diseases. Venus shows 
defects of the mucous membrane and effects of 
poisonous elements; Mercury nervous disorders, 
especially of the voluntary arc of nerves and the 
cerebrum. The Moon disposes to irregularities and 
lack of co-ordination in the system. 

41 



CHAPTER III 



HEALTH 

The ]) is the chief factor, denoting the functional 
powers. When badly aspected it shows functional 
disorders in the same way that the Sun denotes 
organic disorders. The Sun shows incidental and 
the Moon accidental effects. The one is inherited 
and the other acquired. A functional derangement 
may excite an organic disorder and become a chronic 
illness. 

When the constitution is weak and the health 
good the person may live to a good age, but the first 
serious illness may kill. When the constitution is 
strong and the health bad much sickness may be 
endured without fatal effect. 

Consider, then, the Sun first of all, in regard to the 
constitution ; and next the Moon, in regard to the 
health. When the Ascendant is weak, and both 
the luminaries afflicted, predict a short life. When 
the rising sign is strong, and both Sun and Moon well 
supported, predict a long life. Moderate years are 
the result of mixed influences. 

When maladies are indicated by a planet afflicting 
the or ]) by evil aspect, the malady will be of 

42 



HEALTH 



43 



the nature indicated by the afflicting planet, and the 
part of the body affected will be that indicated by 
the sign it occupies. Thus the O i^i SI square 
to (5 in y would indicate inflammatory action in 
the throat, while in ^ in square to h in Tl[ 
would denote obstructions in the excretory system, 
appendicitis, etc. 

Children born when a malefic planet is rising and 
close to the Ascendant, or setting in opposition there- 
to, while at the same time the D is applying to an 
ill aspect of the malefics, seldom live beyond infancy. 
The time of their demise in such case can usually 
be measured by the number of degrees between the 
]) and its complete aspect to the nearest malefic, 
accounting one month for each degree. 



CHAPTER IV 



THE CHARACTER 

Take the constitutional groupings of the signs 
(Section I, chap, iii) and see whether the majority 
of the bodies are in fixed, flexed or cardinal signs. 
Judge of the mental type accordingly. 

Next observe the elemental groupings and note 
that which contains the majority of the bodies; 
and from this }' ou will know whether the character 
will be expressed on spiritual, mental, psychic or 
physical lines. The relative groupings will there- 
fore work out to one of the following types : — 







^ A 




□ = 




V 


□ V 


^ V 




□ + 





These sj^mbols have already been explained 
(Section I, chap, iii), together with their appHca- 
tions, so that there is no need to repeat them 
here. 

Thus, if the majoritj^ of the planets are in airy 
44 



THE CHARACTER 



45 



signs, and next in watery signs, the type will be of 
the mental-psychic; and if the majority are also in 
acute or cardinal signs, you will get the pioneer, 
with the initiative and progressive tendency working 
along intellectual and social lines; the intellect 
having, however, control over the emotions. 

The individual characteristics are contributed by 
those planets which are in aspect to 5 in the ]) ; 
for 5 governs the rational faculty and the ]) the 
natural, as Ptolemy affirms. 

Thus the manner and disposition, the expression 
of feeling, and the domestic and social traits are 
chiefly shown by the planetary aspects to the Moon ; 
while the intellectual and business faculties are 
shown by the condition of Mercury. 

Those planets which at birth happen to be on 
or near the Ascendant, or in the 9th or 3rd Houses, 
will greatly characterize the individual, on account 
of the great influence these parts of the heavens 
exert upon the mind. 

The specific characteristics of the planets and 
luminaries are as follows : — 

Neptune : subtlety, planning and scheming. A 
tortuous mind, but suave manner. Clever at plot 
and counterplot. A diplomat. Disposed to the 
drug, nicotine or other insidious habit. Fond of 
mysterious and detective work. Frequently touched 
with a mania for something. A possible genius. 

Uranus : inventive faculty, originality, wayward- 
ness, independence of spirit, abruptness. 

Saturn : secretiveness, caution, reserve, self- 



46 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



control., temperance, soberness; philosophical, 
thoughtful, brooding, melancholic, faithful. A good 
staunch friend, and an unrelenting enemy. 

Jupiter: generous, just, sympathetic; possessing 
a knowledge of human nature; joviality, a good 
judgment, fruitful intellect ; confidence ; sometimes 
too optimistic and even bombastic. 

Mars : courageous, daring, energetic ; fond of 
exploits ; enterprising ; frank, outspoken, petulant, 
zealous, and fond of freedom. 

The Sun : proud, dignified; possessed of self- 
confidence, generosity and magnanimity; disposed 
to the grandiose and magnificent; sometimes vain 
and haughty, yet free from meanness, and loving 
fair play and transparency; general^ honest and 
opposed to all cliques and cabals. 

Venus : gentle, kind, docile and persuasive ; loving 
music and the fine arts, bright and joyous scenes 
jewels and flowers; fond of pleasure, and frequently 
self-indulgent. 

Mercury : active, business-like and capable in 
affairs; of voluble speech; attentive to details 
punctilious and easily irritated; loving knowledge 
for its own sake; accessible and communicative. 

The Moon : changeful, vacillating ; versatile ; 
imaginative ; romantic ; loving travel and change of 
scene; sensitive and whimsical. 

Judgment as to character is first made by the 
grouping of the signs in order to get the type to which 
the subject belongs, and then by the aspects of the 
Moon and Mercury to determine the specific traits 



THE CHARACTER 



47 



or characteristics. Planets in the 1st, 9th and 3rd 
Houses have a very marked influence on the expres- 
sion of character. 

It is here to be observed that the same indication 
and its corresponding trait of character will work 
out differently in persons of the various types. 
Thus c5 g in a purely emotional type is liable 
to produce dangerous and destructive passions, 
which in an intellectual type would find expression 
in critical diatribe and free-thought ; while in the 
spiritual type it would beget a zealot; and in the 
material type a violent and unscrupulous firebrand, 
a maniac. 

There is one axiom which cannot be too strongly 
emphasized, and the student will do well to keep 
it always before him : The planets act upon us only 
in terms of ourselves. 

Mental derangement is shown by the affliction 
of ^, or ]), in IJj J f or TIJ^. Acute mania is shown 
by ^ d (? ^ > epilepsy by ^ afflicted 
by . But in such case there will be no remedial 
aspect from the benefic planets and none between 
the ]), g and the ascending degree. 



CHAPTER V 



ACCIDENTS 

Disposition to accidents is shown by the affliction 
of the Ascendant or the ]) by the adverse aspects of 
the violent planets h and $. If both the Sun 
and Moon are so afflicted and the afflicting planet 
be elevated above the luminaries, there is liability 
of a fatal termination, which only the intervening 
good aspect of or 5 can prevent. 

Note that a planet intervenes only when its aspect 
is formed before that of the afflicting body. 

MarswhQXi so afflicting the Ascendant or luminaries 
disposes to accidents by fire; also cuts, bleeding 
wounds and abrasions. In human signs IJ> — > 
it may bring operations or hurts by human hands. 
In watery signs, scalds; in fiery signs, burns; in 
earthy signs, abrasions. 

Saturn thus afflicting denotes falls, fractures, 
bruises, blows from falling objects, etc. In earthy 
signs by falls, earthquakes, explosions of mines, etc.; 
in watery signs, drowning; in airy signs, by falls 
from a height ; in fiery signs, by explosive missiles, 
etc. 

Uranus similarly afflicting denotes ruptures, 

48 



ACCIDENTS 



49 



broken bones, compound fractures, accidents by 
machinery, and all extraordinary casualties. 

Neptune shows danger of poisoning by drugs, 
noxious gases, etc. 

The source from which danger emanates is to be 
seen from the position of the afflicting planet, as if $ 
be in the 6th House, the hurt will come from physi- 
cians (surgeons) or servants; in the 3rd, on short 
journeys; in the 9th, in foreign lands; in the 5th, 
by sport or play, etc. The affliction being from the 
8th House is especially sinister, as it threatens a 
fatality. 

It may perhaps be well to note in these days of 
extended means of locomotion, that has special 
reference to hurts proceeding from defective 
machinery, break-downs, etc. h denotes collisions, 
$ firing or ignition, and when these planets afflict 
the Ascendant or luminaries from aerial signs, the 
danger of aviation is increased ; in watery signs, 
aquatics should be avoided; and in earthy signs 
motoring will add to the peculiar dangers to which 
the subject will be liable. 



CHAPTER VI 



THE FORTUNES 

The luminaries being in mutual good aspects, and 
the D otherwise well supported in the horoscope by 
benefic aspects, shows a successful career. If the 
planets are chiefly under the horizon or " below the 
earth," as it is otherwise called, then success comes 
after marriage, or late in life, as the case may be. 
But if above the horizon, then success is speedily 
achieved. Evil planets in the 4th House near the 
lower meridian show a poor termination to the career, 
even after a life of much success. Saturn in the 
Midheaven will bring a person to a good position 
and afterwards denude him of all benefits. 

Impediments come from those sources indicated 
by the Houses occupied by the malefic planets or 
those badly aspecting the ]), as if in the 7th by 
marriage or contracts ; in the 8th by legacies ; in the 
4th by mining, farming and real estate; and so of 
the rest. To be exceptionally fortunate the planet 
L\. should be in good aspect to one of the luminaries 
and angular, especially in the 1st or 10th. 

A benefic planet in the 4th House, not afflicted by 
adverse aspect, shows a successful finish to the career. 

50 



THE FORTUNES 



51 



The periods of good and ill fortune are to be 
specifically known only by reference to the " Direc- 
tional arcs " (see " Measure of Time "). 

Jupiter in good aspect to Uranus shows legacies 
and windfalls, while the same in good aspect to 
Saturn gives promise of an inheritance. Planets in 
the 2nd House are especially to be regarded in this 
matter, as that House has reference to the personal 
possessions and generally to the financial status 
of the subject. The luminaries therein, or one of 
them, well aspected by 9 » ^^^-j ^^^^ 8^^^ financial 
competence ; as also i4- or 9 therein, free from afflic- 
tion by adverse aspects. The malefics therein, or 
the luminaries badly aspected, show poverty and 
a continual struggle for a competence. 

Here again there is the personal equation involved, 
and all judgment is to be regulated by reference 
to the sphere of life into which the subject is born, 
his responsibilities, etc. The poverty of one man 
might well constitute the wealth of another in 
a humbler sphere of life. 

The planets act upon us in terms of ourselves 
and in proportion to the measure of our individual 
powers. 

Note. — In a female horoscope the Q will replace 
the ]), but in other respects the rules here given will 
apply. 



CHAPTER VII 



THE POSITION 

The majority of the planets rising between the 
4th and 10th eastward, show an ambitious and 
aspiring nature, a candidate for responsibiHty, one 
who will be independent, a " free lance," and restless 
under the yoke of servitude. Thus placed, the 
planets denote effort and ambition which will result 
according to that planet w^hich is nearest the Mid- 
heaven and on the oriental side of it. 

The more planets there are in angles, the 1st, 
10th, 7th or 4th, the more conspicuous will be the 
subject in his sphere of life. If at the same time in 
cardinal signs, he will be an epoch-making man or 
remarkable pioneer. 

Planets above the horizon show responsibility and 
some degree of eminence. 

Below the horizon and occidental, there is less 
prominence in the life. 

Benefic planets in the lOtli House (which governs 
the credit, honour and esteem) will contribute their 
aid in bringing the subject to a position of influence 
in his sphere of life. 

The end of life is shown by the 4th House. Malefic 
52 



THE POSITION 



53 



planets in the 10th bring a man early to a downfall, 
but if in the 4th House the end of life will be passed 
in tribulation or obscurity. 

If a man rises by patronage there will be indica- 
tions of it in the 11th House; and the horoscope of 
the benefactor will show marked sympathy with 
that of his beneficiary. 

The mundane aspects are of some considerable 
significance in this matter, for planets on the cusps 
of the Houses wiU materially affect the position for 
good, inasmuch as they are then in -)f or A to the 
Midheaven or Ascendant. Perhaps not enough has 
been made of these mundane aspects, and it is well 
that they should not be overlooked. Placidus de 
Titus, in his Primum Mobile, makes them the basis 
of his system of Prognostics. 

Similarly it has been observed that when planets 
are on the cusps of the Lunar Mansions, the person 
then born rises to eminence (Section I, chap. iii.). 

The majority of planets in or near any such 
degrees, viz. the 1st, 13th and 25th of the cardinal 
signs, the 9th and 22nd of the fixed signs, or the 
4th and 17th of the common signs, denotes one 
born to distinction. King George V has 5 planets, 
as well as the Midheaven and Ascendant, close to 
such degrees. 



CHAPTER VIIT 



THE OCCUPATION 

This is to be judged from the 6th House and the 
planets therein, together with the sign on its cusp. 

The signs have affinity with those things ruled 
by the Houses to which they correspond, as n to 
the 3rd House, ^ to the 5th, etc. 

The planets have their own significations : — 

Saturn has relation to minerals and heavy bodies, 
lead, etc. 

Jupiter to legal affairs, ecclesiastical matters. 
Mars to fire and iron, fighting, the military pro- 
fession. 

The Sun to gold ; civic dignitaries, the Crown and 
its officers, ambassadors, etc. 

Venus to art, music and matters of adornment. 

Mercury to literature, mercantile pursuits and 
affairs of traffic. 

The Moon to public employment, catering, retail 
business, etc. 

Uranus to electrical and scientific pursuits, and 
also to affairs of propaganda ; the civil service and 
positions of civic authority. 

Neptune to psychological and mysterious pursuits, 
also travelling and seafaring. 

54 



THE OCCUPATION 



55 



These are, of course, but loose and general signifi- 
cations. The position of the majority of the planets 
will indicate whether the life-work should be along 
spiritual, mental, social or mercantile lines, and 
the sign on the 6th House, the position of its ruler 
and the nature of any planet in the 6th House, will 
guide to a specific occupation. 

Fixed signs show inventors and producers, 
manufacturers. 

Flexed signs purveyors and factors, importers, 
travellers. 

Cardinal signs retailers, dispensers, organizers 
and directors, managers and those in prominent 
positions. 

Some illustrations of known cases may serve to 
illustrate the manner of interpretation : — 

1. ]) in in the 6th House — a dairy company 
manager. 

2. ^ in on 6th House — an accountant in a 
large tea importer's. 

3. U on 6th and g in }{ — a writer on occult 

philosophy. 

4. l\. in y in the 6th — an estate agent. 

5. £ir, in the 6th, with 9 in y — a stockbroker. 

6. f on the 6th and 4 in ::::: — a company 
promoter. 

7. n on 6th and g in — an exploration 
promoter. 

8. ]/)> on the 6th, with }^ in y — a coal merchant. 

9. 9 in ^ in the 6th — an artist. 



56 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Judgment on the choice of occupation must of 
necessity be guided by a number of considerations, 
questions of aptitude, education, training, sex, etc., 
being all largely involved. 

Taking all the planets in all the signs we have 
but 108 possible significations, while there are 
obviously more than that number of distinct occupa- 
tions. It must therefore suffice if the astrologer 
can give some hint of the line along which the 
occupation may be found. 

Thus fiery signs may denote spiritual things 
equally with those in which the element is the chief 
agent. 

Airy signs all mental occupations from the clerk 
to the professor of philosophy, as well as all those 
trades and occupations in which the pneumatic or 
air force is employed, even the lately developed 
pursuit of aviation and aeronautics generally. 

Watery signs may denote the social or emotional 
side of business, and all trades in which the watery 
element is chiefly employed, as in navigation, laundry 
work, the manufacture and sale of beverages, paint- 
ing, etc. 

Earthy signs may denote the manual and practical 
occupations, equally with those in which the products 
of the earth, mining, agriculture, estate development 
and similar occupations are concerned. 



CHAPTER IX 



MARRIAGE 

On this most important of all questions depend 
many very vital issues. Not only is the moral and 
spiritual welfare of the contracting parties involved, 
but that also of successive generations. 

It is not within the scope of this treatise to con- 
sider questions of expediency or fitness, or the deeper 
psychological questions of fascination, attraction 
and destiny. 

Suffice it to say that all horoscopes present them- 
selves to the expert as either marriageable or 
misogynous. 

The indications of marriage are as follows : — 
In a male horoscope the Moon (in a female the 
Sun) being oriental, i.e. in the S.E. or N.W. quadrant, 
and increasing in distance from the other luminary, 
shows an early marriage. Oriental and decreasing, 
or occidental and increasing, marriage at a more 
mature age. 

But if occidental and decreasing in distance from 
the other luminary, marriage will be deferred to a 
period past the prime of life. 

Venus at a male nativity (Mars at that of a female) 
57 



58 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

being afflicted by Saturn shows disappointed affec-' 
tions in early attachments; by Uranus, romantic 
attachment followed by enforced breach, or 
estrangement and rupture of relationship by 
exceptional incidents ; by Mars (Venus in a female 
case), impulsive attachments of a passionate and 
dangerous order ; by Neptune, deceptions and seduc- 
tions, impositions and fraudulent representations. 

The luminaries being in square or opposition to 
one another, and Venus afflicted, there will be no 
marriage. 

The 5th House governs all considerations of love 
affairs; the 7th House those of marriage. 

Saturn brings about loss of the partner by death, 
or it militates against happiness in marriage by 
defects of nature, by jealousy, coldness and suspicion. 

Uranus produces rupture of the marriage tie, 
divorce or separation, and, by marked eccentricity 
of the partner, tends to disturb the relationship. 

Mars shows licence, freedom, frequent quarrels 
and lack of forbearance and self-control. It fre- 
quently leads to violence and fatality. 

Neptune deception and insidious hurt. The 
partner is afflicted mentally or has unnatural and 
perverted appetites and desires. The partner may 
have a legal tie already, and generally has a history. 

In female horoscopes we substitute the for the 
]), and Mars for Venus ; but in other respects 
judgment is made for both sexes alike. 

Happiness in marriage is shown by the being 
•K- or A D; and by $ or 4, well aspected, being 



MARRIAGE 



59 



in the 7th House. Also if the planet to which the 
]) (male) or O (female) first forms an aspect 
(■)fj A> c? ^^6) softer birth, be a benefic and 
well-aspected, or any planet in good aspect to the 
benefics, there will be harmony in marriage. 

Unfortunate and unhappy unions take place when 
the D (or in the case of a woman) applies by 
evil aspect to a malefic planet, and the 7th House 
is occupied by a malefic or a planet badly aspected. 

In a female horoscope, the condition after marriage 
may be fairly predicted by reversing the horoscope 
and looking at it from the point of view that the 
Descendant is then the Ascendant and the Mid- 
heaven the Nadir. 

The marriage partner is described by the rules 
of the 7th House and the sign it occupies, or if it be 
retrograde, by its dispositor. 

[N.B. — A planet is said to dispose of another 
when the latter is in a sign it rules. Thus ^ in 
}{ is disposed of hj since Jupiter is the ruler 
of >{.] 

A man is most frequently attracted to a woman 
whose sun at birth occupies the place of Mars in his 
horoscope ; and always it will be found that a strong 
attachment is the result of this or a similar coinci- 
dence of the planets in horoscopes of the parties 
involved. 



CHAPTER X 



PROGENY ^ 

The 5th House and the Uth (being the 5th from 
the 7th), the 4th House and the 10th, are regarded 
in this matter. The Moon governs the maternal 
capacity, and the 4th and 5th Houses are those 
which give succession. 

In a male horoscope the 5th, 7th, 9th, 11th repre- 
sent the succession on the male side; the 4th, 6th, 
8th, 10th on the female side. 

In a female horoscope the 5th, 7th, etc., denote 
daughters, and the 4th, 6th, etc., sons. 

These points being duly noted, see if the 4th, 5th, 
10th and 11th are free from malefic planets. If so, 
and the Moon is in a prolific sign I'l, fljj, then there 
will be progeny. But if the malefics occupy any of 
these Houses there will be some loss of progeny. 

A benefic, or the ]) well aspected in a fruitful 
sign 25, 'n[, }{ and in the 5th House, shows a large 
family. 

Lack of progeny is shown by Saturn, Uranus or 
Mars in the 5th House in a sterile sign ^, l/)o); 
or the ]) so placed in any House and afflicted by 
Saturn; and usually Saturn denies succession along 

60 



PROGENY 



61 



those lines indicated by its House, according to the 
sex of the horoscope. 

It has been argued that when children are born at 
the same time, the potential of the horoscopes of 
the respective parents operates for a difference of 
fortune. Thus, if two women give birth to progeny 
at the same time, and one parent has % in the 5th 
House, while the other parent has h there at birth, 
the result may well be that one child will be properly 
developed and nourished, while the other, under the 
maternal tradition of an evil Saturn, will be puny 
and of weak vitality. But this is an argument 
which by the premises is not, in fact, in accord with 
nature, for when this diversity of fortune as regards 
progeny is shown in the horoscopes of different 
parents, it will be found that the progeny are born 
at times which develop influences in accord with 
the potential of the parental horoscopes. 

Twins are generated by those in whose horoscopes 
the ]) is in a double-bodied sign H, or a 

planet is in such a sign in the 5th House at birth. 

The phenomenon of twin births is a complete 
argument for the truth of Astrology. We have the 
cases of the Cloughs of Pudsey, the Webbs who 
played the two Dromios in the Comedy of Errors; 
the famous Morrell twins, and many others whose 
lives were exactly parallel from birth onwards. 
The case of John Hemming the ironmonger's son, 
who was born at the same time and in the same 
parish of St. Martins-le-Fields as King George III, 
proves that planetary influence is more significant 



62 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



than heredity. For John Hemming 's father died, 
and he succeeded to the business at the same time 
that George II died and George III came to the 
throne. They were both similarly afflicted by tem- 
porary loss of mental faculty, they had the same 
number of children, and they died on the same day 
and nearly at the same hour. 

It is to be observed that there are two kinds of 
twins : monovates and biovates. Monovates ar 
born from a double fertilization within the same 
amnion, while biovates are born from two distinc 
ova. In the latter case we may look for a grea 
diversity of faculty and development. 

The fact that two children born at different tim 
of the same parents, brought up under exactl 
similar conditions, and fed at the same board 
develop along widely divergent lines, goes to sho 
that heredity may count for something, but tha 
planetary influence counts for a great deal more. 



CHAPTER XI 



TRAVELLING 

The signs of travelling are as follows : — 

The majority of the planets in cardinal and com- 
mon signs (otherwise called movable and flexed), 
or, alternatively, many planets in angles and cadent 
Houses, show travelling. 

The circumstance of travelling is judged from the 
3rd House for short (inland) journeys, and from the 
9th House for voyages and long journeys. 

If the malefic planets are in these Houses, judge 
evils will befall of the nature of the planet, as Saturn 
delays, impediments, privations ; Mars hurts and 
disputes, fighting, fires, etc; Uranus Sb breakdown, 
sudden calamities, mechanical defects, etc ; Neptune 
ambushes, plots, betrayals, frauds, treacheries. 

When malefic planets occupy these Houses, it is 
not good for the subject to travel. 

By regarding the threatening planet and the 
nature of the sign it is in (fire, air, water, earth), you 
may predict the exact nature of the danger. But 
if the benefic planets are in the 9th House, benefits 
will arise from foreign travel. 

63 



64 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Where there are no planets so placed, regard the 
nature of the rulers of the signs on their cusps, the 
aspects they receive, and judge as if that ruler were 
actually in the House itself. Thus if no planet is 
in the 9th, and the sign on the cusp is Capricorn, 
then look to Saturn's position and aspects. If in 
the 8th House and afflicted, there is danger of death; 
in the 2nd, well aspected, gain will follow a long resi- 
dence abroad; and so of the rest. 

Observe that Saturn always demands the " time " 
consideration. He does nothing quickly, but he 
rewards patience. Uranus, on the other hand, acts 
without warning either in rewarding or despoiling. 
Mars always exacts a tussle, and you must work 
strenuously and fight hard for his best gifts. Neptune 
favours a scheme or plot, and dearly loves the 
diplomat. 

These interpretations may be read into other 
sections of the book of life. They do not specifically 
or solely apply to travelling. 

Planets well aspected, especially benefic planets 
in the 1st, 4th or 10th Houses, promise success in the 
land of one's birth. The allurements of foreign 
travelling should in such case be ignored. This 
matter has much bearing upon the question of 
emigration. 



CHAPTER XII 



FRIENDS AND ENEMIES 

The Moon or Mercury well aspected will give 
many friends; benefic planets in the 11th House, 
or the ruler of the 11th House well aspected, the 
same. The O in good aspect to the D always gives 
many favours and general success through friends. 

The case is quite otherwise if you find these signifi- 
cators badly aspected or malefic planets in the 11th 
House. Judge of the effects by the nature of the 
planets involved, as well as their aspects. 

The 7th House shows rivals and open enemies, 
opponents in business, etc.; but the 12th House 
shows secret enemies. 

Malefic planets in the angles of the horoscope 
show many contentions and fatal disputes. Benches 
there denote abundant success through the support 
of adherents and friends. 

Sympathy and Antipathy 
It will be found that persons whose horoscopes 
are in disagreement will inevitably quarrel or oppose 
one another's interests ; while those whose horoscopes 
are in agreement will mutually assist one another 
and evince consistent good-will. 

05 F 



66 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Some of these relationships may be localized by 
reference to the positions of the benefic and malefic 
planets in a horoscope. Thus if ^ be in T 10°, it 
will follow that any person born on or near the 1st 
of April in any year will have the © Sun at his or 
her birth in the same place as this Saturn, and this 
is quite sufficient cause for him whose Saturn it is 
to avoid all persons born on the 1st of April. 

The O in one horoscope on or in good aspect to 
the D in another, will warrant a close friendship. 

When $ in one horoscope is on $ in another, and 
they are of opposite sexes, a dangerous passion may 
be developed. 

Nothing, perhaps, in the whole system of astrology 
can answer more clearly and satisfactorily to the 
test of experiment than this matter of sympathy 
and antipathy as shown by the relative positions in 
two horoscopes. Did space permit, it would be 
possible to displaj^ the foundations of every great 
feud or war which has set man against man and 
involved the fate of whole empires and the lives of 
thousands of men. It is significant that everything 
is to be traced back to the relative positions of 
the planets in the horoscopes of the rival kings 
or rulers. 



CHAPTER XIII 



THE KIND OF DEATH 

The positions of the malefic planets must be 
considered, especially regarding such as may be in 
the 8th or 4th Houses, or those which may afflict 
the O or ]) when in these Houses. The nature of 
the sign occupied by the afflicting planet, together 
with that of the planet itself, will determine the 
cause of death (see " Constitution," Section III, 
chap. ii.). 

Violent deaths are threatened when both the 
O and ]) are separately afflicted by a malefic 
i^>^) ^ or one of the luminaries has a double 
affliction by the conjunction or evil aspect of the 
malefics. 

Saturn thus afflicting brings faUs, crushing, suffo- 
cation. 

Uranus electrocution, lightning-stroke, sunstroke, 
accidents by machinery, and suicide. 

Mars wounds by steel and iron, burning, ex- 
plosions ; scalding by virulent acids ; surgical 
operation, etc. 

Neptune ambushes and traps; insidious poisoning; 
obsession, etc. 

.67 F3 



68 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



As regards the nature of the signs : Fiery signs 
have relation to electrical, heat and other pheno- 
mena. Airy signs are related to human agency, 
atmospheric phenomena, gaseous effects. Watery 
signs have relation to the passional phases of human 
life, and to the watery element, as well as to mfiam- 
mable oils, petrol, etc. Earthy signs have relation 
to mining disasters, matters relating to the earth 
and its products, coal and other minerals, earth-' 
quakes and seismic effects generally. 

A violent death is not to be predicted when, the 
O or J) being thus afflicted b}^ the malefics, there is 
an interposing ray from one of the benefic planets 
i-l- or for then there will be intervention and 
succour. An interposing ray proceeds from any 
planet which throws a benefic aspect to the luminary 
so that it falls between the malefic aspect and the 
luminary. This is called " abscission " by the old 
authors. It is too often overlooked by modern 
exponents. 



SECTION IV 



THE MEASURE OF TIME 
CHAPTER I 

ON DIRECTIONS 

A VARIETY of methods have been employed by 
astrologers at different periods and in various 
countries to ascertain the precise time at which the 
portents of the horoscope will find fulfilment. 

The Hindus divide the whole fife into periods 
called dashas, and these are again divided into huk- 
this, and these again into antarams; so that a very 
close calculation may be made by this means. The 
method, however, is based upon the Sayana system 
of astronomy, which reckons from the fixed star 
Revati (? Fomalhaut) and ignores the precession of 
the equinoxes. The system is perfectly consistent, 
but it cannot readily be applied to the European 
zodiac; and it may be omitted from the exposition 
without hurt to its integrit3^ The student is referred 
to the work of Parashara known as Pardshara 
Hora for full instruction as to the methods of this 
system, and some account of it will be found in 
my Manual of Astrology, 

The Chaldeans — and after them the Arabians — 
69 



70 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



took account of the progress of the planets and the 
luminaries after birth, accounting each day after 
birth as a year of life ; and from the aspects formed 
between the celestial bodies by their progress among 
themselves and as regards their positions at the 
birth, they judged of the course of events. This 
system is the one most in vogue among astrologers 
to-day, and, rightly regarded, it is undoubtedly a 
ready means to a correct forecast of the time and 
nature of events. 

Claudius Ptolemy took account chiefly of the 
rising and culmination of the bodies by the rotation 
of the earth on its axis, whereby the bodies are 
carried round the earth forming aspects to the 
radical positions. The measure of time used by him 
was that of Right Ascension, accounting 4 mins. or 
1 degree to each year of life. 

The analogy between this system and that of the 
Arabians is that the Sun's progress in the zodiac 
after birth is at the approximate rate of 1 degree 
per day, which is accounted as 1 year of life, while 
1 degree of Right Ascension is also equal to 1 year 
of life. 

Placidus confirmed this system and added the 
mundane aspects, bringing the bodies to the cusps 
of the Houses to form " directions " to the Ascendant 
and Midheaven, and to proportionate distances 
from the meridian or horizon to form mundane 
aspects to other bodies not at birth upon the cusps. 
In this system one-third of the semi-arc of a planet 
was accounted equal to one House, and half the 



THE MEASURE OF TIME 71 



pemi-arc was equal to an aspect of 45°, the semi- 
square. 

The method I have advocated for many years 
and have consistently used in practice is as follows : — 

For each year of life add one day to that of birth 
and set the figure for the hour and place of birth. 
This will give the progressed Midheaven, the pro- 
gressed Ascendant^ and the progressed place of 
the Sun. The aspects formed by these to the 
planets at birth and in the progress will constitute 
Primary Directions, and the aspects formed by the 
progressed planets to the Midheaven, Ascendant, 
Sun and Moon in the Radix will also be included in 
this category. 

This system has the advantage of calculating the 
Arcs of Direction and equating them by the Sun's 
true motion at the same time. If it be contended 
that the arcs thus obtained are not as exact as those 
obtained by spherical trigonometry^, inasmuch as 
they only measure to the nearest year of fulfilment, 
I would ask how many Arcs calculated by the latter 
method find fulfilment at the fractional part of the 
year represented by the minutes of a degree ? 
" Zadkiel " (Commander Morrison, R.N.) frankly 
admitted that the influence of an Arc of Direction 
extended over a considerable period and that it was. 
brought into effect by the concurrence of Secondary 
or Lunar Directions, transits and eclipses. 

Hence the experiences of " Zadkiel " and myself are 
entirely in accord, and I have no hesitation in saying 
that all the periodic changes in life may be accurately 



72 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



foretold by reference to the Primary Arcs formed by 
the diurnal progress of the planets ; while the precise 
time of the crises and the specific nature of events 
may be known by reference to the radical import 
of the planets involved, and to the aspects formed 
by the Moon in its progress. 

The Primary Directions, therefore, will com- 
prise : — 

1. Aspects formed by the progressed Midheaven 

to the radical and progressed places of the 
planets. 

2. Similar aspects formed by the progressed 

Ascendant. 

3. Similar aspects formed by the progressed Sun. 

4. Aspects formed by the progressed planets to 

the Midheaven, Ascendant, Sun and Moon in 
the Radix. 

It is thus possible at any time to determine the 
influences operating in a horoscope. Let us take 
those of King George V in the year 1911. 



CHAPTER II 



EXAMPLE OF DIRECTIONS 

Primary Directions in Horoscope, 3rd June, 1865 
at 1.18 a.m., London. 

Arc for 1911 = 46 days, or July 19, 1865. 

h. m, s. 

Midheaven, at noon 18-7-'65 . . 7 49 10 
Time since noon . . . . . . 13 18 

Equation for 13 h. 18 m. at 10" . . 2 12 



Midheaven progressed . . . . 21 9 22 

This gives the Midheaven in 15° and reference to 
the Tables of the Houses for London shows the 
Ascendant then to be in n 21°. The Sun's progressed 
position is 2Z 27°. 

We thus have the following positions : — 

Midheaveri P. ^ts 15" —ab ^ Q B. — § 5 F — ad 

□ 5 R, ac^Q DR. 
Ascendant P. U 21°— ah l t—ad A f;) R, ^ ? R, (? 4 R. 
Bun P. es 27°— ^ O □ b 

Sun R. n 12^— ad ? P, a6 ^ ^ P. 

[Note. — Progressed p sitions are marked P, and 
Radical positions R.] 

73 



74 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



It will be seen, then, that the Midheaven is depart- 
ing from a good aspect of the 1^1 1 will 
be exactly in opposition to 5 

Observe that ^ at birth was on the cusp of the 
2nd House, and has a distinctly financial bearing 
on the destiny. Here it opposes the Midheaven. 
Hence there will be disquieting developments in 
financial circles, and the fiscal position will be such 
as to create anxiety throughout the country. 
Taurus^ wherein Mercury was at birth, rules Ireland, 
and Leo, where the planet is situate in the progress, 
rules Australia. We may thus expect many govern- 
mental anxieties to arise from these parts of the 
King's dominions. 

The Ascendant is approaching the good aspect 
of Saturn, which will contribute to the advantage 
of the Queen at a near date. The semi-square 
of Venus about the same time — namely, three years 
hence — will bring a bereavement ; while the opposi- 
tion of Jupiter a year later will produce losses through 
the interference of a foreign Power and troubles 
in Spain (ruled by Sagittarius). 

The Sun is in semi-square aspect to its own place, 
which disposes to discord in the capital and threatens 
some unpleasant incidents in the course of short 
journeys. There may also be dissensions among 
the King's relatives. But the approach of Venus 
to the radical place of the Sun will largely operate 
to forfend against all evils of health or estate, and 
will in due course contribute to the King's revenue. 

The Primary Directions are therefore mainly 



EXAMPLE OF DIRECTIONS 75 

beneficent. It will be seen that King Edward VII died 
under the influence of ©□!;), and Ascendant l $ , 
and a transit of Uranus over the opposition of Sun P, 
following the lunar eclipse of the 4th June, 1909, in 
opposition to the Q ^ in ^his horoscope. 

A glance at the Tables of Houses will reveal the 
fact that the Ascendant is approaching 17 29°, in 
which degree the malefic planet M is situate at birth ; 
while a cursory view of the Ephemeris for 1865 shows 
the Sun at the same time close to the place of Mars 
in the horoscope of birth, and as both ^ and h 
will then be in the early degrees of Leo in transit 
over O P it may be inferred with some certainty 
that the health and fortunes of the King will then 
be jeopardized. This calculation brings out the 
year 1918 as critical. The Midheaven of the horo- 
scope will then be in the 23rd degree of Aquarius 
where 1^1 is in transit, the Ascendant in Gemini 29^ 
being in the longitude held by ^ at the King's 
birth. 



CHAPTER HI 



SECONDABY DIRECTIONS 

It has been seen that the Primary Directions 
give the general tone of the life at any specified period 
without definition of time or circumstance. The 
features are lacking ; we have only the general out- 
line. It is to the Lunar Directions, the aspects 
formed month by month in the Moon's progress 
after birth, that we must look for the details — or at 
least some considerable part of them. 

The method emploj-ed in calculating the Second- 
ary or Lunar arcs is as follows : — 

Take the age of the subject at the commencement 
of any secular year, in years, months and days. 
Call the 3^ears days^ multiply the months by 2 and 
call them hours ^ and the days by 4 and call them 
minutes. Thus : — 

yrs. mths. daj^s 
1911 1 1 = 1st Jan., 1911. 
1865 6 3 = 3rd June, 1865. 

45 6 28 = 45v. 6m. 28d. 
2 4 

13h. 52 m. 
Add birth time 1 18 a.m. 

115 10 a.m. 

To convert — 12 

3 10 p.m. 

^ When this amount exceeds 24 hours, subtract 24 hours and 
add one day to the first column. 



SECO^DAEY DIRECTIONS 77 



We therefore add 45 days to the date of birth, 
and take the Moon's place at 3.10 p.m. on that day. 

From 3rd to end of June 1865 = 27 days, and 
18 more will make 45 days = 18th July. 

The ])'s longitude on this day at 3.10 p.m. = U 4 14'. 

The D's diurnal motion at this time is 13° 45' 
which we divide by 12 = 1° 9' nearly, since 1 day = 
1 year, and 2 hours = 1 month. The ])'s directional 
motion is therefore 1° 9'. 

We can now prepare a table for the whole year, 
as follows, filling in the ])'s aspects to the radical 
and progressed places of the planets, thus : — 



1911. 






Jan. 


4" 


11 14' 


Feb. 


5 


23^ ^R^/ 5 


March 


6 


32 


April 


7 


41 


May 


8 


50 Q \ n:£h;l—[^ 


June 


9 


59 A '^^RV/1— (5 ?Pn/i2 


July 


11 


8_OP25,,3 


Aug. 


12 


17(5© Rn/3 


Sept. 


13 


26^^PSl/4 


Oct. 


14 


35 


Nov. 


15 


44 


Dec. 


16 


53 



The positions of the planets are marked R (radical) 
and P (progressive), together with the signs they are 
in and the House they occupy in the Radix or Pro- 
gress, as the case may be. 

It will be observed that the D completes its 



78 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



course and comes again to its own place at the 
nativity after 27 days, when it begins again to form 
the same series of aspects to the radical places of the 
planets, as in the preceding revolution. But the 
solar aspects will have changed entirely and do not 
repeat themselves for 365 years. Meanwhile the 
Progress has carried the planets into different signs, 
and in some cases into different Houses also; giving 
them new meanings and significations and bringing 
them into play under entirely different relative 
conditions. 

The interpretation of the above directions must 
have reference to the nature of the planet, the House 
and the sign it is in. Thus : — 

February will be likely to develop martial stimulus ; 
increase of military strength; success in arms if 
engaged at this time; successful projects and enter- 
prises; colonial expansion and development ; military 
honours may be given to a Prince of the Royal 
House. 

May brings some danger of indisposition to the 
Queen. At this time treaties are rescinded or 
impeded. 

June brings naval honours, development of the 
marine interests; favourable interventions; some 
pageants, festivities or celebrations; a prosperous 
and enjoyable period; felicitations and pleasures. 

July is unfortunate for journeys by short sea 
passage. The health of His Majesty may show 
signs of reaction, inducing a feverish habit and 
some passmg derangement of the digestive organs. 



SECONDARY DIRECTIONS 79 



August gives opportunity for beneficial changes 
and journeys, honours, eclat, conventions, etc., in 
the capital. 

September gives activity, change of venue, success- 
ful journeys, beneficial administration of property. 

It is particularly to be noted that the Lunar 
Directions are subsidiary to the Primary Directions 
in force, and can only operate to produce marked 
effects when in agreement. Wlien contrary to the 
Primaries they may pass without appreciable varia- 
tion of the fortunes. The tendency indicated by 
the Lunar Directions will, however, be sufficientl}^ in 
evidence to warrant attention, even when at variance 
with the Primaries. A good period under Primary 
influences cannot, however, be negatived by Second- 
aries, but only temporarily interrupted during the 
sway of the adverse Lunar configuration. 

Thus in the Royal Horoscope we find ^ coming 
to the Sun's radical place, and in June 1911 ]) <5 ?• 
The summer season wiU therefore in every way 
comport with the auspicious influence of the planet 
Venus. 

Observe, also, that in every case what is not 
potential cannot be expressed from the horoscope; 
nor can the planets dispose after a manner that is 
unnatural to the subject, but in all cases the planets 
evoke that which is potential in the character and 
possible in the circumstances. It is in this sense 
that character and environment shape our destiny 
under the action of the celestial modifiers. 



CHAPTER IV 



TRANSITS AND ECLIPSES 

The Transits of the major planets i^", 1^1, h , 4, 
are of great importance. They are capable of inter 
fering with the fulfilment of any measure of good" 
or ill fortune indicated by the " Directions."' The 
most marked effects follow upon transits that are 
in agreement with the nature of current directions. 
The word " effects " is of course privileged : a better 
term is indications. The reason for this is that 
a planetary transit or direction may operate in the 
horoscope of a man to indicate the death of his 
father, but it cannot be said with any show of reason 
that it caused the death, and it is an open question 
whether similar positions in the horoscope of the 
parent can be said to " cause " his demise. It is, 
at all events, a point on which I am not prepared 
to dogmatize. 

Be that as it may, it is certainly the fact that the 
transits of the major planets are of singular value 
in this system of prognostics. 

The points of the horoscope to be regarded in 
this connection are the longitudes of the Midheaven, 
Ascendant, Sun and Moon, both in the Radix and 



TRANSITS AND ECLIPSES 81 



Progress. The portent of such a transit must be 
derived from the House in which the planet may be 
found : (a) in the Radix, when the transit is over a 
radical point; (h) in the Progress, when it is over a 
progressive point. 

The stationary positions of the planets when 
coinciding with the significant points of the horo- 
scope are of special significance and have, in the 
estimation of most astrologers, a value equal to 
Primary Directions. 

The transits in the Royal Horoscope for 1911 are 
as shown in the followmg schedule : — 

Jan. 

Feb. $ 6 M.C.—}^ 5 P. 
March 

April R.-4 <? R. 

May 

June $ ^ Asc. 
July 

Aug. Ip ^ O P. 
Sept. 

Oct. ^ stationary 6 Q I^- 

Nov. O P. 

Dec. 

The most important of these are ^ P, which 
is in operation more or less throughout the year, 
and the stationary position of Mars close to the Q R 
in October. These will undoubtedly have a disturb- 
ing effect on the affairs of the Empire, and as Ijl is 
in Capricorn it is to be judged that India will be 

G 



82 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



the scene of many political upheavals. Affairs o 
State will not go smoothly in the Peninsula, an 
the political insurgent will be to the fore. Foreig 
affairs, denoted by the 9th House of the Progress 
will give rise to many surprising developments. 

The transits of Mars are less significant, bein 
of short duration, but the stationary position is ver 
critical and disposes to strained relationships an 
frequently threatens war. 

In the interpretation of planetary positions in 
Royal Horoscope it will be found that a more than 
personal signification must be given to them ; for the 
horoscope of a king is representative and focal as 
much as personal. 

Eclipses 

The lunations or conjunctions and syzyges of 
the luminaries recur on the same day every 19 years. 
During the course of the year the lunations gain 
from 10 to 11 days upon the calendar. But whether 
a new Moon constitutes an eclipse of the Q , or a full 
Moon an eclipse of the Moon, will depend upon the 
nearness of the Moon to its Node at the time. The 
node is that point where the ])'s path crosses the 
ecliptic or path of the Sun. 

From most ancient times it has been known that 
eclipses recur after a period of 18 years and 10 to 11 
days. Consequently, we know that the eclipse 
cycle is carried forward through the zodiac at 
the rate of about 10° in 18 years, and that the 
same eclipse recurs after an interval of 651 years, 



TRANSITS AND ECLIPSES 83 



when the eclipses will fall in the same part of the 
zodiac. 

Eclipses falling on the significant points of a 
horoscope portend evil. 

Affecting the Midheaven, they are disastrous to 
the position, honour and credit of the subject. 
On the Sun they threaten male life, and on the Moon 
female life; and are dangerous to the parents or 
such as may be of the indicated sex, as well as to the 
subject of that sex. On the Ascendant, eclipses 
threaten the health of the subject. Falling on the 
places of the planets they show hurts of the nature 
determined by the planet and affect the affairs 
governed by the House in which it falls. 

Thus in 1909 there was an eclipse of the Sun in 
n 26^ which fell in opposition to the Ascendant of 
King Edward's horoscope, and in the same month 
there was a total eclipse of the Moon in opposition 
to the place of the Sun in the horoscope of the Prince 
of Wales. Thus King Edward's health was threat- 
ened, and danger to the father was shown in the 
Prince's horoscope. 

Eclipses do not operate at once, but are brought 
into effect at a time proportionate to their distance 
from the horizon at the time of the ecliptic con- 
junction of the luminaries, and are subsidiary to the 
Primary Directions in force at the period. 

Lunations 

have a current influence in regard to the events likely 
to happen during the succeeding month. The 

G 2 



84 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



lunation falling in good aspect to the radical place 
of the planets shows a successful month, the benefi 
coming from the source indicated by the Hous 
in which the planet was at birth. 

The positions of the planets at a lunation in regar 
to the positions of its significators (Midheaven 
Ascendant, Sun and Moon) at birth, are of grea 
importance, and can freely be used as indicator 
of events during the succeeding month. 

The Diurnal Horoscope 

This scheme is set each day for the hour an 
minute of the birth, so that the Sun is always a 
the same distance from the meridian as at th 
nativity. 

The days on which the malefic planets cross th 
angles of the figure, and those on which the radic 
places of the malefics similarly affect the meridia 
and horizon, may be regarded as of evil import 

Thus on the 6th May, 1910, the diurnal horoscop 
of King George V showed ^ 5° on the Midheave 
and etc 5° rising. Mercury on that day was in n 5 
and therefore in opposition to the Midheave 
while the place of Mars at birth in 5° was setting 
in opposition, therefore, to the Ascendant of th 
diurnal horoscope. At the birth of King Georg 
$ was in the 5th House, which is the 8th from th 
10th, showing the death of the father. King 
Edward died near midnight of that day, and this 
sad event was very clearly anticipated and predicted. 



TRANSITS AND ECLIPSES 85 



In King Edward's diurnal horoscope for this date 
^ was culminating and the radical place of ^ 
(Neptune) was setting. 

The diurnal horoscope may often be used to correct 
the time of birth, when it is not accurately known, 
providing that the exact date of some important 
event is given. 

Thus on the 24th June, 1902, when King Edward 
was suddenly taken ill on the eve of the projected 
Coronation ceremony. Mars in the diurnal horoscope 
occupied the Midheaven, and from this circumstance 
— taken in conjunction with the recent eclipse of the 
Sun in opposition to the Sun's place at the nativity — 
the opinion was freely expressed that the intended 
ceremony would not take place then. 

Planetary Conjunctions 

Great importance is attached to the conjunctions 
of the major planets, and it may be said that no 
phenomenon of this kind ever happens but it is 
attended by great mutations and upheavals in the 
political, religious and physical worlds. 

The conjunctions of Uranus with Neptune recur 
in about 170 years, the last being that in Capricornus 
in 1821, and the next, which will occur in the same 
sign, does not happen until 1991. 

The conjunctions of Ijl and occur every 46th 
year, having taken place in 1806, 1851-52, and 1897, 
the next being in the sign n in 1942. 

Those of Saturn and Jupiter occur every 20th 
year, e. g, 1821, 1842, 1861, 1881, 1901, 1921. 



86 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



The conjunctions of the two malefic planets 
and which being of opposite nature appear to 
produce very remarkable and violent effects, are 
worth more than cursory notice. They almost 
constitute chronometric or historical pointers. 

Thus in November 1897 there was a conjunction 
of \ and ^ in ^ , the ruling sign of Spain, and in 
April of the following year Spain was involved in 
the disastrous war with the United States of America, 
by which Spain lost the last of its foreign possessions 
in the Philippines and was heavily indemnified. 
In December of 1899 another conjunction occurred 
and the following year King Humboldt of Italy 
was assassinated. Predictions of the Hispano- 
American War and of the Red Hand in Italy may be 
found in " Coming Events " for the years 1897 and 
1899. At the end of 1901 there was a conjunction 
in the sign Capricomus. 

In December 1903 the conjunction took place 
in Aquarius, the ruling sign of Russia, and was 
immediately followed by the Russo-Japanese War 
in which Russia, represented by Aquarius, was 
defeated. 

In December 1905 the conjunction again fell in 
Aquarius, and was followed by the terrible massacre 
on " Red Sunday " at Moscow. 

In December 1907 the conjunction was in Pisces, 
the ruling sign of Portugal, which was foUowed by 
the assassination of the King and Crown Prince of 
Portugal on February 3rd, 1908. 

In December 1909 the conjunction took place 



TRANSITS AND ECLIPSES 87 



in V, the ruling sign of England. The death of 
King Edward VII followed in May 1910, after a 
great political crisis in the beginning of the year. 

The next conjunction will fall in y , the ruling 
sign of Ireland, in the month of August. The last 
such conjunction took place in 1881, the year of the 
Phoenix Park murders. Who can doubt, in the face 
of such evidence as the above, that a period of great 
distress and violence will ensue ? In the year 1913 
the greatest conflagration that has taken place since 
the Great Fire will probably be recorded, for then 
the malefic planets are conjoined in the ruling sign 
of London. A great upheaval will also doubtless 
take place in America. 

It will be observed that the conjunctions of ^ 
and ^ take place every second year, when they are 
one sign further advanced in the zodiac. 

I find a specific reference to this phenomenon 
in the Works of Sir George Wharton, edited by 
John Gadbury, wherein Wharton devotes an essay 
to Ireland's War, and this event was referred to the 
conjunction of Saturn and Mars in B 14° 27', on the 
12th June, 1646 (O.S.). In 1648 the conjunction fell 
upon the 28th June (O.S.), and was in n (Gemini), the 
ruling sign of London. The fate of King Charles I 
and the Irish Rebellion are in strict astrological 
accord with these positions of the malefic planets. 
In 1650 the conjunction fell in Cancer, the ruling 
sign of Scotland, and immediately Cromwell invaded 
Scotland, which country had espoused the cause of 
Prince Charles, and in event the Reformer accounted 



88 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



for 3,000 killed and 10,000 prisoners. In Holland, 
also ruled by Cancer, there were at this time terrible 
inundations, predicted by Mr. Culpepper. 

Dating back to 1644, when the conjunction fell 
in Aries, the ruling sign of England, we find the 
decisive battle of Marston Moor, the bloodiest of the 
whole Revolution in England, in conformity with the 
canons of astrology and the reputation of the malefic 
planets. 

It will be seen that the conjunctions of the two 
malefics produce sharp and sudden calamities, 
and as " chronocraters " they form a valuable 
feature in celestial revolutions. After 265 years 
the conjunction occurs about the same place in the 
zodiac. Thus in parallel we have the following : — 

1644-1909 Conjunction in Aries 
1646-1911 „ Taurus 

1648-1913 „ Gemini 

1650-1915 „ Cancer 

etc. ' etc. 

The effects of the conjunctions of Saturn and 
Jupiter last for 20 years, those of Saturn and Mars 
only two years ; yet the latter are mostly to be feared, 
because of their calamitous nature, their swiftness 
and violence. Great mutations and reforms are 
inaugurated under the influence of h d ^-, religious 
and sectarian strife generally follows upon ^- d S, and 
the effects are seldom prolonged beyond two years 
in any one place ; while the influence of ^ is of 
a violent, revolutionary and sanguinary nature. 



TRANSITS AND ECLIPSES 89 



It is rather in the hope of stimulating research 
than of presenting a complete case for astrology that 
the foregoing notes have been introduced to these 
pages. Michael Nostradamus was a master of 
planetary periods, and his prophecies are among the 
most remarkalDle on record. 

Conclusion 

The doctrine of nativities as outlined in the fore- 
going pages will be found one of the most fascinating 
and instructive studies to which the mind of man can 
be directed. Needless to say, the conviction of 
the fact of interplanetary action and that of planet- 
ary action in human life cannot fail to open up 
new views of life and to stimulate deeper thought 
concerning the nature, origin and destiny of the 
soul of man. 

Other aspects of the same subject are to be found 
in State Astrology, which concerns the destiny of 
nations and kingdoms, the condition of the people, 
and matters of a general or public interest. This 
phase of astrology is chiefly confined to the writers 
of almanacs. 

Astro-meteorology is now in a position to success- 
fully compete with any system of weather prediction 
based upon observations. Although inadequate to 
an unerring forecast of the daily changes of weather, 
it can with great accuracy afford remarkable predic- 
tion of storm periods and earthquakes, and has the 
advantage of not being limited to current observa- 
tions. The storm and earthquake periods are given 



90 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



in the almanacs a year in advance of the event. 
The general condition of the weather over any period 
can also be given with much accuracy. 

Horary Astrology is a method of divination based 
upon the fact of planetary influence, and the sym- 
pathy existing between the constituents of the 
system to which we belong. A figure is set for the 
moment of a discovery, the receipt of a letter or 
message, the origination of any affair whatsoever, 
or the moment of an impression concerning which 
the mind may be anxious. The positions and aspects 
of the planets are then consulted with a view to 
determine the outcome of such a matter. It was 
used as a system by William Lilly with much success, 
and is still in vogue to some extent among modern 
astrologers. 

To know the measure of one's soul in the universe, 
to see the end from the beginning, and to follow the 
line of least resistance — this is, in brief, the purport 
of Astrology. 



I 

CHAPTER V 

MUNDANE ASTROLOGY 

This branch of the subject has for a considerable 
period been left in the hands of the almanac-makers; 
but there is no doubt whatever that anciently it 
held a place of great importance inasmuch as the 
rulers were in the habit of looking to their state 
astrologers for intelligence concerning the welfare 
of the country and the people. The astrologer was 
expected to give timely warning of eclipses, of the 
probable condition and yield of the crops, the danger 
of intestine or foreign warfare, and other matters of 
moment to the conduct of public affairs. In the 
Historical Classic of China, it is said that Hi and Ho, 
the Observer and Recorder at the Observatory of 
Pekin, failed in their duty to give due warning of a 
partial eclipse of the Sun in B.C. 2154, which occurred 
in the constellation Fang (Caput Scorpionis), when 
Chung-Kung ruled the Yellow Empire; in conse- 
quence of which the whole country was thrown into 
a state of confusion. The penalty prescribed by 
the Book of Regulations was death, and this sentence 
was duly carried out, it having been proved that the 
officials named had neglected their duties and had 

91 



92 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



been addicted to drink. Thus it is said : — " A 
that time Hi and Ho corrupted their principle 
and abandoned themselves to wine; the^^ neglecte 
their offices, forsook their posts, began to confus 
the celestial laws and ignored their functions." 

The eclipse, which took place on the 12th October 
2154 B.C., at about 7.34 a.m. at Pekin, is of consider 
able astronomical interest, being probably the earlies 
phenomenon of the kind on record. It is confirme 
by Tang in the Kang-Muh. The Earl of Yin a 
this time proclaimed the virtue of ancient rulers in 
observing celestial portents, and it is evident tha 
they regulated their affairs by astrological precept 
They recognized the scientific importance of eclipses 
and made extensive observations of the effects which 
followed them. Thej^ argued from physical effects 
to moral causes, and from physical causes to mora 
effects, and held a rational astrology as an essentia 
part of their system of government. In the Babylon 
ian Empire also, and in India under the Rajas, the 
astrologer held an important position in the affairs 
of state ; and even at this day, when civilization pre 
tends to be above the need of such instruction, we 
find the Rajas still retain their court astrologers 
A capable people can deal with difficulties as they 
arise, but a wise nation would already be prepared 
The day cannot be far distant when this fact will 
be brought home to us, for, as the astute Lord 
Beaconsfield once said, " Nothing is so likely to 
happen as the unexpected." 

In Mundane Astrology judgment is made from th 



MUNDANE ASTROLOGY 93 



positions of the celestial bodies in relation to any 
place or centre of government at the time of an 
eclipse, a great planetary conjunction, a lunation, 
or a solar ingress. 

The Houses bear the same general significance 
as in the horoscope of an individual, the 1st House 
being representative of the people and the 10th of the 
government ; the other Houses being in similar man- 
ner related to the same things as are denoted in the 
individual case. Thus : — 

The 1st House denotes the people and their general 
condition and mood. 

The 2nd House : home trade, the money market. 

The 3rd House : railways, bridges, canals, postal 
service. 

The 4th House : farming and mining interests, 
the crops, coal pits, quarries, etc; the Opposition 
party in Parliament. 

The 5th House : the rising generation ; playhouses, 
sports ; speculative interests, the Stock Exchange ; 
dependencies, colonies, etc. 

The 6th House : the public health, sanitation, 
food-stuffs ; the national service, army, navy and 
police. 

The 7th House : foreign relations ; belligerent 
powers; treaties. 

The 8th House : deaths, probates, losses. 

The 9th House : foreign lands ; the high seas ; 
ecclesiastical and legal professions ; religious affairs. 

The 10th House : the King and his government ; 
the prestige of the country. 



94 



A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



The 11th House: the Exchequer; allies of the 
country. 

The 12th House : prisons, asylums and hospitals, 
places of detention ; the enemies within the camp. 

If the figure is drawn for a solar ingress, the posi- 
tion and aspects of the Sun must be taken chief 
notice of, especially those aspects about to be 
formed. If a lunation, the Moon's place is the centre 
of influence, as also at an eclipse. At a planetarj^ 
conjunction the position and aspects of the con- 
joined bodies must be taken chief notice of. 

All eclipses fulfil their portents within a year, but 
the effects are frequently enduring. According to 
ancient writers, the effect of a solar eclipse will 
endure for as many years as there are digits of the 
solar disc obscured, the totality being 10 digits. 
The magnitude of a solar ecUpse being 7-50, the effects 
will, by this computation, endure for seven and 
a half years. Similarly the magnitude of a lunar 
eclipse will determine the number of months the 
effects will endure. 

But I have found that a crisis directly due to the 
eclipse, and signified by it, will take place at a point 
of time denoted by the distance of the luminary 
from the horizon it last crossed. The time of sun- 
rise being known, and also the time of a visible 
eclipse, the difference in hours and minutes divided 
by 2 will give the number of months and days from 
the date of eclipse when the crisis occurs. If the 
ecHpse be invisible because of it taking place at 
night, the time of sunset must be taken from the 



MUNDANE ASTROLOGY 



95 



time of the eclipse and the difference divided by 
2 will give the months and days which must elapse 
before the chief effects are seen. 

The Moon's eclipses are similarly dealt with, but 
the time of the Moon's rising and setting must be 
takep as the basis of the calculation. 

The chief effects may be expected in that part of 
the world where the luminary is immediately over- 
head at the time of greatest obscuration; but also 
those places at which the eclipsed body is just 
rising, setting, or on the lower meridian will share 
in the adverse conditions indicated by the general 
horoscope for that time and place. 

At an ingress, as that of the Sun to the cardinal 
signs, the effects indicated usually come to pass 
when the Sun in its progress through the zodiac 
comes to the aspects of the several planets in the 
horoscope for the ingress. Thus when a planet is 
in good aspect to the Sun at an ingress, or promising 
some good by its position and aspects, such will 
come into effect when the Sun reaches the conjunc- 
tion, sextile or trine aspect of such planet; and 
vice versa when evil is threatened. 

Earthquakes usually follow immediately on an 
eclipse, especially in those parts where the luminary 
is at the zenith at the time of eclipse. Recurrences 
may be looked for when one of the major planets 
passes the ecliptic longitude of the luminary or 
that of a major planet at the time of the eclipse. 

Whatever may be said of the claims of this subject 
it is beyond dispute that some of the most remarkable 



96 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



events in the history of our times have bee 
accurately predicted by modern astrologers. Th 
present writer is responsible for the successf 
prediction of the following among other even 
Avithin recent times : — The Chino-Japanese War an 
the outbreak in Korea; the Russo-Japanese War 
the Hispano-American War ; the Leiter Wheat Cor 
ner; the Russian insurrection; the South Africa 
War; the Portuguese Rebellion and the revolutio 
ary attempt to end the dynasty by the assassinatio 
of the King of Portugal and the Crown Prince; th 
General Election in the United Kingdom and th 
Tariff Reform effort in 1910; the death of Kin 
Edward VII. It is within our experience also 
that the principles of astrology have been success- 
fully applied to Stock Exchange fluctuations and 
other speculative matters; and indeed there are few 
departments of life in which astrology cannot be 
employed with conspicuous success. 



I 



CHAPTER VI 
OTHER METHODS 

Horary Astrology 

The name horary Qiora, an hour) is given to that 
section of the science which is apphed to the resolu- 
tion of questions which may arise in the mind. 

A figure of the heavens is erected for the time at 
which news comes to hand, concerning which the 
mind is troubled and anxious to know the upshot; 
br the time a proposal is made ; or that at which a 
person sets forth upon a journey or a ship sets sail; 
bhe moment a thing is discovered to be lost, and 
other similar contingencies. In all these schemes 
bhe 1st House and the rising sign denote the querent 
or consultant, and the matter inquired about must 
be referred to its proper House, as set forth in the 
oreceding first section. 

The position and aspects of the ruler of the sign 
Dccupying that House, and its relations to the ruler 
if the Ascendant, enable us to determine what 
s the disposition and course of the matter and how 
t will affect the consultant. 

In the pursuit of this branch of astrology, 
numerous books have been written since the days 

97 H 



98 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

of William Lilly, who wrote in the 17th century, 
under the patronage of Sir Elias Ashmole, his 
famous work Christian Astrology. Such w^orks being 
always accessible to the student, there is no need 
to enter fully into an exposition of the principles 
of Horary Astrology. The terms peculiar to this 
system clearly indicate an Arabian origin, and there 
can be little doubt that the art was extensively 
followed by them to the exclusion of Genethliacal 
Astrolog}^, which began to assume a coherent form 
under the hand of Claudius Ptolemy, the famous 
geographer and astronomer of Alexandria, who wrote 
his Tetrabihlos (or " Four Books on the Influence of 
the Stars ") in the 3rd centur}^ a.d. Many exponent- 
of astrology prefer the horary method, because it 
allows fuller play to the intuitive faculty, and is 
less constrained by the rigid rules of art than the 
more precise and scientific doctrine of nativities. 
The whole system of Horary Astrology rests upon the 
occult sympathy existing between man and nature 
so that the same influences which dispose the mind 
to the formulation of a question may be said to 
determine its answer. I am quite convinced from 
experience that there is much that is both fictitiou 
and erroneous in Horary Astrology as expounded, 
and likewise that there is much truth in the 
general statement that a figure of the heavens set 
for the moment of an initiation will determine the 
result, 



OTHER METHODS 



99 



Kabalistic Astrology 

In this system the numerical value of the name of 
a person enters as a factor with the date of birth 
into the calculation of the horoscope. The Christian 
and surnames having been converted into the equi- 
valent numerical value, they are added to the sign 
and degree of the zodiac held by the Sun at the 
time of birth, and the result is a key number which, 
when added to the year of birth and reduced to a 
unit value, gives the sum of the horoscope answering 
to one of the twenty-two major Arcana of the Tarot, 
from which prognostics are drawn concerning the 
life and character of the subject. Entry is then made 
into the circle of that planet ruling the year at a 
point corresponding to the Sun's position in the 
zodiac, and progression is made by means of the 
several values of the sum of the horoscope, the sur- 
name, the Christian names, the position of the Sun, 
and the year of birth, each of which yields a point 
corresponding to a planet in a Sign, and thus the 
horoscope is completed. 

The system requires that the Ascendant of the 
horoscope is in that sign occupied by the Sun. The 
measure of time is made by profection, i. e. the suc- 
cessive rising of the Signs, the Ascendant passing 
through one Sign each year; and also by the annual 
conjunctions in the Alfridary, an example of which 
is appended. The system has been thoroughly 
explained in my Kabalistic Astrology, to which I must 
refer the student for further particulars. 

H 2 



100 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Chinese Astrology 
The Chinese divide the heavens into eight sections 
They draw lots by means of reeds, after the manner 
of the geomantic system, there being twelve lots 
eight of which are included in the figure and four ar 
stationed at the cardinal points. They then judg 
the figure according to the principles of astrology 
inasmuch as each of the symbols represents a certai 
planetary influence and each section of the figure 
has relation to certain departments of civil and 
political life. The more modern practitioners divide 
the heavens into twelve parts corresponding to the 
twelve asterisms of the zodiac, and employ also 
the planetary bodies. At best the method amounts 
to little more than a process of divination, with the 
signs and symbols as pointers to guide the intuition. 

Hindu Astrology 
The Hindus emplo}^ the same signs and planets 
as ourselves, but they add also Rahu and Ketu, 
the Dragon's Head and Tail, investing them with 
specific influences and ascribing a periodic rule to 
them. 

The signs, although bearing the names equivalent 
to ours, are counted by the natural asterisms and 
not from the vernal equinox. The Sun's entry 
into Aries {MesTidm of their zodiac) takes place 
about 20 days after our equinox, which is the 
amount due to precession since the two zodiacs 
coincided in the year ad. 498. 



OTHER METHODS 



101 



The signs and planets are as follows : — 

rp Mesham Tuirrni 

y Vrishabha TIL Vrischika 

n Mithuna f Dhanu 
2B Katakam Makaram 
^ Simha Kumbha 

TljJ Kanya }{ Mina 

^ S'ani, H- Guru or Brihaspati, $ Kuja or 
Angarika, O Surya, $ S'ukra, ^ Budhan, 
]) Chandra, ^ Rahu, ^ Ketu. 

The measure of time is effected by counting from 
the asterism or naksJiatram occupied by the Moon at 
birth. Each asterism is under the rule of one of the 
nine " planets," and the 27 lunar stations are thus 
apportioned to them at the rate of three nakshatrams 
of 13° 20' each to every planet. The whole circle 
is divided into 120 years, the successive periods 
of the planets being : 18 years, 1]. 16 years, \ 19 
years, ^17 years, t5 7 years, $ 20 years, © 6 years, 
D 10 years, $ 7 years — in all 120 years. Thus 
if one were born Avhen the Moon was in the middle 
of the asterism ruled by ^ , which has a period of 
18 years, he would continue under that " star " for 
9 years, and in his 10th year would enter the period 
of 4- (Jupiter), under whose influence he would 
continue for 16 years and then pass to Saturn. 

There are many ramifications of this system, and 
those who would study it more closely are recom- 
mended to read Brihat Jdtaka, by Varaha Mihira, 
Pardshara-hora and the other works of Parashara, and 



102 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



the Brihat Samhitd, together with other works more 
or less accessible to English readers, and on sale 
at most Indian booksellers'. 

AlFRID ARIES 

There are Alfridaries of all sorts in existence, each 
adapted to the system from which it is evolved. 
An example of one from the Hebraic system is 
appended. The idea involved is that the celestial 
bodies rule the life in rotation, beginning with the 
]). The rotation of the planets in the reverse 
direction at the same time brings another influence 
to bear upon the life, so that at any given period 
of the life there is a double influence in force, the 
combined effects of which are said to determine the 
course of events in a general sense. 

A " diurnal " horoscope in this sense is one that 
is generated from the Sun, Avhose position is supposed 
to be on the upper meridian ; and consequently 
any birth taking place between noon and midnight 
is under the Sun and takes its origin from the left 
side of the Alf ridary ; while, on the contrary, a Moon 
or nocturnal birth is one that happens between 
midnight and noon, and this takes its origin and 
course on the right side of the Alfridary. 

The planets jointly ruling any 3'ear of the life are 
taken account of according to their natural relations 
in the astrological system, and particularly in the 
horoscope of the birth, and prognostications are 
made in accord with these indications. 



OTHER METHODS 103 



The Alfridary. 



P.M. 




? 


? 





6 






l 


$ 


? 





6 







1 


8 


15 


22 


29 


36 


43 


50 


57 


64 


71 


78 


D 


? 

T 


2 


9 


16 


23 


30 


37 


44 


51 


58 


65 


72 


79 






3 


10 


17 


24 


31 


38 


45 


52 


59 


66 


73 


80 




D 


4 


11 


18 


25 


32 


39 


46 


53 


60 


67 


74 


81 


\ 


5 


12 


19 


26 


33 


40 


47 


54 


61 


68 


75 


82 




4 


6 


13 


20 


27 


34 


41 


48 


55 


62 


69 


76 


83 




$ 


7 


14 


21 


28 


35 


42 


49 


56 


63 


70 


77 


84 





A person born at 4 p.m. is under the ]) for 7 years, 
in conjunction successively with ©, ?, 5,]), \ 
for 1 year each; then passes to the 7-year period of 5, 
under the same order of annual conjunctions. At 
46 he is in the period of ^ , and the sub-period of 
the D. 

A person born at 2 a.m. will be under the }) for 
7 years, with the annual conjunction of ]), 5, G> (?> 
4 and \ in rotation. At 46 he is in the period 
of \ , and the sub-period of the O . 

These examples will no doubt serve for the use 
of the table in any case that may be required. 

Ptolemy made use of a species of Alfridary in 
which he ascribed the " seven ages of man " to 
the rule of the planets in the following order : — 
i 4 years, ^10 years, ? 8 years, Q 1^ years, ^ 15 
years, 4 12 years, \ 30 years ; and these he com- 
bined with the ruler of the profectional ascendant " 
to obtain the annual conjunctions. 

Shakespeare makes use of the above " seven ages 



104 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



of man" in his play As You Like It, where the 
melancholy Jacques is represented as saying — .jM 

" All the world's a stage, ■ 
And all the men and women merely players : I 
They have their exits and their entrances, ■ 
And each man in his time plays many parts, 
His acts being seven ages.'' 

These ages are enumerated, and are found to corre- 
spond to : ]) the infant, ^ the school-boy, ? the 
lover, $ the soldier, 4 the justice, the lean and 
slippered pantaloon, ending the story with the 
senile paralytic. It will be noticed that the Sun 
period is omitted, the manly ambitions generated 
under the solar influence being given definition and 
focus in the period of Mars. 

According to Ptolemj^, a person born with Aries 
rising w^ould be under the Moon and Mars for the 
first year, then the Moon and Venus, then Moon and 
Mercur}', and end the fourth year under the double 
influence of the Moon. The fifth 3'ear would come 
under ^ and Q ; the sixth under ^'s double 
influence, the seventh year under ^ and $ , the 
eighth under g and ^, and so on ; each year being 
governed primarily by the planet of the period 
and secondarily by the ruler of the profectional 
rising sign. Alfridaries exist among the Hindus and 
Mohammedans, and are in much repute with the 
Arabs. 



PALMISTRY 



CHAPTER I 

TYPES OF HANDS 

The science of Palmistry, with its two divisions 
of Cheirognomy and Cheiromancy, properly belongs 
to the domain of Occultism in the sense that has 
already been indicated. Although in its popular 
appHcation it is certainly to be regarded as a means 
of divination, yet it is not dependent on the use of 
the automatic faculty but upon an empirical know- 
ledge of the significance attachmg to the lines of 
the hand. In this wa}' it may be regarded as upon 
the same foundation as the science of Astrology, 
and although it cannot be said to have attained 
the same degree of development, it does neverthe- 
less hold a hoiia fide certificate for a certain measure 
of reliability, and therefore warrants our considera- 
tion. The outlines of the subject will probably 
suffice to indicate the methods employed, and will 
serve to guide the student in his critical work of 
testing and proving the claims of Palmistry for 
himself. 

105 



106 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

CHEIROGlSrOMY 

is that section of Palmistry which deals with 
character and aptitude. The shape, texture and 
development of the hand as a whole is consulted 
for this purpose. 

The Three Primary Types of hand are the Conical, 
the Square, and the Spa tula te. 

The Conical hand is that in which the finger- 
tips are tapered and pointed, the nails being of the 
filbert shape, smooth and well arched. The fingers 
from the root to the tips gradually taper, the 
flesh being smooth and the joints small and well 
covered. 

With this t3^pe of hand there is to be found a love 
of art and adornment; the subject is fond of embel- 
lishments, and possesses what is known as the florid 
style. The tastes are refined, and the nature very 
sensitive to environment. The beautiful and good- 
looking, the pleasant and agreeable attract him 
rather than the useful and practical. The subject 
is little suited to the work-a-da}^ world or to the 
strenuous competition of business life. Sports have 
no attraction for him, and even domestic duties 
are positively repulsive. Yet the owner of the 
conical hand will be found to make much of culture, 
refinement and good taste. You will find many 
of these people among the cultivated flowers of social 
life and in the artistic professions. 

The conical hand denotes neatness, order, love 
of music, flowers, scents, brightness, gaiety, beauty. 



TYPES OF HANDS 107 



It is essentially Venusian, and may easily run to 
jself -indulgence and to licence ; but all that it pretends 
to is good taste, refinement and sensitiveness. It 
lives in the emotional and psychic. Its subjects are 
intuitive, impressionable, capricious, and frequently 
impulsive and inspirational. Feeling predominates 
over judgment. It is incapable of the mathematical 
faculty, and is often illogical. It is not found in 
connection with the exact sciences, nor any handi- 
craft except millinery ; but art, music and the drama 
are well represented by this type. 

The Square hand is usually large and broad, the 
finger-tips are square, the thumb of fair size; and 
there is a degree of hardness in the palm. 

This hand belongs to those who have a love of 
order, neatness, punctuality and decision. The 
j emotional and artistic are not so much in evidence, 
but the logical and the mathematical faculties are 
prominent characteristics. In art they are disposed 
to exact methods rather than inspirational effects, 
and are critical of form rather than colour. Justice 
is a strong point with them. Exactness, precision 
and deliberation are essential qualities of this type. 
They are not carried away by their feelings, nor are 
they brusque or churlish, but observe generally 
the path of moderation in all things. They can, 
however, be very critical, and may even appear 
narrow-minded on account of a lack of elasticity 
in their nature. They are conservative and not 
very readily open to the reception of neAv views 
or doctrines. Self-restraint, caution, method and 



108 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



patience are the chief business qualifications, and 
this type of people are capable of gaining their ends 
by industry and staying-power rather than by 
ambitious ventures or by a tour de force. They have 
few friends, but frequently have long friendships 
for one or two of a congenial tj^pe. 

They make good lawyers, accountants, bankers 
and. secretaries, and many of this type are to be found 
in the educational world and in responsible positions 
of the commercial world. 

The Spatulate hand is known by the spade-like 
tips of the fingers, which broaden out from the 
joint to the extremit}^, the hand being fairly large, 
firm and muscular. 

People with this type of hand are possessed of 
practical ambitions. They are essentially matter- 
of-fact and utilitarian, and are generally hard 
workers, with a turn for mechanics and handicrafts. 
They are possessed of much determination and grit, 
and can undertake pioneer work. When musical 
they prefer instrumentation, and the practical side 
of art also attracts them, the applied arts being 
especially followed by them. Sculpture, mechanics, 
engineering, building and architecture claim many 
representatives of this type. The character is 
honest and straightforward, the manner brusque 
and sometimes churlish. These people are capable 
of forcing their way forward and making headway 
against all obstacles. They are not inventors, but 
are very capable agents and exploiters of new 
ideas. They stand for the practical as against the 



TYPES OF HANDS 



109 



theoretical, but nevertheless they would be of little 
use without the man of ideas behind them. 

Mixed Types 

It necessarily follows that beside the Three 
Primary Types indicated above there are many 
hands which are a blend of two or all of them. There 

I are hands in which one finger is square, another 
conical, and the other spatulate. In a case like this 
a little attention should be given to the predomi- 
nating type, and also the thumb should be consulted. 
The thumb being short in the first phalanx, from the 
tip downwards towards the root, shows a not very 
pronounced type of mind. Such show aptitude in 
carrying out the ideas and orders of others ; but to 
be inventors and leaders there must be a good length 

j of the first and second phalanges. A small thumb 
— or at least a small first phalanx with a mixed 

< type of fingers — indicates a useful servant but an 
indifferent master, and one of no originality or 
decision. Versatility is the chief asset of this mixed 
type of hand, and such people frequentty change 

' their pursuits and take on a new set of ideas with 

; every fresh suit of clothes or change of circumstance. 

! What is called the Philosophic hand is known by 

I the protruding joints of the fingers, the long middle 
finger, and the well-developed thumb. It shows a 
love of philosophy, a desire to know the " reason 
why " and the " way how " a thing happens. It is 
concerned chiefly with the imponderables in Nature, 



110 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



and has a taste for metaphysics, logic, and analytical 
methods. 

They love truth for its own sake and beauty 
on account of its harmonious elements. They are 
sincere, care little for the practical aspects of life, 
and are quite content if they can find a reason for 
things as they are. They are discoverers of k^v 
and principles, elaborators of philosophical system.- , 
they are very rarely practical or ambitious in a 
worldly sense ; but are capable of dying for the sake 
of their beliefs. 

The Psychic hand is allied to the conical, but the 
palm is long and narrow, the flesh soft and the 
fingers long and tapering ; while the thumb is very 
pointed and small, but well formed. 

This hand denotes a sensitive, impressionable 
nature, fine nervous organism, quick intuitive mind 
and an impractical, idealistic temperament. Mediums, 
psychometrists and inspirational wTiters are the 
most representative of this type. It is frequently 
found allied to the artistic temperament, and it 
has all the flexibility^ w^eakness and enthusiasm of 
the psychic nature. The ty^pe of hand referred 
to is well portra^'ed by Burne-Jones in his figure 
studies. 



CHAPTER II 



THE MOUNTS OR CUSHIONS 

The ancients have allocated the planets to the 
several Mounts, or Cushions, which are to be found 
in every well-developed hand. These Mounts, and 
the planets associated with them, are as follows : — 

1. The Mount of Jupiter lies at the root of the 
forefinger (called the Index, because it is that used 
for indicating or pointing). 

2. The Mount of Saturn at the root of the second 
finger. 

3. The Mount of Apollo, or the Sun, at the root 
of the third finger or anularis (so called because it 
is the ring finger). 

4. The Mount of Mercury at the root of the little 
finger or auricularis. 

5. The Mount of Mars lies below the Mount of 
Mercury on the " percussion " of the hand, between 
the lines of the Heart and the Head (which see). 

6. The Mount of the Moon is below the Mount of 
Mars, between the extremity of the Head line and 
the wrist. 

7. The Mount of Venus is at the ^oot of the thumb, 
between the second joint of the thumb and the wrist. 

In the allowing diagram the planetary symbols 
are used for the purpose of location. A study of the 
ancient distribution of these symbols will show that 

111 



112 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 




Fig. 1. 



the whole art of Palmistry is based upon astrological 
interpretations. 

The Significations of the Mounts answer closely 
to the astrological natures of the planets which are 



THE MOUNTS OR CUSHIONS 113 

said to rule them ; and it may be said that the 
; characteristics of the several planets are found to 
' be prominent features in the character of a person 
in whose hand they are found to be well developed. 

Thus Jupiter well developed denotes generosity, 
sympathy, love of justice, conviviality, nobility of 
disposition, and a true sense of religion. 

Defective — The nature denotes an absence of 
these qualities. 

Excessive — Bombast, pride, ostentation, extrava- 
gance and carelessness. 

Saturn well developed shows caution, carefulness, 
watchfulness, sincerity, strong attachment, patience 
and thrift. 

Defective — There is a tendency to self-regard only, 
and a lack of the sterling qualities which inspire 
confidence in others. The person is not reliable. 

Excessive — It disposes to misanthropy, melan- 
choly and miserliness. There is a tendency to religi- 
ous mania when this mount exceeds that of Jupiter, 
tj The Sun well developed shows dignity, sincerit}^, 
'magnanimity, love of the fine arts, high ideals, 
great projects. 

Deficient — The nature is proud, assuming, fre- 
quently vain, and a tendency to rely upon appear- 
ances rather than upon faculty and attainments, 
and to play the showman upon all occasions. 

Excessive — It denotes a tyrannous, autocratic and 
despotic character, very proud and haughty, an inor- 
dinate ambition and love of power. It is often shown 
by a love of pageants and great shows, and when art 
is followed it favours the colossal and magnificent. 



114 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

Mercury well developed shows eloquence, capacity 
for the pursuit of literature, activity, alertness, a 
good memory, desire for knowledge, inquisitiveness. 
A commercial life is followed with much intelligence 
and industry. 

Defective — It denotes a mean, querulous and 
fretful nature, small mental power, a tendenc}^ to 
spy and play the part of a busybody, a " picker-up 
of unconsidered trifles," generally cunning arid 
loquacious. 

Excessive — The mind runs to the material side 
of Nature for aU its evidence ; there is a self-assertion 
and posit iveness which is seldom warranted. The 
nature is prolix and concerned with more things 
than would fill an encyclopsedia or stock a museum. 
Such people make a business of their hobbies or a 
slavery of their business. 

The Moon well developed shows a romantic, 
ideahst nature, fond of travelling, with a disposition 
to the mystical, marked intuitive power, sentimental 
and sometimes dreamy. 

Deficient — It denotes a prosaic and worldly nature, 
not affected by the consciousness of the larger 
life or the greater universe, and quite devoid of the 
emotional and imaginative powers. 

Excessive — The nature is fantastic, given to 
exaggeration, hypersensitive, vacillating, fickle and 
apt to be carried away by the emotions. Unless 
Saturn controls and the Head line is well defined 
there is danger of insanity. 

Mars weU developed shows courage, strength, 
prowess, freedom, frankness and weU-defined ambi- 



THE MOUNTS OR CUSHIONS 115 



tions. It denotes an aspiring and enterprising 
character, willing to take risks and showing a 
" scorn of consequence " which inspires others to 
deeds of daring. 

Deficient — The nature is lacking in courage and 
the manly attributes, and will never be a pioneer 
unless it be in the religious or intellectual worlds. 
Yet even so there is a lack of zeal and fire which is 
not apt to be convincing. A soldier without Mars 
well developed may be set down as a dand^^ 

Excessive — The temper is ungovernable, the 
projects speculative and rash, and the Avhole nature 
runs to overheated determinism and impetuous 
self-assertion. 

Venus well developed shows a refined, genial and 
sociable person, kind to children, fond of his home, 
gallant to women, neat and orderly in his person 
and menage, fond of music and festivity, bright 
lights, flowers, sunshine and the pleasures of society. 

Deficient — There is a lack of taste and refinement ; 
the person and home are disorder^ or only super- 
ficially clean ; there is a lack of comradeship and a 
distaste for social life ; the friendships are of acommer- 

' cial, or possibly a platonic, nature, but never infused 
with any great degree of affection. The beautiful in 
nature and art does not make any appeal to him, 

' Excessive — The nature is coarse and disposed to 
debauchery, and the lower sensual appetites are 
allowed to have full sway. The sensuous and mate- 
rial are of first consideration, and all the powers are 
directed to the attainment of luxuries and the 
gratification of the passions. 

I 2 



CHAPTER III 



THE PHALANGES, ETC. 

The three sections defined by the joints of tl 
thumb and fingers are called phalanges. The rela- 
tive length and shape of these have to be taken 
into consideration when estimating character and 
aptitude, and chiefl}^ the form and development of 
the thumb. 

The first phalanx of the thumb which holds the 
nail denotes the wdll-power; the second phalanx 
stands for the intellect; and the third, which sub- 
tends the Mount of Venus, denotes the animal part. 
Wlien, therefore, you find a long and broad upper 
phalanx, 3 ou may be sure there is plenty of deter- 
mination and self-reliance; and if it is supported by 
a long second phalanx the intellect will be adequate 
to supplement the efforts of the will and to guide 
it into useful channels. 

A well-developed thumb is inseparable from a 
high order of intelligence, but a poorly developed 
thumb is an indication of small capacit}^, an incon- 
stant, restless and credulous character, easily 
swayed by the opinions of others, and possessing 
little abilit}' in the management of his own aft'airs. 

Fingers that are short and thick show an abrupt 
116 



THE PHALANGES 



117 



manner and wilful nature, with very little foresight 
or diplomacy. But long fingers, especially if smooth 
and slender, denote a character that is subtle, diplo- 
matic and astute, attentive to details and capable 
of finesse. With a short first phalanx of the thumb, 
this type of hand shows deception. 

A person who carries his thumb in the palm of the 
hand, with the fingers bent loosely over it, is one 
whose nervous energy is fast exhausting itself or 
whose intellect is embryonic. This is the custom 
of idiots, of paralytics and babes. As individuality 
asserts itself the thumb is unconsciously protruded 
more and more, and in the person of concentrated 
ambition it is found most frequently folded over the 
fingers, or standing out at a considerable angle from 
the hand. 

Fingers that are well fleshed and thick at the base 
show a luxurious nature, and if they lie compact 
and close together they show a selfish and self- 
indulgent nature, and frequentty a sordid character. 

Fingers that have plenty of air-space between 
them denote a careless and extravagant nature, 
but frequent!}' inquisitive. If allied to an intellec- 
tual t^'pe of hand, in which the Imuckles are large 
and the second phalanx of the thumb well developed, 
this separation of the fingers shows a keen, inquiring 
mind. 

Observe that the shorter and broader the hand 
the more dogged and resolute the character will be ; 
while long, slender hands denote a more subtle, 
shifty and diplomatic mind, with more suavity and 



118 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

politeness of manner, but less stability of character 
Rugged hands show a rugged and straightforwa 
nature, a love of Nature and an abhorrence 
social observances ; a short and rugged han 
denotes a blunt, outspoken and determined cha 
acter. But smooth hands show finesse, suavity an 
gentleness, with a love of refinement and a respect 
for les convenances; while if they are long and smooth 
there will be subtlety and craft in the character. 

These points being duly considered, the character 
of any mixed type of hand can be readily estimated. 
A thorough understanding and recognition of the 
primary types is, of course, essential to a proper 
use of the art of Cheirognomy. 

We may now turn our attention to Cheiromancy, 
which appears to claim more general mterest, 
inasmuch as it purports to define the circumstance 
and incident of life by the lines and markings 
of the hand. Character, as defined by Cheirognomy, 
must alwaj^s be the dommant factor in human 
destiny, but environment and incident, as Hmiting 
the expression of character in certain direction- 
and at the same time developing it in others, 
certainly also of great importance. 



CHAPTER IV 



THE LINES 

If the palm of the hand is distended it will be 
found that the normal markings take a definite 
position and direction, but that a great variety 
exists in the depth, length, direction, colouring and 
clearness of these lines in several hands. It is from 
consideration of these variations from the normal 
that there arises the wide variety of differences to 
be noted in character, ability and fortune. It is 
a fact sufficiently well known not to need special 
comment that ability is not the only measure of 
success, and that character bears no necessary 
relation to fortune. Consequently, it may be as- 
sumed that the indications relative to mind, body 
and estate are to be sought in different parts of the 
same hand. That this is so will sufficiently appear 
in the following designation of the lines. 

The main lines are six in number, comprising : — 

1. The Life Line, which surrounds the Mount of 
Venus at the root of the thumb. 

2. The Head Line, which joins the Line of Life 
inidvva}^ between the root of the index finger and the 
thumb and stretches across the hand in a slightly 

119 

• 

/ 



120 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



downward direction almost to the percussion o 
the hand. 

3. The Heart Line, which arises on the percussio 
of the hand below the Mount of Mercury and pr 
ceeds across the hand, terminating on or beneat 
the Mount of Jupiter. 

4. The Girdle of Venus, which begins be twee 
the index and second fingers and follows a curv 
course, embracing the Mounts of Saturn and th 
Sun and terminating between the third and litt' 
fingers. 

5. The Line of Fate, which has its rise at the wris 
near to the end of the Life Line, and proceed 
sharply upward through the palm, termmating o 
the Mount of Saturn. 

6. The Health Line, which has its origin near th 
wrist by the Mount of the Moon and procee^ 
upwards to the Mount of Mercury- . 

In addition to these there are found in some han 
the Li7ie of Fortune, arising in the palm of the han 
and running upwards to the Mount of Apollo, an 
the Marriage Line, which arises on the percussio 
of the hand and crosses the Mount of Mercury 
Finally, there is the Bracelet, consisting of one o 
more lines across the wrist immediately belo 
the natural fold of the wrist at the root of th 
hand. 

The meanings of these lines will var}^ accordin 
to their length, definition and colour. Whe 
straight, single, deep and red they indicate all th 
best elements of character and destiny. 



THE LINES 



121 




Fig. 2. 



The Head Line governs the intellect, the mental 
attainments and natural aptitudes. 



122 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

The Heart Line governs the affections and emo- 
tions, and has an equal influence with the Head 
Line over the fortunes. 

The Life Line shows the constitution, vital powers, 
and the probable duration of life. 

The Fate Line denotes the course of destiny, that 
which is inevitable, the stages and crises of life. 

The Line of Fortune has relation to honours, 
ambitions and attainments. 

The Girdle of Venus denotes the degree of sensi- 
bility possessed by the person. 

The Health Line shows the condition and prob- 
able course of the health. 

The Lines, Mounts and t}^es of fingers are all 
shown in the diagram on page 121, which will serve 
as a general guide to the reader in the study of 
the observations made in the course of this brief 
exposition. 

In some abnormal hands the lines are so widely 
different from the general direction as to be hardly 
recognizable. In others one or more of the chief 
lines are entirely absent, while in others again there 
are additional lines. Some of these abnormalities 
will be considered in due course. 



CHAPTER V 



THE PRINCIPAL LINES 

1. The Life Line. 

When clear cut, well formed and free from inter- 
secting Lines, it shows a good constitution and a 
probability of long life. But it should encircle 
the whole Mount of Venus and proceed to the wrist 
without a break. Its whole span is equal to 90 years, 
the count beginning at the source above the thumb 
and proceeding by stages of 5 or 6 years to the middle 
point of 45. Some practice is required before the 
student can successfully use these time indications. 

When the Life Line is chained, crooked, shallow^ 
or pale, it denotes delicate health and a feeble 
constitution. If terminating or broken off sharply 
without continuation, the end of life is shown at 
an age corresponding to the position of the break 
or fracture (see Fig. 2). When both hands show the 
same termination or fracture it ma}^ be regarded as 
decisive, but otherwise a critical illness only would 
be shown. 

But if with a short Life Line 3 ou find also indica- 
tions of strong will-power in a long and broad 



124 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

first phalanx of the thumb, and a twm or sister- 
line running parallel to the Life Line and continuing 
beyond it, then the crisis may be overcome by will- 
power or the care and protection of somebody nearly 
affected, such as a sister, lover, wife or mother. 

A line coming from the thumb, cutting through 
the Life Line and proceeding to the palm of the 
hand, denotes a great illness or misfortune which 
produces a shock to the system. 

A line cutting through the Life Line and proceed- 
ing on to the Mount of Saturn shows a fatal illness, 
and is especially dangerous in the case of a woman 
approaching maternity at the age indicated. The 
point at which the line cuts the Life Line must be 
taken in estimating the age at which the danger 
is threatened. 

A line from the Life Line to the Mount of Jupiter 
shows an ambition realized, success and fortune. 

A line from the Life Line to the Mount of the 
Sun gives fame, celebrit}^ and honours. 

A line to the Mount of Mercury denotes success 
in commerce or science, the achievements of the 
intellect. 

In a general sense the Mount of Venus with its 
encircling Life Line represents the vital energy 
and the hnes coming away from it denote the Hnes 
of energy along which the vitality will be utilized 
and expended. 

A line going out on to the Mount of the Moon 
from the Line of Life shows fantastic pursuits, 
frequent travelling and change of life and occupation ; 



THE PRINCIPAL LINES 125 



but in an artistic hand it may dispose to publicity 
and a passing recognition of the person's faculty. 

2. The Heart Line. 

The Heart Line denotes the quahty and direction 
of the affections, the condition of the vital organ, 
and the interests in which the mind is centred. 

When well defined and unbroken, single and free 
from blemish, it shows a sincere nature with healthy 
affections and a nature that will command friendship 
and esteem. The longer the line may be the stronger 
are the affections. 

When terminating beneath the Mount of Apollo, 
the affections are inconstant and the nature vain; 
and if the Heart Line extends to the Mount of Saturn 
there will be greater constancy but a fatality or 
disappointment attaching to the affections; the 
disposition is then apt to be marred by jealousy and 
mistrust. 

When the Heart Line extends to the Mount of 
Jupiter, the affections will be true, sincere and 
enduring, and if the line forks on to the Mount, it 
shows energy, strength of purpose, and successful 
pursuit of congenial projects. 

When the Heart Line turns down beneath the 
Mount of Jupiter and touches the Head Line, the 
affections will be under the control of the mind, 
and the nature will hence be more practical; and if 
at the same time it throws a branch upward to the 
Mount of Jupiter, there will be a successful issue to 
the fortunes after marriage. 



126 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

If the Heart Line joins the Head Line beneath 
the Mount of Saturn it is an augury of a sudden, if 
not a violent, end. 

Many small lines cutting across the line of the 
Heart shows some functional disorder of the corre- 
sponding organ of the bod} , and if the Heart Line 
is broken beneath the Mount of Saturn or punctured 
by a purple or dark blue pitmark, it shows seizure 
or a serious heart attack which ma}^ end fatally 

3. The Head Line. 

The Head Line being long, clear and well marked 
shows good intellectual ability and capacity to cope 
successfully with the problems of life. The Head 
Line is best when starting from a conjunction with 
the Life Line, for it then shows that the intellect 
is not dissociated from feeling and refinement. 
When separate from the Life Line it denotes a rash 
and impulsive nature, sometimes egotistical and 
too full of self-confidence. 

A fine falling from the Head Line and going on 
to the Mount of the Moon shows a tendency to 
mysticism and a love of exploration and discovery. 

A line going from the Head Line on to the Mount 
of Mars shows rashness, a headstrong character, 
of fevered imagination and great enterprise. 

A line rising to the jVIount of the Sun from this 
line denotes honours and success through tlie use 
of the mtellect. 

A line joining the Head and Heart Lines denotes 
an intellect that is swayed by the affections to a 



THE PRINCIPAL LINES 127 



large extent and is capable of erring on the side of 
generosity when its judgment is appealed to. 

A short Head Line shows a practical rather than 
an intellectual character. It also threatens a short 
life by nervous derangement if terminating under 
Saturn and the Life Line also short. 

A line running up from the Head Line to Saturn 
shows a fatalistic tendency or a fondness for philo- 
sophy; but there is a menace of nervous disorders. 

A double Head Line shows duplicity, an adven- 
turer. 

No Head Line at all shows an impulsive and child- 
like nature, all feeling and no judgment, and 
frequently subject to obsession. 

A break in the Head Line shows danger of 
concussion or cerebral injury. 

The Head Line being wavy and irregular denotes 
a weak and irresolute nature. 

4. The Fate Line, 

This line shows the worldly fortunes, success or 
failure, and the position to which we may attain 
in our sphere of life. It shows the inevitable out- 
come of the free use of all our powers, passions and 
tendencies. It is capable of modification as the 
powers of the nature are brought under control 
and directed into useful channels. It is the line 
of fatahty only in the sense that Jab karoge tab 
saoge — As you sow, so you will reap. 

The Fate Line extends to a greater or less length 
in various hands. Its length has a relation to the 



128 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

duration of life. The count of years is made on the 
Fate Line from its origin near the wrist upwards. 
Where it crosses the Head Line is at the age of 35 
years. At the Heart Line the 50th year is reached. 
By subdividing these sections any required age may 
be discerned. The condition of the Hne at various 
stages shows the fortunes at the corresponding 
period of the life. 

The Fate Line may not always start from or near 
the wrist, but may begin on the Mount of the Moon, 
or on the Life Line, the Head Line, the palm, or 
even the Heart Line. 

When rising from the wrist in a straight and un- 
broken line direct to the Mount of Saturn it showr* 
success in hfe and a good fortune. 

But if stopped at the Head Line it denotes an 
error of judgment or wrong use of the intellect 
will mar the progress and spoil the fortunes. If 
stopped by the Heart Line there will be a romantic 
episode in the life or a fatality arising out of an 
affection or friendship. 

When starting on the Mount of the Moon tlir 
Fate Line denotes success through the influence of 
women or the reverse, according to its own character- 
istics. 

If rising in the Life Line it shows a Fate that is 
within the power of the individual to possess or to 
relinquish. 

When rising in the palm of the hand between the 
Head and Heart Lines, in what is called the Plain 
of Mars, it shows many crosses and struggles; but 



THE PRINCIPAL LINES 129 



if it runs well up on to Saturn it will give success 
at last. 

The Fate Line to be at its best should be long, 
clear and unbroken, and should reach the root of 
the second finger, but should not go beyond it. 

Wherever the Fate Line begins to take a clear 
and unbroken course, at that age there will be a 
turn in the fortunes for good, and this will be con- 
tinued as long as the Fate Line continues clear and 
unaffected by cross lines. 

Ending on Jupiter's Mount it shows success 
through a happy marriage or an inheritance. When 
ending on Sol it shows honours at the end of life. 

5. The Health Line, 

This hne is governed by the functions of the diges- 
tive organs and liver, in the same way as the Heart 
Line is related to the heart and the Head Line 
to the nervous system. 

When clearly marked and unbroken it shows good 
health, especially if it rise near the Life Line without 
touching it and proceeds direct to the Mount of 
Mercury. 

In some hands it is absent, but it may then be 
concluded that the health is good if the Life Line 
is clear and long. 

A broken Health Line or an island (see Chapter VI) 
or a black spot or other discoloration of the line, 
shows a serious iUness, frequent attacks of dyspepsia 
or gastritis, and general debility. 



130 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



A line from the Health Line cutting into the He 
Line shows nervous disorders. 

A line from the Health Line crossing the Hea 
Line denotes palpitation, heart affection. 

A line from the Health Line cutting into the L* 
Line denotes venery or excess of the passions in a 
degree detrimental to health; the constitution i- 
affected by dissipation and pleasure-seeking. This 
particularly in a soft hand with a small first 
phalanx to the thumb. 

6. The Ring of Venus. 

The Girdle or Ring of Venus, wherever present, 
shows sensibility. It is never absent from the 
poetic hand. In the intellectual hand it shows 
touchiness and a worrying disposition, and in the 
vital hand it shows restlessness. lAHien extending 
on to the Mount of Mercury, it denotes the study of 
Occultism, and a mind that is controlled by the 
mysterious. 

The sole meaning of the Girdle of Venus is 
sensibility, i.e. capacity to suffer or enjoy. 

7. The Line of Fortune. 

This line, starting from a variety of places, is 
identified by its eventual course to the Mount of 
the Sun, which it crosses. 

It is the index of fame, honour, merit, especially 
in art, literature and science. 

When clear, deep and straight it denotes good 



THE PRINCIPAL LINES 131 



fortune. If there is more than one Hne on the Mount 
of Apollo, there Avill be natural talent and ability 
which will meet with recognition in high quarters. 

When absent from the hand, there will be mis- 
fortune or at least no recognition of ability and 
endeavour. Such people should work for the future 
and live again in their children. What they sow, 
others may reap. 

Position without wealth is show^n by a good Line 
of Fortune and a bad Line of Fate. 

When the Line of Fortune rises from the Moon 
it shows gain by women who assist the career; 
from Venus, by art and the dramatic profession ; 
from Mars, by bold enterprises, pioneer work or 
military service; from the Head Lme, by the use of 
the intellect; and from the Heart Line, by advan- 
itageous friendships or associations of an artistic 
nature; while if rising betw^een the Heart and Head, 
it may give success through dramatic w-ork. 

8. The Marriage Line. 

The Marriage Line being clear cut and unbroken 
is an index of a deep and enduring attachment to 
one of the opposite sex. 

When broken it show^s an engagement or attach- 
ment which does not reach its consummation. 

When the Marriage Line splits into two to form a 
fork, or v/hen a line from the Line of Fate or the 
Heart Line cuts through it, there is danger of separa- 
wion after marriage, and if a lme from the Moon 

K 2 



132 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

also joins the indications, there will be divorce and 
publicity. 

Two marriage lines show a second attachment. 
The evidence of several lines frequently signifies the 
free lance or coquette. 

The Line of Marriage joining the Girdle of Venus 
so as to continue it to the percussion of the hand is 
a sign of idealism which marriage does not satisfy. 

Small lines running up from the Marriage Line 
to the root of the little finger indicate progeny, the 
number being shown b}^ the number of such bars 
or striae. But these are not necessarily the progeny 
of one union, as may be the case where two marriages 
are denoted. 

When the Line of Health rises on the Head Line 
in a cross forming a star with the Head Line, 
it is a sign of an anchorite; and if the Life Line at 
the same time is exceptionally near the root of the 
thumb, so that the Mount of Venus is small, there 
will be no marriage, or yet a barren one. 

9. The Bracelet. 

This is also called the Eascette. It consists of 
lines below the fold of the wrist {i.e. where the 
palm joins the wrist) and parallel to it. When 
clearly marked it is an additional sign of a long and 
useful life. 

Lines coming up from the Rascette to the Mount 
of the Moon and crossing it to some extent denote 
voyages. These lines may be seen by compressing the 
hand. 



THE PRINCIPAL LINES 133 



The meaning of such a line from the Bracelet 
may be known by tracing it to its destination. 
To Jupiter, it is highly propitious; to Saturn, sinister 
and dangerous ; to Venus, likely to result in a pleasant 
association or profitable alliance; to the Sun, 
honours; to Mercury, good business and a possible 
inheritance or windfall. 

General Note. 
Never read the lines singly, but take them in their 
bearing upon one another, and in relation always 
to the type of hand you are dealing with. 

It is very seldom that we find a strong Head Line 
in a purely psychic hand, but it would be by no 
means remarkable if in a hand of this type the Line 
of the Head is altogether absent. But it should 
not thence be inferred that the intellect was a 
! minus quantity. Madame H. P. Blavatsky had the 
pure psychic hand with but a single line stretching 
across the palm. Of her intellectual powers there 
can be no doubt, while her spontaneous, frank 
I and ingenuous nature was altogether suggestive of 
f a strong Heart Line. Possibty Head and Heart 
were in unusually close alliance. 



CHAPTER VI 



INCIDENTAL MARKS 

Beside the principal lines to which reference 
has been made in the preceding chapter, it will 
be found that there are a number of other markings, 
either isolated or affecting the lines themselves. 
These are in the nature of Triangles, Crosses, Squares, 
Stars, Grilles, Islands and Spots. 

The Great Triangle embraces the space enclosed 
by the lines of Health, Life and Head. When the 
Triangle is well formed, distinct and embracing a 
large space, the person will be of a generous and 
upright nature with wide sympathies. 

When small and formed by broken lines, the 
character and disposition are cramped and mean, 
and the life is far from fortunate. The health also 
is more or less badly affected. 

When there are crosses within the area of the 
Triangle there will be many misfortunes in the life, 
and the person will occasion many enmities. 

A Star therein shows eventual success. 

Lesser triangles about the hand show success in 
that department of life which is related to the lines 
or mounts affected. Thus a triangle formed on the 
base of the Head Line shows intellectual achieve- 
ments» 

134 



INCIDENTAL MARKS 



135 



A Gross is bad wherever it is found, and especially 
if it affects the principal lines. 

When found in the Great Triangle, it shows crosses 
and difficulties in early life; between the Head 
and Heart Lines, difficulties and misfortunes in 
middle life; and above the Heart Line, similar 
distress in the latter part of life. 

A Cross on a mount tends to vitiate or pervert 
the character or fortunes in the direction indicated 
by the mount, but on the Mount of Jupiter it is 
held to signify domestic happiness. Nevertheless, 
there will be many trials and vexations to be shared 
by those in whose ha/nds this sign appears. 

A Cross on any of the principal lines is evil, but 
especially when on the Life Line and the Line of 
Fate. 

A Square is a protection wherever it is found, 
and denotes security of health and fortune to those 
who possess it. Consider the line upon which it is 
formed, or the mount or part of the hand where 
it may be, and judge accordingly; remembering 
always that it is a protection. 

Thus, on the Head Line, it would denote difficul- 
ties surmounted and overcome by the use of the 
intelligence; on the Heart Line, by the instrumen- 
tality of friends ; on the Moon, by a voyage or the 
intervention of women. 

The Star denotes a danger, except on the Mount 
of Jupiter, where it shows a winning hazard, or 



136 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



good fortune by a bold stroke. On Mars it denotes 
violence. On the Moon, a dangerous voyage or a 
serious trouble through women, danger from the 
populace. On Saturn, a fatality by violence. On 
the Sun, the evils of inordinate pride. On Venus, 
disappointment in love. On Mercury, cupidity 
and cunning. 

A star on the principal lines must be regarded as 
a menace to that aspect of the life which is denoted 
by the line so affected : as the Life Line, the con- 
stitution is affected ; the Head Line, there are mental 
troubles ; the Heart Line, social affairs are adversely 
affected, etc. 

The Grille (see Fig. 1 on Mount of Venus) is an 
indication of excess. When found on any mount 
it augments the activity of the corresponding 
characteristic. Thus : — 

A Grille on Jupiter shows extravagance and bom- 
bast; on Saturn, great misfortune and a chequered 
career, ending in trouble; on the Sun, inordinate 
love of display, consuming pride; on Mercury, 
peculation, theft, cunning; on Venus, disappointed 
affections; on Mars, danger of violent action, frenzy 
and woundings; on the Moon, a wandering, restless 
nature, and sometimes exile. 

When in the palm of the hand traversed by the 
Line of Fate, it indicates much misfortune, especially 
at that period of the life denoted by the position of 
the Grille as measured on the Fate Line. 

Islands are formed by the splitting and joining 



INCIDENTAL MARKS 



137 



together again of a line in its course. The period 

embraced by this Island will be one of dangerous 
i sickness, difficulty, mental incapacity, social ostra- 
; cism, imprisonment, etc., according to the line on 

which the island is formed and the attendant 

indications. 

A small Island shows a difficult crisis ; a long Island 
denotes a protracted period of misfortune or sickness. 

i An Island is frequently the sign of hereditary 
disease, either functional or organic. If on Jupiter's 
Mount it shows lung disease ; on Sol, the heart may 
be affected; on Saturn, the liver; on Mercury, the 
organs of speech or brain are affected ; on the Moon, 
the stomach is deranged. 

Frequently the Island shows some mystery attach- 
ing to the career. If at the origin of the Life Line, 
there is some mystery regarding the parentage, 

i and if at the same time the Fate Line has an Island 
at its source, it is an indication of illegitimacy. 

When the Island is formed on any of the principal 
lines, it will denote danger to the health and fortunes 
from some malady or abuse of the faculty or organ 

; involved or denoted by the line. 

t An Island on the Head Line shows occlusion of 
memory, amnesia, loss of mental faculty for the 
period involved. A double Head Line whose ex- 
tremities meet so as to enclose a continuous Island 
will therefore denote chronic nervous affection and 
with concomitant signs (such as degenerate thumb 
and a chained Line of Fate) will denote insanity. 
An Island on the Line of Health shows a long 



138 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

illness, debility, and a delicate constitution. If 
on the Mount of the Moon at the beginning of the 
Health Line, it shows somnambulism or medium- 
ship, arising out of an abnormal condition of the 
sympathetic nervous system. 

Similarly, judgment is to be made in respect of 
other indications of the Island, by its coincidence 
with the mounts or lines. On the Fate Line it 
sometimes denotes imprisonment, especially if the 
Mount of Mercury has a grille or cross upon it. 

Spots are always blemishes and denote crises and 
dangers. They are generally red or purple, but 
sometimes black. They show dangers affecting the 
Life, Head, Heart, etc., according to the Hne or 
mount affected. If on the Fate Line, a grave and 
sudden crisis in the fortunes. On the Life Line 
a spot frequently shows hurt or injury to the eyes, 
sometimes blindness. 

Thus, by a consideration of the typal form of a 
hand, its mounts, lines and incidental markings, 
you may certainly define much of the character 
and destiny of an individual. But nothing is abso- 
lute in the future. Changes are continually taking 
place, not only in the main lines of the hand, but also 
in the incidental markings of the mounts. Thus 
if you take an impression of the hand at any period 
of life, and another successively on every anniver- 
sary, it will be found that in the space of a few years 
a great difference is to be detected. You will see 



INCIDENTAL MARKS 139 



islands and grilles forming, squares and crosses 
coming into existence, lines breaking up, or becoming 
I firmer and more distinct. 

The hand is, in fact, a mirror of the interior nature 
and expresses very intimately the realized experience 
of the soul, whether subconscious or conscious. 
The subconscious experiences well up into conscious- 
ness as effects springing from their causes, like 
bubbles which detach themselves from a sub- 
merged body and rise to the surface. 

The connection of Palmistry with Astrology will 
be obvious to any student of both subjects, and 
Astrology affords an explanation of the changes 
taking place in the hand. The planets at birth show 
certainly radical tendencies, while their progress in 
the horoscope thereafter will denote, by their 
mutual configurations, the changes which will take 
place in the tendency and environment of the 
life. 

Hence, Palmistry is effective in the prediction of 
tendency but not of event, because it has not the 
means of calculating the future configurations 
of the planetary bodies. 



THE THAUMATURGIC ART 

CHAPTER I 
THE KABALA 

The Telesma, or Talisman, was anciently held in 
great esteem by the Thaumaturgists. We find 
evidence of its universality in China, India, Egypt, 
and among the Semitic nations, the Greeks and 
Romans, as well as among the ancient populace of 
Central America, Peru, Australasia, and the islands 
of the Pacific. Indeed, there seems every reason 
to believe that the telesmic art was in vogue among 
the Atlanteans, and by them transmitted to the 
surviving nations. It comes to us in a modified 
form from the Hebrews, who adapted it to their 
own theological S3''stem. A brief account of the 
principles of this art a.nd its methods can hardly 
be omitted from a work of this character, inasmuch 
as it is directly connected with Astrology and the 
Power of Numbers, and forms a very important 
part of the equipment of the magus. 

Necessarily the mind of man must have concrete 
methods of expression ; the most common and limited 
of which is language. Symbolism, on the other 
hand, may be regarded as the common language 

140 



THE KABALA 



141 



of humanity, as also it is that of the gods. The 
universe is a symbol; so also is man. Colour, 
Number, and Form — what are they but symbols ? 
A circle, a triangle, a square, a cross — these are but 
letters in an universal language, the only natural 
medium by which we can compel the notice of the 
gods. Such was the belief of the Pythagoreans and 
the Thaumaturgists of ancient Greece. 

I The Kabala, or secret interpretation, is divided 
into three sections : The Gimetria, the Notaricon, 
and the Temurah. It will be necessary to know these 
before entering upon the telesmic art, for nothing 

jis brought to perfection in this art without the 
magical use of names and numbers. 

By magical use we are to understand something 
in distinction from natural use, as the difference 

I between the supreme power of the creative will in 
man and the inherent vegetative power of the soul 
and of natural bodies. 

First, then, let us examine the principles of the 
Kabala. Man is the subject of all magical considera- 
tions, as he is also the agent of all magical operations. 
The Kabalists divide Man into four principles — 
viz. Spirit, Mind, Soul, and Body, corresponding 
to the four " elements " of Fire, Air, Water, and 
Earth. Of these the Spirit and Mind are Formless, 
and the Fluidic Body or Soul and the Physical 
Body are Formative. Yet there are three aspects 
of the Spirit, viz. Life, Will, and Effort, and three 
aspects of the Mind, viz. Perception, Reason, and 
Memory. So also the properties of the Soul are 



142 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

three: Desire, Imagination, and Emotion ; and of tlu 
Body three: Absorption, Circulation, and Secretion. 
For in one aspect Nature is volatile, in another fixed 
and in another mutable. 

Humanity consists of three orders : Lapsed Souls, 
Elementary Souls, and Demoniacal Souls. We dis- 
tinguish between the Spirit and the Soul. TIk 
Spirit in itself is of Divine origin, a scintilla of somt 
spiritual hierarchy to which it is directly related 
and from which it receives its energy and directioii 
These " imprisoned lights " are related to Dei* \ 
through the spiritual hierarchies to which the\ 
severally belong and of which the}^ are the earthl\ 
representatives. 

The Soul, on the other hand, is not of Divine 
origin, but is derived mediately from the nature- 
essence through the operation of the Human 
Imagination, or — as in the case of the brute 
creation — by Desire and the instinctual sense. 

Lapsed Souls are such as have fallen from tliei 
first estate or pristine nature, and will, by regenera- 
tion, eventually regain their lost heritage. 

Elementary Souls are such as have come into 
human generation in the course of natural evolution 
or by magical art, and of these the Sylphides are such 
as neighbour the human race most nearl}^ Coming 
as strangers into an atmosphere for which their 
powers are not yet sufficiently evolved, they are bom 
as naturals, simpletons and fools, a condition whi-ih 
is successively improved during their human in- 
carnations. Once entangled in the human S3^stem 



THE KABALA 



143 



>f evolution, they cannot go back. By this human- 
jby of theirs they acquire an immortality not other- 
wise attainable. Of the same category of Elemen- 
aries are the Undines, Salamanders, and Gnomes, 
hese names being related to the elements of Water, 
!<'ire and Earth, as Sylphs to that of Air. 

Demoniacal Souls are such as have by violence 
,hrust themselves into human life by obsessions, 
|»vershadowings and infestings of the bodies of men, 
yhether in frenzy or in trance, in epilepsy or other 
abnormal conditions of the mind and body. They 
.re hke robbers who take possession of the house 
yhile the owner is away. But some such are born 
into the world by the will of the gods, operating 
')y means of sidereal influences, for the fulfilling 
i>f large destinies, the despoiling and punishing of 
jiations, and are demons from their birth. Con- 
i'eming such an one the Christ said : " You twelve 
lave I chosen, and one of you is a devil," meaning 
hat Iscariot. From this it will be seen that not all 
liuman forms are invested with human souls. 

Also there are certain times and seasons when 
tngels and archangels are temporarily invested 
vith the human flesh for the high purposes of life, 
•ome as teachers and prophets, others as messengers 
)f peace ; but all such are free from the taint of the 
oul while obeying the laws of their mortal selfhood, 
l^et acting in all else under the direct inspiration 
)f the Spirit. Of such high order was Melchizedek, 
he King of Righteousness, "without father and 
vithout mother, having neither beginning of life 



144 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

nor end of days," with whom Abraham talked a 
recorded in the Genesis. Melchizedek was, in fact 
a presentation of the Christ, a great and might} 
spirit in temporary human form then reigning in 
Chaldea over the sons and daughters of the 
Magi. 

But also there are those spirits of the nature of 
Apollyon, who are " Princes of Darkness," and 
whose dominion is over those " wandering stars for 
whom is laid up the blackness of darlmess for age 
upon ages." These malevolent beings, acting undci 
the laws of their own nature, do from time to 
time manifest in human form for a more speedy 
judgment of the world. They are the Caligula 
and Neros of the world's history. 

The earth is therefore the theatre of a great variety 
of different souls, and is such because it is in equili- 
brium between the Heavens and the Hells, and ii 
a state of freedom where good and evil may com 
mingle. It is in truth the Field of Armageddon 
where must be fought out the great battle betweei 
the Powers of Light and the Powers of Dark 
ness. 

The Kabalists mention Seven Heavens and Sevei 
Hells, presided over by the Seven Archangels anc 
the Seven Princes of Evil. The i^rchangels of th' 
Seven Spheres of Light are : Michael, Gabriel 
Kamiel, Raphael, Zadkiel, Uriel, and Zophkiel 
standing for the Might, Grace, Zeal, Saving Power 
Justice, Splendour, and Mystery of God. The*, 
names are invoked under appropriate symbols hj 




THE KABALA 



145 



the telesmic art of which the Kabala forms an 
essential part. 

Michael, the archangel associated with the Sun, 
is derived from the syllables Mi, who ; cah, like ; al, 
god ; i.e. He who is like unto God ; or Who is like 
unto him ? Gabriel, from Gibur, power ; Kamiel, 
from Chem or Kam, heat ; Raphael, from Raphah, 
healing; Zadkiel, from Zadok, justice; Uriel, from 
: Aur, light ; and Zophkiel, from Zophek, a secret. As 
spiritual entities they are the express embodiments 
of the Divine attributes, though while unrevealed 
to us they continue only to stand for certain human 
conceptions of the Divine Being expressed in terms 
of human character. All definition is limitation, 
and all limitation is imperfection, yet God is the 
only Perfection and beyond all naming. 



L 



CHAPTER II 
THE CALCULATORY ART 



As already indicated, there are three sections of 
the Kabala, and these may now be examined more 



The Gimetria ascribes to each letter of a name or 
word a certain numerical value. The Kabalists 
give the following values to the Hebrew and Chaldee 
letters, the English equivalents being substituted 
and the order retained : — 

Units— a 1, b 2, g 3, d 4, e 5, v 6, z 7, ch 8, th 9. 
Tens— y 10, k 20, 1 30, m 40, n 50, s 60, o 70, p SO, ts 00. 
Hundreds— q 100, r 200, sh 300, t 400. 
Finals- ch 500, m 600, n 700, p 800, ts 900. 

Pythagoras has been credited with having pre- 
served an ancient table of numbers, together with 
their meanings. They are as follows : — 

A 1 E 5 19 



fully. 



B 2 
C 3 
D 4 



F 6 
G 7 
H 8 



K 10 
L 20 
M 30 



146 



THE CALCULATORY ART 



N 40 
50 
P 60 
Q 70 
R 80 



S 90 

T 100 

U 200 

X 300 

Y 400 



Z 500 
Ch 600 
V 700 
Hi 800 
Hu 900 



W 1400 

The Interpretation 

1. Ambition, Passion, Purpose. 

2. Death, Destruction. 

3. Destiny, Faith, ReHgion. 

4. Strength, Stability, Power. 

5. Marriage, Happiness, the Stars. 

6. Completion, Attainment. 

7. Rest, Freedom, the Path. 

8. Protection, Equity. 

9. Grief, Wounding, Anxiety. 

10. Success, Logic, Renovation. 

11. Offence, Deception, Strife. 

12. The City, a Town, a Witness. 

13. Obliquity, a Crooked Road. 

14. Sacrifice, Surrender. 

15. Virtue, Culture, Piety. 

16. Luxury, Sensuality, 

17. Misfortune, Carelessness, Loss. 

18. Vice, Brutality, Harshness. 

19. Folly, Insanity. 

20. Wisdom, Abnegation, Austerity. 

21. Creation, Mystery, Understanding. 

22. Punishment, Vengeance, Calamity. 

23. Prejudice, Ignorance. 



14« A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



24. Travelling, Change. 

25. Intelligence, Progeny. 

26. Beneficence, Altruism. 

27. Bravery, Firmness. 

28. Love, Presents, Gifts. 

29. News, Information. 

30. Fame, Marriage. 

31. Integrity, Ambition. 

32. Union, Embraces, Marriage. 

33. Gentleness, Chastity. 

34. Suffering, Pain, Recompense. 

35. Health, Peace, Happiness. 

36. Genius, Profound Intellect. 

37. Fidelity, Domestic Happiness. 

38. Malice, Avarice, Maiming. 

39. Honour, Credit, Laudation. 

40. Holiday, Feast, Weddings. 

41. Shame, Disgrace. 

42. Short and Unhappy Life. 

43. Churches, Temples, Worship. 

44. Sovereignty, Elevation, Power. 

45. Progeny, Population. 

46. Production, Fruitfulness. 

47. Long and happy Life. 

48. Judgment, a Court, the Judge. 

49. Avarice, mercenary spirit. 

50. Relief, Pardon, Freedom. 
60. Loss of husband or wife. 
70. Science, Initiation. 

80. Protection, Recovery, Convalescence. 
90. Aflaiction, Grief, Error, Blindness. 



THE CALCULATORY ART 149 



100. Divine favour, Angels, Spirits. 
200. Hesitation, Fear. 
300. Defence, Philosoph}^ Belief. 
400. Distant journeys. 
500. Holiness, Virtue. 
600. Perfection. 
700. Power, Dominion. 
800. Empire, Conquest. 
900. Strife, Eruption, War. 
1000. Sympathy, Mercy. 

In addition to these, the table contains some 
specific numbers, namely : — 

81. The Adept. 

120. Honour, Patriotism, Praise. 

215. Grief, Misfortune. 

318. Divine messenger. 

350. Justice, Confidence, Hope. 

360. A House, Home, Society. 

365. The Science of the Stars. 

490. Priesthood, Ministration. 

666. An Enemy, Malice, Plots. 
1095. Reserve, Silence. 
1260. Annoyances, Terrors. 
1390. Persecution. 

Unfortunately, the method to be followed in the 
use of these numbers has not been handed down to 
us, but I conceive that a method similar to the 
Hebrew notaricon may not be entirely amiss. Thus 
the name of the great Napoleon is enumerated — 



/ 



150 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



The sum of these numbers is 810, which is equal 
to 800 = empire, conquest, and 10 = success, logic, 
renovation. The words " empire, conquest, success, 
and renovation " have certainly a singular apposite- 
ness in this connection. It is obvious, however, 
that the import of a name would be altered by change 
from one language into another, and it is reasonable 
to presume that the original or mother-tongue in 
each case must be adopted. 

The Gimeiria ascribes to each letter a definite 
value, as we have already seen. The sum of a name 
is then reconverted into letters of equivalent 
value, and the meaning of the name thus derived. 
Thus we read that an angel talked with John of 
Patmos, who would have fallen down and wor- 
shipped him but was forbidden. The angel 
speaks of himself as a man, one of the " keepers 



N 40 

a 1 

p 60 

50 

1 20 
e 5 
o 50 
n 40 
e 5 



B 2 

u 200 

o 50 

n 40 

a 1 

p 60 

a 1 

r 80 

t 100 

e 5 



271 



539 



THE CALCULATORY ART 151 



of the sayings in the Book." The word " man " 
in Hebrew is Aish, the value of which is 

A I ilO 5^ 300 = 311 
and the name of the great recorder is Raphael — 
R 200 ph SO a I Z 30 =311. 

For this John of Patmos was of the Order of the 
Recorders and of the Hierarchy of Raphael. 

Of the Order of Calculators and Measurers is the 
Intelligence of Sephery; of the Order of Ordainers 
and Judges is the Intelligence of Zadok; and these, 
with others, are extracted from holy writ wherein 
their offices are covertly referred to. 

Therefore, if any would know the name of their 
office, let them take the sum of their name and 
convert it by the Gimetria according to the rules 
of the kabalistic art. Thus the name Sepharial " 
I of the Order of the Sephery is thus computed : — - 
S 60 ph 80 r 200 ?: 10 a I Z 30 = 381 
which is equivalent to : a 1 sh 300 ^9 80 = 381, the 
word Asoph being from the root Ashp = a star-gazer 
or astrologer, the astrologers of Chaldea being known 
as the Ashpim. 

The Notaricon is used for extracting the Divine 
names, and those of angels or spirits from sacred 
writ. The telesmic art requires that these names 
shall be emploj^ed in the construction of Talismans, 
as by their correspondence in numerical value thej 
have a compelling influence over all things which 
answer to the same root value. 

Thus by taking the letters from the beginnings of 



152 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

words, or their finals, and by other measures of a 
secret nature, the names of Spiritual Powers are 
derived. The Divine Being is of infinite power 
and presence, and therefore His names, as expressing 
the infinite variety of powers, intelligences and 
forms within the universe, can never be exhausted. 
The kabalist, therefore, only seeks to discern those 
which are of ef&cacy in the matter in hand. 

From a certain text of three verses in Exodus 
which begin with the words : Vayiso, Vayiho, and 
Vayot respectively^ the seventy-two Divine names 
are derived. These are the Shemhamphore corre- 
sponding to the seventy-two Elders ruling over the 
Church Universal, i.e. the Middle Spiritual Kingdom. 
The method followed in this case is as follows : — 

The first verse is written in Hebrew characters, 
which are seventy-two in number, from right to left, 
as is usual with Semitic texts. The second verse 
is written from left to right, and the third verse 
from right to left as usual, the Hebrew text being 
used throughout. Then by reading the three letters 
which fall together as one word, we have seventy- 
two triliteral words, to which is added the affix 
of the sacred names El or Jah. From the text 
" Thou art the mighty Lord for ever " is derived 
the potent name Agla; and from the sacred affirma- 
tion " The Lord our God is one God " we derive 
the name Yaya. Thus : — 

Jehovah Alohenu Jehovah Achad. 

Likewise from the text " One source of His unity 



THE CALCULATORY ART 153 



Dne source of His individuality, His vicissitude is 
Dne " we have the magical name Ararita, which is 
:ound inscribed on the Seal of Solomon the King. 
From the text Holy and blessed is He " we derive 
ihe name Hagaha. From the sentence in the 
Drophetic blessing of Jacob " Until Shiloh come," 
.vhen the patriarch was predicting the fate of 
ludah, we have the name Jesii. The well-informed 
labalist, however, knows that this text has reference 
}0 the rising of the Star Shuleh in the constellation 
)f Scorpio; for Leo, the lion of Judah, with Cepheus 
he Lawgiver beneath, does not depart from the 
^lidheaven until Scorpio rises in the East. 

Again, from the text " The Lord our King is true " 
ve have the word Amen, 

The Temurah, which means " change," also yields 
ts secret interpretations by the transposing and 
3xchanging of letters according to the rules of the 
kabahstic art as set forth in the Table of Tsiruph; 
md by the application of this to the Gimetria and 
4otaricon, we derive the names of spirits and angels 
v^hose offices are expressed in the texts whence they 
re derived. Some of these are evil and are referred 
as " vessels of iniquity " and " vessels of wrath " 
jM also " lying spirits." 

Every man is beset with some temptations arising 
rem his association with the world of spirits, every 
;ood ministration implying a possible evil by per- 
version, to which evil the malevolent forces corre- 
pond. Thus man has both a protecting angel and 
,.n assailant, and he may thus incline to good or to 



154 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

evil, being, while in the middle world, in a state ol 
equilibrium or freedom. Moreover, it is said that 
preference among men is from the superior power 
of the spirits attached to one man over those oi 
another, for by the intensity of their wills these 
men are able to link themselves with the powers ol 
good or evil allied to them by nature. 

Every work undertaken by man has a twofold 
presidency of spiritual powers attaching to it, where- 
by it is brought to perfection or overthrown 
Among the kabalists there is a method of deriving 
the names of those spirits presiding over the nativity, 
The figure of the Heavens being erected, the lettei 
of the Hebrew alphabet are set round m the order 
of the signs, beginning at the Ascendant ; and those 
letters which fall on the places of the Sun, the Moon, 
and the ruler of the Ascendant when brought to- 
gether yield the name of the presiding angel or 
benefic Intelligence. But the same calculation 
made from the Descendant of the horoscope yiel 
the name of the evil spirit or Cachodemon. Othej 
affirm, however, that the places of the benefic planets 
must be employed, together with that of the ruler 
of the Ascendant for the Agathodemon; while the 
places of the malefics with that of the ruler of the 
Descendant must be taken account of to compute 
the name of the Cachodemon. But names in them- 
selves bear only such meanings as we attach to them; 
their real efficacy consists in their numerical 
correspondence with the nature of the s3^mbols 
employed and their relation to the purpose in hand, 



THE CALCULATORY ART 155 



nd thus in their confirming the mind in that faith 
nd intention without which, together with the 
nited action of the will and imagination, no magical 
ork can be brought to completion. For the will 
the male force and the imagination the female 
ower which, by their union, are capable of creating 
lat which is desired. 

The evocations within the magic circle, the con- 
irations of spirits to the crystal, the construction of 
ilismans, sigils, seals and other works of the 
laumaturgic art, have their root in this covert 
greement between Nature and the Soul of man, 
hereby Spirit answers to matter and Force to 
)rm, so that the material form of every symbol 
:ands for the embodiment of a corresponding 
piritual Force. 



CHAPTER III 
OF EVIL SPIRITS 



The Prince of Darkness, Beelzebub, presides over 
nine orders of infernal spirits, according to the 
Kabalists. These spirits are the tempters of man- 
kind. The Occultist affirms that they are the dis- 
embodied spirits of evil-minded men confirmed in 
wickedness by the perversity of their wills. Even 
presuming that they are no more than the evil 
thoughts and imaginings of embodied humanity, 
there is yet nothing, in a world where " thoughts 
are things," to prevent such from taking bodily 
shape and substance and thus, when stimulated 
by the force of men's evil desires, becoming active 
powers for evil. 

Everybody has read of Frankenstein's Monster, 
that weird output of the imagination of the beautiful 
Mary Shelley, but few people have realized that 
the story embodies a great occult truth. It is 
perhaps not difficult to trace this creation of the 
daughter of Charles Godwin. One has but to study 
his work on The Lives of the Necromancers to be 
confirmed in the idea that what the father sug- 
gested the daughter elaborated in the laboratory of 

156 



OF EVIL SPIRITS 157 



her own gifted mind. It was in the nature of a 
competitive essay, and gained the prize of publica- 
tion. Study this story, and also the chapter on 
" The Dweller on the Threshold " in the popular 
novel by Bulwer Lytton, and you will have some 
notion of the experiences of those who are capable 
of creating, and thereafter of being obsessed by, the 
images of their own minds. Will and Desire created 
the universe. It should not be strange that it may 
create something equal to man when both the will 
and imagination of man are consciously directed 
to the process. 

Of the Nine Orders of Evil Spirits, the first is 
that of False Gods. Here we have the concentrated 
worship and imagination of thousands directed to 
the same effect, the creation of " gods." We have 
knowledge of the Saturnalias and Baldachinos, 
the Bacchanalias and orgies of the heathen world. 
Such a god was that Satan who tempted the man 
Jesus. Swedenborg defines the difference between 
the satans and the devils when he says that the 
former apply themselves to the minds of men, in- 
stilling false doctrines and lies, blinding intelligence, 
stimulating pride and inciting to heresies and 
seditions ; while, on the other hand, devils are such 
as apply themselves to the appetites, and by their 
affinity with the emotional faculty (whence they have 
their origin) seek to instil lust, greed, avarice, hatred, 
and every kind of illicit affection and perverted or 
depraved appetite. It may be well to accept this 
distinction. 



158 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



The second order are called Lying Spirits, oi 
which sort were those who obsessed the prophet 
Ahab ; and over these is set a spirit called Pytho, 
who is the father of lies. These spirits apph 
themselves to the interiors of the vocal and respira 
tory organs by means of the brain centres. Some 
such are to be heard speaking through the mouths oi 
persons entranced, such as demoniacs, pythonesses 
and spirit mediums. Such an one is mention': 
in the Bible as crying out in pain at the approach oi 
Jesus, saying : " What have I to do with Thee, 
Son of David ? I know Thee who Thou art ! " 

The third order of evil spirits are those called 
" Vessels of Iniquity " and " Vessels of Wrath,' 
who are the inventors of all vices for the infesting 
of men and their ruination. Their prince is called! 
" Belial," who is without a yoke, being a renegade 
and disobedient spirit not subject to control. 01, 
this order are the violent and lawless, murderers, and 
some suicides who kill themselves in frenzy. Oi 
this order St. Paul speaks to the Corinthians, saying 
" What agreement hath Christ with Belial ? 
For these spirits of Belial have no agreement with 
any, being, as it were, the Ishmaelites of the under- 
world. 

The fourth order of evil spirits is called Tli 
Revengeful,'' their prince being called Asmodeu, 
who is the occasion of judgment. They were of the 
order let loose upon Egjrpt in the visitation by 
plagues, as recorded in Exodus. 

The fifth order of evil spirits is called " The 



OF EVIL SPIRITS 



159 



)eluders/' whose satan is called Nahash, the chief 
i)f those who have the spirit of the serpent. These 
'iause signs and wonders and work all sorts of marvels 
n order to seduce men's minds from the truth. 
Phey are represented by the Black Magicians, the 
fvonder-workers who seek to efface God and arrogate 

themselves the power to control the spiritual 
yorld. In reflected degree they work through the 
ininds of cheats, forgers and charlatans. That 
)atan who tempted Eve is of this order of the Nahash 
)r Serpents. Of him it is said : " He it is who 
.educes the whole world, doing great signs and 
iiausing fire to descend from heaven in the sight 
\>i men, seducing the inhabitants of the earth by 
hese which are given him to do," as appears in the 
\pocalypse. 

1 The sixth order is that of the " Turbulents," pre- 
sided over by Meririm, the Prince of the Powers of 
he Air. It is they who affect the air with tempests, 
corrupting the air with blights and poisonful exhala- 
l-ions, destroying crops and polluting the waters of 
he earth. St. Paul speaks of this " Prince of the 
^wers of the Air." These spirits have affinity 
vith the thoughts and passions of men, and are 
Invoked by the turbulence and passions of men's 
'ninds,as may be seen in great wars and revolutions. 

The seventh order is that of " the Furies." 
Cheir Prince is called Apollyon, or in the Hebrew 
\baddon, which means " the Destroyer." They 
ire the cause of madness, frenzy, murders, massacres 
ind intestine wars. 



160 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



The eighth order of evil spirits is called " The 
Accusers " or The Inquisitors." They are under 
the domuaion of one called Ashtaroth, i. e. " The 
Searcher." In the Greek he is called Diabolos, or 
the Calumniator, and in the Apocalypse is referred 
to as " the Accuser of the Brethren, accusing them 
night and day before the face of God." For these 
spirits delight in persecuting the righteous, searching 
out their weaknesses and railing against them 
because of their imperfections. The common fault- 
finder is well within the category of those who owe 
allegiance to Ashtaroth. 

The ninth order is that of " The Tempters." 
These are in close association with mankind, and 
one of their number is present with those who are 
in any way subject to the worldly spirit of greed 
and avarice. Their prince is called Mammon, i. e. 
Covetousness. 

These nine orders of evil spirits are called trans- 
gressors, for they violate the commandments which 
in the Hebrews are but nine only, and not ten as 
commonly conceived: the first and second of the 
" Decalogue " being one only, and having reference 
to the worship of the true God and the sin of 
the making of false gods, whether subjective or 
objective; and Beelzebub is that supreme False 
God whom the sinful serve by error under what- 
ever name it may figure. 



CHAPTER IV 



MAN'S SPIRITUAL FREEDOM 

To the end that mankind may be in freedom and 
reserve to itself the power to cast in its lot Avith the 
good or evil powers, these nine orders of evil spirits 
are, according to the kabalists, counterbalanced by 
a corresponding array of angelic orders. These 
are known as Cherubim, Seraphim, Thrones, Do- 
minions, Powers, Virtues, Principalities, Archangels, 
and Angels. These Nine Orders are otherwise 
referred to as the Metratton, they who stand 
about the Throne "; the Ophanim, otherwise called 
the Wheels of Life (referred to by Ezekiel); and 
the Seven Planetary Spirits, which include the 
Archangels and their hosts of subservient angels. 
These by their representatives are set over mankind 
for his government and well-being; else were man 
wholly abandoned to the machinations of evil 
, spirits. 

! In the apocryphal book of Tobias it is related 
that the Archangel Raphael did apprehend 
Asmodeus, and bound him in the wilderness of 
Upper Egypt. It has been thought that this storjr 
has reference to the presence of the planet Jupiter 

161 M 



162 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



in the sign Gemini ; for Asmodeus is of the sphere of 
Jupiter's evil spirits, and Raphael is Mercury, whose 
sign Gemini is said to rule over Egypt, and more- 
over it is the sign of Jupiter's debility. Ingenious 
as this interpretation may be, it appears to rest 
upon the association of Asmodeus with Jupiter, 
which may very well be the case, as Asmodeus, like 
Jupiter, is related to the office of the Judges; but 
it is not the fact, astrologically speaking, that 
Gemini rules Upper Egypt, but Capricorn, or — 
according to the Egjrptian zodiac — the Crocodile. 
Hence the Egyptians were called the Mizraim (those 
born from the crocodile). 

Concerning the sphere of Jupiter, Hesiod says : 
" There are thirty thousand of the spirits of Jupiter, 
pure and immortal, who are the keepers of men ou 
earth that they may observe justice and mercy, 
and who, having clothed themselves with an aerial 
form, go to and fro everywhere upon the earth." 

No man could continue in safety, it is said, nor 
any woman remain uncorrupted, and none coujd 
come to the end designed by God, but for the assist- 
ance given them by the benefic spirits, or if evil 
spirits were alone allowed to sway men's minds. 
Thus every man has a guardian angel and a good 
demon, as Socrates affirms, and likewise there are 
spirits of evil attaching to all in w hom the passions 
are allowed free play ; and these good and evil forces 
contend for the victor}^, the decision being in the 
hands of the man whose soul is the coveted prize. 
For man is in the middle ground of equilibrium. 



MAN'S SPIRITUAL FREEDOM 163 



and freedom being allied to both the superior and 
inferior worlds by the dual aspect of his mind, 
being stirred by passion from below and illumined 
by intelligence from above, it is therefore in his 
will to whom the victory shall be given. 

Therefore, we cannot impute evil to spirits that 
are by nature evil, neither lay our failures to their 
blame ; nor accuse the benevolent spirits of any lack 
of zeal, seeing that it is by our own consent that this 
or that advantage is gained by the powers of e\^il. 
But the evil powers, once overcome, lose their 
influence over us in a great measure. And this 
is the meaning of the saying, " I will give you power 
to tread upon scorpions; nevertheless, rejoice not 
that ye have power over the spirits ^ but that your 
name is written in heaven." 

Thus it is seen that evil spirits are compared to 
scorpions, and that they may be rendered ineffectual 
and harmless b}^ the power of the celestial name, 
which is that spiritual or " new name " which is 
written upon the White Stone, as is said in the 
Revelations. The Christ, or Man made Perfect, 
is Venus, the Light Bearer and the Messenger of 
Peace, who gives his qualities to the overcoming 
Df evil, and " To him that overcometh I will give 
the bright and morning star." Opposed to Venus 
n the spheres is Mars, the god of war, the promoter 
Df strife and discord, the ruler of the " Scorpions." 
He rules over the eighth sphere and the eighth sign 
)f the zodiac, i. e, Scorpio, which is associated 
vith the House of Death, the terminal house of the 

iM 2 



164 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



natural soul. When good spirits and powers domi- 
nate this principle in man's nature — i. e. the Scorpio 
principle — there is the better hope of a deliverance 
from the evil of these spirits. 

When it is said that Michael (the Sun-Angel) 
contended with Satan (^. e. Saturn) for the body of 
Moses, we understand kabalistically that the good 
and evil principles were in strife, Saturn contending 
that the body belonged to him by natural agreement, 
while Michael affirmed that he had redeemed it 
even from decay; for Moses was an Initiate of the 
cultus of Ammon-Ra, and his name denotes not only 
drawn forth and elected, but kabalistically he is 
nominated, for he was one of those named and 
appointed to a typical work. 

This association of the spirits with man, and the 
sympathies and antipathies arising therefrom, is 
the reason that certain men are naturally friends 
or enemies of others. 

A certain magician warned M. Antoninus of his 
friendship with Octavius Augustus, with whom he 
was accustomed to play, Augustus always coming 
oft" the conqueror. The magician, it is said, repri- 
manded Antoninus because he continued to consort 
with Augustus, although better born, more skilful 
and older than he, for, the magician continued, 
" Thy genius doth much dread the genius of this 
young man and thy fortune flatters his fortune, 
so that, unless thou shalt shun him, it appears wholly 
to decline to him." Thus it is that some men are 
brought to positions of preference and power irrespec- 



MAN'S SPIRITUAL FREEDOM 165 

\ tive of their individual merits, because the genius 
which directs them and presides over their fortunes 
is more powerful than that of their rivals. But the 
Genius of Fortune is not that of Life, nor that of 
Intelligence, these three being distinct : so that a 
man may become possessed of great wealth and die 
young, or show remarkable faculty without com- 

, mensurate benefit. Therefore the Genius of Fortune 
and Life must be in agreement if the position is 
to be enjoyed, while that of the Intelligence and 
Fortune must be equally well disposed if the full 
reward of one's labours is to be enjoyed. Thus, 
all things considered, the choice must be in regard 
to that calling or profession which most suitably 
comports with the Genius of Fortune. This is 
taught in the lioroscopical science, but otherwise 
is kabalistically determined according to names 
and numbers. These things, which have relation 
to the freedom of man, must be understood by those 
who would make election of times and seasons. 
It is good and proper to know whence benefits will 
be derived and whence evil will assail us ; also those 
days, hours and seasons which are proper to our 
purposes, and those again which are incompatible ; 
so that between that which is good and that which 
is evil we may so work that ultimately we may 

: prevail. 



CHAPTER V 



ON TALISMANS 

On the back of the Great Tortoise which the I 
Emperor Yaou found on the banks of the Yellow 
River after the great flood of 2348 B.C., there was 
found inscribed a square of numbers which is now ' 
of universal fame. It comes to us through the 
Hebrew Kabala as the Seal of Saturn, or the Table j 
of Fifteen, being composed of the figures from one 
to nine so arranged that every way it adds to 15. 
But the Chinese call it the Pa^ao, or Eightfold Path, 
these ways or paths being represented by the num- 
bers leading from the central figure, which represents 
Man. Thus we have the most ancient telesma in 
the world, the mystic Table of Saturn : — 



4 


9 


2 




3 


5 


7 


8 


1 


6 



This telesma is made on virgin parchment, or lead, 
which is the metal of Saturn, and on a Saturday, 
in the hour of Saturn, being the first and eighth 
hour after sunrise. On one side is inscribed tb 

166 



ON TALISMANS 



167 



above table of figures, around which is a circle 
enclosing the name Agiol, which is the sum of the 
numbers included in the table, namely 45. Thus : — 

A 1 g 3 i 10 a I 1 30 = 45. 

On the reverse side is the Sigil of Saturn and the 
Seal, together with a text importing the purpose 
for which the telesma is made. 



The Table of Jupiter is a square of four, comprising 
the numbers from 1 to 16 in such form that each 
way shall amount to 34, the total of all being 136. 

The Table of Mars is a square of five, from 1 to 25, 
each column and diagonal amounting to 65, and the 
sum of all to 325. 

The Table of the Sun is a square of six, from 1 to 
36, the sum being 111 in every direction, and the 
total of all the numbers 666. This is the mystical 
number which stands in opposition to the " Number 
of the Beast." 

The Table of Venus is a square of seven, comprising 
the numbers from 1 to 49, amounting to 175 in all 
directions, and the sum of all the figures to 1225. 

The Table of Mercury is a square of eight, being 




Sigil of Saturn. 



168 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



numbers from 1 to 64, adding to 260 in all directions, 
the sum being 2080. 

The Table of the Moon is a square of nine, adding 
to 369 in all directions, the sum of the numbers 
being 3321. 

Each telesma has to be made in the hour and 
on the day ruled by the planet, when the Moon is 
increasing in light and in good aspect to the ruler 
of the hour. 

An illustration of the method of employing these 
telesmas may be cited. 

If the position is to be improved, take the influence 
of the planet Jupiter and on a Thursday in the 
hour of Jupiter, the Moon being in good aspect 
to that planet and increasing in light. On a piece 
of tin, silver or parchment, inscribe the Table of Four, 
and over it the name of the Intelligence of Jupiter, 
which is Jophial, and beneath it the symbol of the 
planet. Enclose these in a circle and write around 
it the names of Aba, Hevah, Ahi, Alab, which are 
the powers of its numbers. Close them with another 
circle. 

On the reverse side, inscribe the planetary seal, 
and the sigil of the planetary intelligence, and 
enclose them in a circle. Around this write the pur- 
port of the telesma in a verse taken from Scripture 
which is appropriate to the operation in hand. 
Close all in a circle. 

The telesma thus made is to be worn upon the 
person until such time as its operation is effected, 
when it is to be regarded as a " dead " talisman, 



ON TALISMANS 



169 



and thereafter will serve for no other person or 
purpose. 

Now in order to complete the knowledge of this 
telesmic art, the following sigils are given, to be 
inscribed on the reverse side to the table of numbers. 




As to the construction of the magical tables of 
numbers, the following rules are to be followed : — 

For evenly-even squares, i. e. such as have 4, 
8 and 12 bases, e. g, the squares of Jupiter and 



170 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Mercury, write down the figures in their natural 
order, as here : — 

12 3 4 
5 6 7 8 
9 10 11 12 
13 14 15 16 

Now draw a square divided into 16 cells. Fill 
in the numbers in this order, viz. keep the coniers 
as they are, 1, 4, 13, and 16. Transpose the figures 
to their diagonal opposites, namely, 5 and 12, 9 and 
8, 2 and 15, 3 and 14, leaving the central -quare 
of four cells in their natural order. 

You will then have a square in which the numbers 
are so disposed that they add up to 34 in any direc- 
tion, thus : — 



1 


15 


14 


4 


12 


6 


7 


9 


8 


10 


11 


5 


13 


3 


2 


16 



For oddly-even squares, as 3 x 2 = 6,5 x 2 = 10, 
7 X 2 = 14, a rather different method is employed. 
Take a natural square of six. Keep the corner 
numbers 1, 6, 31, 36 in their natural places, transfer 
the central square of four cells to their diagonal 
opposites, namety, 15 and 22, 16 and 21. Keep 
the comers of the next square, 8, 11, 26, 29, in 



ON TALISMANS 



171 



their natural places. We now have the square in 
this condition : — 



1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


7 


8 


9 


10 


11 


12 


13 


14 


22 


21 


17 


18 


19 


20 


16 


15 


23 


24 


25 


26 


27 


28 


29 


30 


31 


1 32 33 


34 


35 


36 



showing the t\^o diagonals of the grand square 
completed. 

Now transpose 27 and 28, then lift them to the 
places of 9 and 10, bringing these down to replace 
them. 

Next transpose 17 and 23, and carry them across 
to the places of 14 and 20, bringing these latter over 
to replace them. 

Next transpose 12 and 30, and carry them across 
to the places of 7 and 25, bringing these latter back 
to replace them. 

Transpose 19 and 24, leaving 13 and 18 in their 
natural places. 

Transpose 4 and 34, leaving 3 and 33 in their 
natural places. 

Finally, transpose 32 and 35, and carry them across 



172 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM I 

to the places of 2 and 5, bringing these down 
replace them ; you will then have the 



Magic Square of Sol, 



1 


35 


3 


34 


32 


6 


30 


8 


28 


27 


11 


7 


13 


23 


22 


21 


14 


18 


24 


17 


16 


15 


20 


19 


12 


26 


9 


10 


29 


25 


32 


2 


33 


4 


5 


36 



All squares may be dealt with on the principle 
which is here followed. It will be of interest to 
note that the seals of the planets are derived from 
the numerical sequence of their tables. Thus in 
the square of three, which is the Table of Saturn, 
if you draw a line from 1 to 2 and thence to 3, another 
line through 4, 5 and 6, and a third line from 7 to 
8 and thence to 9, you have the Seal of Saturn. 
But the other forms of the seals have been simplified 
and rendered as equivalent glyphs. 

Various other talismans have been handed down 
to us beside those appropriate to the planets. Thus 
w^e have the most Sacred Seal of Solomon the Kiug. 
which is a square of four inset with the sacred name 
whose letters replace the figures, the same being 



ON TALISMANS 



173 



nscribed in a circle within which are written the 
vords : Jehovah eloahim Jehovah achad (The 
jord our God is the only Lord). 

On the reverse side are the interlaced triangles 
,vith the symbol of Deity, the Yod or perfect number 
10 set in the midst. 

Another telesma attributed to Solomon is dis- 
;)layed on page 174. 

The Seal of Solomon is shown on one side with 
the word Berasit, i.e. "In wisdom " or "In the 
beginning "; and on tlie reverse side is the name of 
Solomon with his sigil or mystic signature. 

By whatever means we may constrain spiritual 
forces to our purpose, whether by sigil, charm, 
telesma or invocation, it is only b}^ the faith of the 
operator, aided by the trained will and imagination, 
which are the magical faculties of the human soul. 

Imagination is the creative or formative power 
of the mind by which a matrix or mould is delivered 
to Nature for the vitalizing power of the Will. 
For of these faculties the imagination is female 
and receptive, while the will is masculine and 
projective. Wliat in the common mind operates 
as desultory thought and desire, the thought taking 
form and the desire giving life to it, is replaced in 
the mind of the magician by an ardent will and 
conscious imagination directed to the creation of 
definite things. To a certain extent, all lovers, all 
poets and artists are magicians equally with the 
makers of empires and the reformers of the religious 
world. They have definite objects in view; their 



174 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 




Tlie Seal of Solomon the King. 



UJ 



'1 



\ 








1 




1 









n 



ON TALISMANS 



175 



naginations are fired with the vision of a thing 
reatly desired of them, and their wills are potent 
nd effectually directed to the goal of their ambitions, 
'hese are the people whose dreams come true. 
)nly, when art supplements and fixes the form, 
iving voice to the powers which reside in Nature, 
ailing them forth to defined and determined uses, 
heir efficacy is brought within the control of the 
juman will as raw materials wrested from the bowels 
f the earth and fashioned for a purpose. 
Paracelsus conveys this same teaching when he 
ays : " The power of the will and the intention of 
he soul are the main points in magic as in medicine. 
L man who wishes everybody well will produce 
ood effects, while one who begrudges everybody 
U that is good and who hates himself may experi- 
nee in his own person the effects of his poisonous 
houghts." 

That the magical faculty does not rest with the 
ood and virtuous alone we are well aware ; for the 
lagical power is inherent in every human soul, 
nd has the power of acting not only immediately, 
pen bodies that are present to the sense, by means 
f the subtle powers of the eye and the breath, 
>ut also at a distance, upon bodies and persons more 
emote, by means of the desire and phantasy of the 
oul acting upon the vital principle within them, 
lecognize only that thoughts are things, creatures 
'f life when animated by human desire, and in all 
espects obedient to their creator man, and what 
linders that they should obey the behests of the 



176 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



soul, when sufficiently enforced by the impelling 
power of the will ? 

Therefore, we may see that it is motive alone 
which distinguishes good from evil in the use of 
occult forces. That which links the mind to its 
subject is thought; that which gives it form \^imagim-{ 
tion; and that which vitalizes it is the will. The willi 
has no direct relations with motive, and may be 
used with equal power for good or evil. WiU is 
but the vital or life-giving power to thought. Life 
has no qualities per se, though potential for all 
things; but it gains qualities by use or function. 
Motive determines the quality of our thought, 
inhering in and tincturing with its own nature every 
mental action. The motive is a power in itself, 
apart from the act, as the soul is a thing apart from 
the body, though expressing itself therein. 

Therefore causes that are brought into play by 
occult means will differ in their ultimate effects 
by reason of the motive which ensouls them, 
though to the outward eye appearing in all respects 
identical. 

Hence, to quote the words of a modern physician, 
" Whoever undertakes to govern and direct these 
mysterious powers, attempts a bold task. Let 
him consider well that he is penetrating, as far as 
is possible, into the highest laws of Nature. Never 
let him enter the sanctuary without reverential 
fear and the most profound respect for the principles 
which he endeavours to set in operation." Every 
person has this magical faculty within him, and it 



ON TALISMANS 



177 



only stands in need of waking up. There is no 
limit to human perfectibility and power, and nothing 
which can be conceived of by the human mind 
that cannot ultimately be realized by man. There- 
fore the Magi have but four precepts : — 

Know — Will — Dare — Keep Silent. 



N 



CHAPTER VI 



NUMEROLOGY 

The great philosopher of Croton declared that 
the universe was built upon the power of numbers. 
The divine Plato affirmed the same thing when 
he said : God geometrizes." To understand the 
power of numbers, their properties and virtues, i.^ 
the first ke}^ to a knowledge of the magic of nature. 
Number, whether expressed as quantity, sound, 
form or colour, will ultimately be found to deter- 
mine all sympathies and antipathies, all discord 
and harmony between natural bodies and between 
the soul of Nature and that of man. .To under 
stand the power of one's own soul in the univerM 
is the first essential of the magical art. To knoi- 
that power, one must know his number and thence 
his sympathies and antipathies in the soul-world. 
Name and quality, what are these but number, 
when brought to the last equation ? By the right 
use of numbers all magical operations are effected, 
and by the perfect knowledge of numbers the 
predictive art is brought to its perfection. 

Daniel the Prophet said of himself m Babylonia : 
"I, Daniel, found out by the books the numbers of 
the 3^ears," and this knowledge was not foreign to 
the great astrologer Michael Nostradamus. 

178 



NUMEROLOGY 



179 



All numbers have an occult relation to sounds. 
Gaffarel says that the Hebrew alphabet was invented 
by the first astronomers, who took their forms from 
lines joining the stars of the zodiacal constellations 
and the asterisms north and south of the Zodiac. 
This is in agreement with the teaching of the Kabal- 
ists, who preferably make use of the Hebrew alphabet 
in all magical operations. Each letter holds a 
signification in reference to the three worlds, the 
Natural, the Intellectual, and the Divine, in three 
degrees : — 

S Self -dominion, Austerity, Selfishness. 

3 Thought, Science, Ambition. 

n Tenderness, Enjoyment, Luxury. 

1 Wisdom, x4.bility, Pride. 

n Reverie, Repose, Idleness. 

1 Aspiration, Freedom, Self-indulgence. 
T Triumph, Conquest, Anger. 

n Justice, Equilibrium, Calculation. 

12 Prudence, Caution, Fear. 

^ Faith, Learning, Self -Confidence. 

3 Force, Eft'ort, Violence. 

b Patience, Investigation, Indifi:"erence. 

72 Hope, Devotion, Destruction. 

2 Temperance, Moderation, Vacillation. 
D Occult Science, Eloquence, Fatality. 
"J Veneration, Belief, Abandon. 

5 Immortality, Beauty, Expression. 
1* The Universe, Reflection, Error, 
P Religion, Reason, Vanity. 
"1 Life, Impulse, Vegetation. 
^ Existence, Sensation, Folly. 
^ The Absolute, Truth, Success. 

xN 2 



180 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

The names and values of the letters have already 
been given. In making sigils of names, the quarter- 
of the kabalistic tables are taken instead of the 
letters they contain. These are combined to foim 
the figure or sigil which contains these forms in 
combination ; thus the name Jacob is defined : — 




By permutations and combinations of numbers 
many choice secrets are discovered, not only in 
relation to individuals but in regard also to nation- 
and the world in general. Such combination 
result in the establishing of important epochs 
when things are brought to their climax and to 
their end, or when a new order of things arises 
and is brought to its issue. If we examine the 
power of numbers in certain weU-established histori- 
cal cases, we shall have quite sufficient evidence 
to warrant our thesis that Number Hes at the root 
of all things. 

Thus, the House of Valois began with Philippe 
and ended with Henri. 

Philippe has 8 letters. 

Henri has 5 ,, 

Henri de Valois 13 



NUMEROLOGY 181 

I The House of Brunswick affords a similar 

kabalism : — 

Ascension of George I . . . 1714 

1 + 7 + 1 + 4 = 13 

Ascension of George II . . . 1727 

1 + 7 + 2 + 7 = 17 

Stuart Rebellion 1744 

1 + 7 + 4 + 4 = _^16 

Ascension of George III . . 1760 

1 + 7 + 6 = _ 14 

American Rebellion .... 1774 

1 + 7 + 7 + 4 = _19 

French Revolution .... 1793 

1 + 7 + 9 + 3= __^20 

The Grand Alliance against 

Napoleon 1813 

Again, the history of France affords an epoch 
in the 

Fall of Robespierre in . . . 1794 

1 + 7 + 9 + 4 = 21 

Fall of Napoleon 1815 

1 + 8+1 + 5 = 15 

Fall of Charles X .... 1830 

1 + 8 + 3 + 12 



Death of Due d'Orleans, the 

Heir- apparent .... 1842 

It has been well said that " history repeats itself." 
Nothing perhaps could so intimately portray this 
fact than the parallelism, even to minute details, 
of the lives of St. Louis of France and King Louis 
XVI of France, as here ^et forth in detail : — 



182 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



1 



Birth of St. Louis, April 23 . . . . 1215 

An interval of years 539 

Birth of Louis XVI, August 23 . . . 1754 

Birth of Isabella, sister of St. Louis . . 1225 

Interval 539 

Birth of Elizabeth, sister of Louis XVI . 1764 

Death of Louis VIII, father of St. Louis 1226 

Interval 539 

Death of the Dauphin, father of Louis XVI 1765 

Minority of St. Louis begins .... 1226 

Interval 53d 

Minority of Louis XVI begins . . . 1765 

Marriage of St. Louis 1231 

Interval 539 

Marriage of Louis XVI 1770 

Majority of St. Louis (King) .... 1235 

Interval 539 

Accession of Louis XVI 1774 

St. Louis concludes a Peace with Henr}^ III 1243 

Interval 539 

Louis XVI concludes a Peace with 

George III 1782 

An Eastern Prince sends ambassador to St. 

Louis, desiring to become a Christian 1249 

Interval 539 

An Eastern Prince sends ambassador to 

Louis XVI with the same object . 1788 



NUMEROLOCxY 18.3 

Captivity of St. Louis 1250 

Interval 539 

Captivity of Louis XVI 1789 

St. Louis abandoned 1250 

Interval 539 

Louis XVI abandoned 1789 

Birth of Tristan (Sorrow) 1250 

Interval 539 

Death of Dauphin 1789 

Beginning of Pastoral under Jacob . . 1250 

Interval 539 

Beginning of the Jacobins . . . . 1789 

Death of Isabelle d'Angouleme . . . 1250 

Interval 539 

Birth of Isabelle d'Angouleme . . . 1789 

Death of Queen Blanche, mother of 

St. Louis 1253 

Interval 539 

End of the White Lily of France . . . 1792 

St. Louis desires to retire and become a 

Jacobin 1254 

Interval 539 

Louis XVI quits life at the hands of 

the Jacobins 1793 

St. Louis returns to Madeleine in 

Provence 1 254 

Interval 539 

Louis XVI interred in the Cemetery of 

Madeleine !^ . 1793 



184 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



In this return to their native soil the two remark- 
able lives of these remarkable Kings of France came 
to a parallel close. It would of itself appear to afford 
sufficient grounds for a belief in the reincarnation 
of souls. By a certain numerical valuation of the 
name St. Louis, which is composed of 6154361 
= 26 = 8, it is found equal to 5 39 = 17 = 8, the 
number of years between the two kings. Also 
Louis XVI =63116 = 17, which again yields a 
unit value of 8, the number signifying " Cyclic 
revolution " or, according to the Kabala, " Justice, 
equilibrium, the balance." Here it would certainly 
appear that St. Louis had " come again to his 
own." 

The law of periodicity has been the means of 
many remarkable scientific observations, and the 
law of cycles has been applied to the facts of history 
with some startling results, as we have already seen. 
It has been shown that a cyclic wave of activity 
extending over 250 years passes from one quarter 
of the world to another with regular precision, 
Thus :— 

1750 B.C., Mongolian Empire established. 
1500 B.C., Egyptian ascendancy. 
1250 B.C., Greek epoch. 
1000 B.C., Trojan crisis. 

750 B.C., Scythian invasion. 

500 B.C., Persian Monarchy. 

250 B.C., Alexandrian epoch. 

A.D. 0, Christian era. 



NUMEROLOGY 



185 



A.D. 250, The Huns. 

A.D. 500, Persian new era, 

A.D. 750, Byzantine Empire. 

A.D. 1000, Second Roman Empire. 

The Papacy. 
A.D. 1250, Chinese incursion. 
A.D. 1500, Ottoman Empire. 
A.D. 1750, Russian Empire. 
A.D. 2000, British Climacteric ? 

The Minor Key 

The following simple Kabalism of Numbers has 
been given for purposes of divination by means of 
names and dates. In this system — 
One denotes individuality and possible egotism, 

self-reliance, affirmation. 
Two — Relationship, psychic attraction, emotion- 
alism, sympath}' or antipath}^, doubt. 
Three — Expansion, increase, intellectual capacity, 

riches and success. 
Four — Realization, property, possessions, posi- 
tion and credit, materiality. 
Five — Reason, logic, ethics, travelling, commerce, 
j utility. 

Six — Co-operation, marriage, reciprocity, sym- 
pathy, play, art, music, dancing. 
Seven — Equilibrium, contracts, agreements, 

treaties, bargains, harmony or discord. 
Eight — Reconstruction, death, negation, decay, 
loss, extinction, going out. 
I Nine — Penetration, strife, energy, enterprise, 
I dividing, anger, keenness. 



186 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



^ A square of three, which gives nine compartments, 
is used for the purpose of location. Thus : — 



4 


9 


2 


3 


5 


7 


8 


1 


6 



The date of a person's birth being the 18th Jmie 
'79, the figures 18679 are marked, and the character- 
istics and fate are discerned b}^ these numbers. 
Thus we should read in this case : — 

" You have much self-confidence, but your 
aspirations and expectations do not turn out to 
your satisfaction. You feel to be worthy of a 
better fate than falls to your lot. Beware lest 
pride goes before a fall. You feel most confident 
when least secure. Yet you ma}^ have success 
in work that others have abandoned as useles> 
You have sympathy, and are especially responsive 
to praise and sensitive to blame. You will most 
probably marry. The fine arts and social life have 
their attractions for you. You have a fine sense 
of value and Avill be able to estimate the cost ot 
things. You would make a good contractor, or 
negotiator. You have some penetration and 
enterprise; you are keen, alert, and energetic." 

And of course much more that is true could be 
said if the individual environment were known. 

It is to be observed that the century is not 
included, as all who are born therein have this in 



NUMEROLOCxY 



187 



common. Moreover, the figures of the year 7 and 
give only a tendency in the third degree, which 
may be considered weak. The figures of the month 
(June = 6) are more particular, and have a secondary 
degree of efficacy; while the day of the month 
becomes of primary or particular significance. It 
here stands for " egotism and self-reliance," mth 
"undoing." Finally, in order to gain the bearing of 
the whole Kabalism, we must add together the 
figures 18679 = 31 = 4, always reducing them to 
the unit value. We then find that the nature is a 
practical one, " seeking material realization, yet one 
who may easily grasp the shadow and lose the sub- 
stance." The sum of the figures composing the date 
will reinforce am' number of the same value which 
is in the date, so that a secondary or tertiary com- 
prised in the month or year will thus become a 
primar}'. As in the date 29th January, 1864 = 
29164 = 22 = 4, we find that there is a practical 
and material side to the character which seeks 
[Concrete realization of its projects; the number 4 
being in the sum as well as in the jes.T of the 
date. 

In dealing with inanimate objects or the brute 
creation (as ships, horses, etc.) which have names 
we convert the letters into numbers and take 
the sum of them, thence deriving our prognostic 
concerning them. But this is an art attended with 
some difficulties and many pitfalls, which it may not 
be convenient to enumerate. 



188 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

The Secret Progression 




Some years ago I published a curious Kabala 
known as " The Secret Progression," by which 
numbers in lotteries and other affairs apparenth 
governed by chance might by dihgence be discovered. 
There was at one time a circle of occultists who 
had their head-quarters at a certain place in Italy. 
Prominent among the members of this fraternity 
was Giuseppe Balsamo, Comte di Cagliostro, whos. 
wealth (acquired none knew how) not less than \n> 
learning, was the marvel of all with whom he had 
relations. For a short time he dazzled the Court 
of Europe, and disappeared with the suddenness ot 
a meteor. It has been said that he died in prison 
by poisoning, but I am not now concerned with his 
history. He was at all events a past master in the 
magic of Numbers, as is evident from the fact that 
on three separate occasions he gave Madame de la 
Motte the winning number in the Paris lotteries. 

By the Kabala of the Secret Progression it is 
possible, when a series of numbers is known, to 
determine the next. Some years ago a well-known 
weekly publication instituted a Birth Competition 
which was to predict the number of births in 36 
large towns of Great Britain during a particular 
week, the births during the corresponding week 
for five successive years being given. 

Considering this to be a good opportunity of 
testing the method of the Illuminati, I accordingly 
took the problem in hand. 



NUMEROLOGY 



189 



The births in the 36 towns during the specified 
week in the preceding five years totalled as follows: — 



Year 


Il894 


1895 


1896 


1897 


1898 


1899 


Births 


|6351 


6906 


6017 


6715 


6430'' ? 



Taking the highest and lowest of these totals, 
6906 and 6017, and allowing a good margin, we may 
expect to find the required number between 6000 
and 7000. We now proceed to find the key number. 



1. By the Minor Differential. 

1894- 6351 15 , 

1895- 6906 = 21 ( ~ ^ J = 13 

1896- 6017 = 14 ( + 3 } = 12 

1897- 6715 = 19^, ~ ^ J 11 

1898- 6430 = 13 { + } = 10 

1899- ? ^ 17 ^ ~" . 

The series is found by adding together the integers 
of each given number, thus : 6351 = 6+ 3 + 5+1 
= 15. It will be seen that the result gives 13, 12, 11 
10, a numerical series whose intervals are equal. 
We therefore require a number whose integers 
added = 17. 

2. By the Minor Additive. 

1894- 6351 = 15 ) 

1895- 6906 = 21 { } 71 

1896- 6017 = 14 {^^} 68 

1897- 6715 = 19 (^^1 65 

1898- 6430 = 13 I I 62 

1899- ? = 17 ^ 



190 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

Here also the intervals are equal in the final 
series. We therefore are confirmed in the know- 
ledge that the required number belongs to th 
series of 17. 



3. By the Major Differential. 



1894- 


6351 














- 555 = 


15 


6 


u 


1895- 


6906 


-f 889 = 


25 = 


7 , 


1896- 


6017 








12 






- 698 = 


23 = 


5 


11 


1897- 


6715 


+ 285 = 


15 = 


6; 


1898- 


6430 


- ? 


•? ^ 


4 


10 


1899- 


9 











Again the intervals are made equal by the sup- 
position of the figure 4. The number required, 
therefore, is one which, when 6430 is taken from if 
leaves a number whose integers = 4, 13, 22, or 31 — - 



4. By the Major Additive. 



1894- 


6351 ^ 












13,257 


18 = 


9 




1895- 


6906 1 
6017 1 








In 




12,923 = 


17 = 


8 




1896- 








iu 




12,732 = 


15 = 






1897- 


6715^ 
6430 J 












13,145 


14 = 






1898- 










1899- 




? ^ 


12 =^ 







NUMEROLOGY 



191 



The series 17, 14, 11, 8 shows equal intervais. 
The required number, therefore, is one which, added 
bo 6430, gives a sum whose figures add to 12, 

Consequently, we now know that the number 
is one whose integers add to 17; and that it is a 
number which, being added to 6430, yields a sum 
^vhose figures add to 12. 

Having ascertained these facts concerning the 
hidden or unknown number, the task is not now a 
difficult one to anybody accustomed to handling 
Hgures. 

Between 6000 and 7000 there are only 70 numbers 
whose integers add to 17. 

Between 6000 and 7000 there are only 31 num- 
bers whose figures amount to 12. 

Of these 31 numbers there are only 14 numbers 
whose difference of 6430 is a number w^hose figures 
add to 13. 

Finally, there are onl}^ 7 numbers within these 
[imits which exacth' satisfy all the conditions of the 
Kabala of the Secret Progression. These are : 
6470, 6632, 6641, 6650, 6731, 6740, and 6830. 
By the third process the Major Differential we found 
the number to be greater than 6430, so that the field 
oi inquiry was limited to numbers between 6430 
ind 7000. We have found seven numbers which 
ire capable of satisfying aU the conditions imposed 
by the different processes, and since the master-key 
is not to be di\nilged w^e must be content with a 
statement which reduces the possible number of 
chances from 1000 to 7 only. 



192 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 'iPI 



The Registrar-General returned the number 6731 
A moment's study will show how exactly it fits al 
the requirements of the several processes. 

1. Minor Differential. — 6731 = 17, which com 
pared with 13 shows the latter jnelds 4, whicl 
added to 6 = 10. 

2. Minor Additive. — 6731 = 17, which added tcj 
13 = 30, which added to 32 62. 

3. Major Differential. — If from 6731 we take 6430 
we have 301, which = 4. 

4. Major Additive.— QIU added to 6430 = 1346L 
which yields a unit value of 12, which equals 3, 
which added to 5 gives 8. 

With this singular and unique Kabalism I ma\ 
now bring the subject of Numerology to a do- 
and end the first section of my study of the Occult ^ 
Sciences. 



HYPNOTISM AND MESMERISM 

I It will no doubt be questioned whether either 
Hypnotism or Mesmerism forms any legitimate part 
'oi Occultism, and indeed I have put the question 
to myself before finally deciding to include them. 
My reason for so doing is that formerly the whole 
of the magnetic art, then known as " Fascination" 
and the "Laying on of Hands," was an essential 
factor in the curriculum of the thaumaturgist. 
Scripture references to the transmission of vital 
energy to those sick or dying, or even dead to all 
appearances, are numerous and well known. The 
use of oil as a medium for the conveyance and 
retention of the vital or magnetic energy is also 
noticed and is commonly in use in India and other 
parts of the Orient at this day. 

Mesmerism may be distinguished in a popular 
manner from Hypnotism in that it presumes the 
existence of an effluvium w^hich is in the nature 
of a subtle essence capable of being transmitted 
from one body to another under the direction of 
the Will. Paracelsus calls it the Archeus or Liquor 
Vitse. " The Archeus is an essence," he says, 
" which is distributed equally in all parts of the 
body if the latter is in a healthy condition; it is 
the invisible nutriment from which the body draws 

193 



194 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



its strength, and the qualities of each of its parts 
correspond to the nature of the physical parts 
which contain it. . . . The Archeus is of a 
magnetic nature and attracts or repels other forces 
belonging to the same plane. The individual 
power of resistance will determine how far a man i 
subject to astral influences. The vital force is not 
enclosed in man but radiates around him like a 
luminous sphere, and may be made to act at a 
distance. In those semi-material rays the imagina- 
tion may produce healthy or morbid effects, f- 
may poison the essence and cause diseases, or i 
may purify it after it has been made impure and 
so restore the health. ... If we separate the 
vital force from the physical form, the latter will 
die and putrefy ; and by impregnating a dying 
body with vitality, it may be made to live again." 

Paracelsus further states that diseases may be 
transmitted from one person to another, or from 
man to animal, or animal to plant, by means of the 
magnetic emanations, and Ave have ocular demon- 
stration that this is a belief firmly held by those 
nations of the East among whom it is practised 
The story of the Gadarene swine is in line with oiii 
own experience of the epidemic of crime which 
follows upon the death of a renowned criminal 

If a person dies," says Paracelsus, " and seriousl 
desires that another should die with him, his imagina- 
tion may create a force that may draw a menstruum 
from the dead body to form a corpus, and it may be 
projected b,y the impulse given to it by the thought 
of the dying person toward that other so that he 



HYPNOTISM AND MESMERISM 195 

may also die. Such especially may be the case 
with a woman dying of puerperal fever, for if such 
should desire that the whole world might die with 
her, an epidemic may be the consequence of her 
poisoned imagination." 

The suggestion in this case has regard to the known 
contagious influence of the corpse of a woman dying 
of puerperal fever. The point, however, is that 
the will of the dying person is capable of distributing 
such contagion. 

I have cited these opinions in order to show that 
Mesmerism, of which Paracelsus was undoubtedly 
the earliest known European exponent, has little 
in common with the beliefs and practice of the 
Hypnotists. 

The Mesmerists, or those who believe in the 
transmission of animal magnetism, whether we 
regard it as the Archeus of Paracelsus or the 
Odyle of Reichenbach, affirm that the emanation 
is most active through certain channels — e. g. the 
eyes, the lips, and the finger-tips. 

They also state that certain natural bodies, such 
as oil and water, are capable of holding the magnet- 
ism better than others; while vinegar is capable 
of augmenting the efflux and thus of increasing 
the transmission. Volatile spirits are, on the 
contrary, completely destructive of the magnetic 
transmission and storage. Earth and clay are 
excellent storage mediums, or mumia as Paracelsus 
would call them. 

There is nothing smgular in this, if we reflect 
that all the forces of nature of which we have any 

2 



196 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

knowledge require certain media through which to 
operate. Electrical energy, for example, cannot be 
conveyed through a length of rope or wood, but 
only through a natural conductor of electricity, 
such as steel or copper. When it is said that Jesus 
spat upon the ground and made clay and anointed 
the eyes of the man who was blind from birth, 
we see that use was made of the natural odylic 
power of the saliva, and the powerful storage medium 
of clay or earth. The rest is explained by the power- 
ful will of the magician as expressed completely 
and decisively in the single exclamation Ephphatha ! 

The laying on of hands for the cure of sickness 
is one phase of Mesmerism or Animal Magnetism 
of which there is abundant evidence and which 
conclusively proves the existence of the magnetic 
fluid. Touching for king's-evil or scrofula was in 
use among our own kings until Rome discounten- 
anced any delegation of its powers. " Le Roy te 
touche, Dieu te guerys " (The King touches thee 
God heals thee) had brought new life to thousands 
before the Divine right of kings was assailed. 

Dr. James Esdaile, at one time the Presidency 
Surgeon at Calcutta, has left us a very remarkable | 
series of cases which prove the surpassing value of j 
Mesmerism in the medical and surgical treatment 
of disease. His book on Natural and Mesmeric 
Clairvoyance is among the best upon this subject. 
Incidental^, he mentions two phenomena by which 
I think I may claim complete justification for the 
inclusion of this subject in a work upon magic. 

The first is the dislocation of the senses. Normal! \ 



HYPNOTISM AND MESMERISM 197 



each of the senses has its appropriate organ, as the 
eye, ear, nose, etc. They are not in themselves the 
only organs of the corresponding senses of sight, 
hearing, smell, etc., but have become specialized 
as such. This is shown by the fact that in 
natural and induced somnambulism, the whole 
sensorium may be transferred to the finger-tips or 
the pit of the stomach, or even the soles of the feet. 
Fredrika Wanner, better known as the Seeress of 
Prevorst, was a natural somnambulist, and in her 
trances was particularly sensitive to the presence 
of other persons, discriminating between them as 
painful or soothing to her. And on such occasions 
it was found that her eyes being closed, or the senses 
incapable of being affected by ordinary stimuli, 
she could see, hear, and even taste by means of the 
epigastric region. 

Prof. Dumas is quoted by Dr. Esdaile to the 
same effect : — 

"It is possible that, by a singular concourse 
of circumstances, certain organs become capable 
of exercising properties and fulfilling functions to 
which they have hitherto been strangers and which 
even belonged to different organs. If rare and 
extraordinary facts did not inspire distrust, I could 
allege the singular transference of the hearing and 
sight, which, abandoning their usual seat, have 
appeared to be transferred to the stomach — so that 
sounds and colours excited there the same sensations 
as are ordinarily conveyed through the ears and 
eyes. Five years ago a young woman from the 
department of Ardeche, who gave an example of a 



198 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



very strange phenomenon, came to Montpellier 
to consult the doctors for a hysteric affection 
attended with catalepsy. She referred all the sen- 
sations of sight, hearing and smell to the region 
of the stomach, the appropriate organs being 
insensible to the usual stimuh." 

The second phenomenon to which I would call 
attention is the transference of the senses. In the 
former cases we have the dislocation of the normal 
centres of sensation to the region of the sympathetic 
ganglion at the pit of the stomach, and now we 
may consider the marvellous fact of sensation being 
transferred from one person to another. 

Finding a specially sensitive subject in the person 
of Babu Lali Mohun Mitra, a young Hindu of twenty- 
two years. Dr. Esdaile, after curing him of a loath- 
some disease for which he had come to the hospital, 
subjected him to some experimental development. 
He would place his watch in Mitra's hand and with 
a few passes would render the whole arm so rigid 
that under no bribe or persuasion or threat could 
the young man stir a finger to loose the watch 
as he was bidden. " Seeing this man's extreme 
sensibility, I thought it probable,'' says Esdaile, 
" that he might exhibit community of taste with 
his mesmerizer, and here is the result of the first 
experiment made upon him. He had never heard 
of such a thing nor had I even tried it before. 

" One day that the Babu came to the hospital 
to pay his respects after getting well, I took him 
into a side room and, mesmerizing him till he could 
not open his eyes, I went out and desired the native 



HYPNOTISM AND MESMERISM 199 



assistant-surgeon to procure me some salt, a slice 
of lemon, a piece of gentian, and some brandy, and 
to give them to me in any order he pleased when T 
opened my mouth. We returned, and, blindfolding 
Lali Mohun, I took hold of both his hands, and 
opening my mouth had a slice of half-rotten lime- 
fruit put into it by my assistant. Having showed 

, it, I asked, ' Do you taste anything ? ' ' Yes ; I 
taste a nasty old lime,' and he made wry faces in 

! correspondence. He was equally correct with all 
the other substances, calling the gentian by its 
native name, cheretea; and when I tasted the brandy 
he called it shrdb (the general name for wine and 
spirits); being asked what kind, he said: 'What 
I used to drink — brandy.' " 

It should here be remarked that Dr. Esdaile 
had cured this man of confirmed brandy-drinking 
as well as of his terrible disease. As to the local 
rigidity of the arm of the patient who otherwise 
had full and perfect control of his faculties, it should 
be remarked that the mesmerizer can not only 
saturate his patient with his own nervous fluid, 
but also determine the energy to various parts of 
the body so as to place them in effect beyond the 
patient's control. In similar manner local anaesthe- 
sia or insensibility can be produced at the will of 
the operator. When the volition can no longer 
act upon a part of the body, it is found that its 
sensibility is at the same time inhibited, which proves 
that volition and sensation are consentaneous. 
When voluntary action is restored, sensation is. 
simultaneously developed in the part. 



200 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



The nervous fluid not only follows the direction 
of the will, but is moreover impressed with our 
individuality, both physical and mental. It bear^ 
the signature of our thought, it carries the healthy 
or diseased tendencies of our body, it is moved by 
our will and coloured by our desires and passions. 
The dictum of Lord Bacon : " The human mind 
can be placed in communication with other mind> 
and transmit their impressions," is not inclusiv* 
enough to cover the phenomena of statuvolisny 
animal magnetism, electro-biology, mesmerism, oi 
by whatsoever name we may indicate the use of 
this mysterious agent. It is a force that can be set 
in motion at any time and made to operate at any 
distance apart from any suggestion of the effects 
it is required to produce. Herein it differs entirely 1 
from the " hypnotic suggestion " of the medical 
schools and the " auto-suggestion " which the | 
critical writers wholly unskilled in the knowledge 
of Occultism bring to bear as explanation of even 
fulfilled prediction, every thaumaturgic effect, every 
case of healing which is in distinction from the known 
and approved methods, the clinic and pharmacy, 
of the medical profession. 

On the question of animal magnetism, either as a 
psj^chological or a therapeutic agent, the Occultist 
wdll always prefer the experience of such men as 
Esdaile, Gregory, and Baron Du Potet to the un- 
instructed opinions of the critic, however skilful 
he may be in his own field of research or work. 

Baron Du Potet, in his Manual de VEtudiant 
Magnetiseur, says : " Nature herself discovered the 



HYPNOTISM AND MESMERISM 201 



secret to me. And how ? By producing before 
my own eyes, without waiting for me to search for 
them, indisputable facts of sorcery and magic. 
And what is it determines these sudden impulses, 
these raving epidemics, antipathies and cries, the 
convulsions that one can make durable ? What if 
not the very principle we employ, the agent so 
thoroughly well known to the ancients ? What you 
call nervous fluid or magnetism the men of old called 
occult force, the power of the soul, subjection, 
magic ! An element existing in nature, unknown 
to most men, gets hold of a person and withers and 
breaks him down as the raging hurricane does the 
bulrush. It scatters men far apart, it strikes them 
in a thousand places at the same time without their 
perceiving the invisible foe or being able to protect 
themselves. But that this element should choose 
friends and elect favourites, obey their thoughts, 
answer to the human voice and understand the 
meaning of traced signs, that is what people cannot 
realize and what their reason rejects, and that is 
what I saw; and I say it here most emphatically 
that for me it is a truth and a fact demonstrated 
for ever ! " 

I And this is a phase of Animal Magnetism that 
has been repeatedly offered as the only intelligible 
explanation of the phenomena of sorcery and as 
repeatedly rejected by the schools that have no 
knowledge either of the facts or the agent which 
alone is capable of explaining them. 

According to the experience of mesmerists, the 
magnetizer can communicate his fluid to a variety of 



202 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



objects, which thus become conductors or agents of 
his action to all persons with whom he is in magnetic 
relations. These agents are water, oil, woollen and 
cotton materials, trees, etc. Charles Dickens found 
a means of magnetizing water by means of pieces of 
sugar which had been subjected to magnetization, 
which were then readily distributed among th 
old country folk in Kent. 

Magnetized water is one of the most powerful 
agents that can be employed, inasmuch as it i 
conveyed at once to the stomach and thence di> 
tributed throughout the system, acting upon tin 
circulation and the digestion, taking in turn, accord- 
ing to tlie immediate needs of the body, the place 
of anodyne, diaphoretic, prophylactic and purgative. 
An agent of such universal utility is necessarily 
not thought very highly of by those whose busines 
it is to scare Nature into obedience by cryptic pre- 
scriptions and unnatural concoctions. Given normal 
health and a desire to heal the sufferer, you ma . 
take a vessel of water, and having thoroughly 
cleansed the hands, dip them in vinegar. Shake 
off the superfluous moisture by flicking the hands 
violent^ towards the ground. Continue so to 
until the finger-tips tingle, with a slight streaming 
sensation down the forearm and hand. 

Now take a clean glass and pour into it some fresh 
cold water, which must not have been boiled or 
heated previously. Place the glass upon the left 
hand with the fingers closed around it to stead}- 
it, and with the right hand make passes from above 
the glass downwards for a score of strokes or more. 



HYPNOTISM AND MESMERISM 203 



'hen bunch the finger-tips above the mouth of the 
ilass, bringing them almost in contact with the 
/ater, and impregnate it with the nervous fluid by 
i, sustained effort of the will to that effect, letting 
he mind dwell the while upon the result you 
tould obtain. A glass of water may thus be 
reated in from one to two minutes. Thus given 
the patient it immediately goes to work and 
)roduces the most remarkable results without in 
jiy way complicating matters, as may be readily 
lone b}^ the administering of improper drugs, and 
vithout having any deleterious reaction, even when 
ised as a soporific. 

That such an agent, so inoffensive, so natural 
md, above all, so efficacious and sure, should have 
'scaped the recognition of medical men appears 
|;o me to be inexplicable, except on the grounds of 
complete ignorance of its properties and action. 
[ do not pretend to explain by what magical process 
:he mind of man is capable of acting upon a glass 
3f water to the end that it becomes either a powerful 
istringent or a laxative, or an anodyne, or a stimu- 
ant. The chemical nature of the water remains 
imchanged. It is still a mechanical compound of 
H.,0. But something has happened, and this 
something the will of man can determine while 
yet his intellect fails to understand. 

\Vhat I am now saying is not a tradition or an 
effort of the imagination. It is the record of my 
own personal experience.. Suggestion ? How does 
one suggest purgation to a babe that is teething, or 
peaceful sleep to one delirious ? The suggestion, 



204 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

if there is one, is directed, not to the mind of th' 
patient, but to Nature herself , and the suggestion o 
an intent will is equivalent to a command. Id tbj 
use of magnetized water as a purgative, no coliJ 
pains are felt either during or after the action' 
As an anodyne it leaves no sense of depression o 
lassitude behind it; while as a tonic it is not accomii 
panied by any rise of temperature nor followed b^" 
the slightest constipation. 

A magnetic subject will readily distinguish magi 
netized water from water that has not been so treated 
and I have known persons who could normally 
distinguish between them, though at first I wa 
unwilling to believe this and only convinced mysel 
of it after trying a number of tricks to discovei 
if there were a possibility of suggestion or fancy 
But all I discovered was the fact that in some re- 
markable way magnetic water could be distinguishec 
by its taste. 

But whatever agent we make use of for the pur- 
pose of conveying the nervous or vital fluid, it haj| 
been thought, even by those who practise magnetism 
that rapport with the patient must first have beer 
established. This, however, is not the case; thougt 
undoubtedly it is more certain in its action wher 
magnetization by contact has preceded the use oi| 
an agent. The agent is the means of continuing 
magnetization, and especially of attacking diseas 
that are internal and deep-seated and not merel^^ 
nervous or superficial. But for all that, there isj 
no reason whatsoever why magnetization should 
not be begun by means of a suitable agent. Con- 




HYPNOTISM AND MESMERISM 205 



ictual magnetism is not generally effective at once, 
lut becomes so by persistence, the action being 
umulative. So if water or any other agent is per- 
isted with, it will bring about the desired effect. Of 
his I am quite certain, since I have treated persons 
t a distance by this means alone, never having set 
yes upon them. Yet so wonderful is the sympathy 
xisting throughout Nature, that I have been 
iresently conscious of changes taking place in my 
iwn body, of pains and sickness, which had no 
ither origui than the subtle connection of sympathy 
►etween my subject and myself via the agent I had 
mployed. I know of persons who are capable of 
ommunicating their sensations at a great distance 
one with whom they are in close sympathy, 
hough nothing in the nature of thought trans- 
erence is observable between them. With others 
here is ready communication of thought or of 
uental images but no community of sensation. 

Hypnotism proposes to secure the same results 
IS magnetization by mechanically-induced trance 
lupplemented by suggestion. But while this process 
ends itself peculiarly to the production of phe- 
lomena, and is extremely useful for experimental 
3urposes and psychic research, it cannot pretend 
:o have the same therapeutic value as magnetization, 
nasmuch as it does nothing to reinforce nature or to 
supplement depleted vitality. Where insensibility 
is the effect aimed at it is equally useful, and as in all 
induced somnambulism the automatic and subcon- 
scious self is rendered alert and active, very valuable 
results may be produced by hypnotic suggestion. 



206 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

If, however, you induce the hypnotic sleep b 
any of the usual methods and then stand asid 
while a phonographic record film is set in actioi 
to voice the number of original " suggestions," th 
effect will surprise many into an entirely ne^ 
view of the matter, and those who do not no^ 
believe that the personal factor is at all considerabl' 
will come to the conclusion that it is the only fac; 
which counts for anything in the whole proce 
The complete insensibility to written or spokei 
instructions, other than those which pass througl 
the mind of the magnetizer, is in itself a suggestio ' 
which the upholders of the non-magnetic posit i 
would do well to ponder. I prefer, however, i 
leave the schools of the Salpetriere and Nancy t 
thresh out the question to its natural and inevitabll 
conclusion. 

Deleuze, who followed the teaching of Puyseguij 
of Mesmer, Van Helmont and Paracelsus, has som 
excellent admonitions to those anxious to pract.^ 
Animal Magnetism, which may very suitably bl 
quoted in conclusion : — 

" Persons who follow this subject may be dividefl 
into two classes. 

" The first class comprehends those who, haviiijj 
recognized in themselves the faculty of doing goa 
by magnetism, or at least hoping to succeed therein! 
wish to make use of it in their families, or amon| 
their friends, or with some poor patients, but who, 
having duties to fulfil or business to follow, do noj 
magnetize except in circumstances where it appearil 
to them necessary, without seeking publicity, withou 



HYPNOTISM AND MESMERISM 207 



iny motive but that of charity, without any other aim 
han that of curing or reUeving suffering humanity, 
i " The second class is composed of men who, 
taving leisure, wish to join in the practice of magnet- 
ic, the study of the phenomena it exhibits, to enter 
irgely into it, to establish treatments for taking 
are of several patients at a time, to form pupils 
apable of aiding them, to have somnambulists 
j/ho may enlighten them to examine closely, compare 
lid arrange the phenomena, in such a way as to 
stablish a regular code of laws whose principles 
aay be certain, and whose consequences, extending 
iaily, may lead to new applications. 
" This class is separated from the preceding by 
great number of degrees which must be successively 
Qounted before one can find oneself situated where 
le can command a more extensive horizon. I 
herefore advise those of the former class not to 
hink of passing beyond their limits unless they 
.re masters of their own time and have some pre- 
iminary knowledge. Their lot is very good; they 
-re strangers to the vanities and inquietudes which 
itend new attempts, to the uncertainty which 
iprings from the conflict of opinions and of various 
,)oints of view under which things are presented to 
lis; they taste without mixture or distraction the 
,atisfaction of doing good. ... As to the 
)ersons who desire to belong to the second class, I 
idvise them to consider at first the extent of the 
rareer they will have to run. It is better not to 
fnter it than to stop in the midst of their enterprise, 
what pertains to practice, a prudent simplicity is 



208 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

preferable to science. In what relates to theory, 
imperfect notions expose us to dangerous errors. 
The labourer who cultivates his farm as his fathers 
did before him, collects every year the price of 
his labours. Should he give way to an inclination 
to pursue experimental methods, he may be ruined 
before he is enlightened by his own experience." 

Up to a point this is very good advice, but it i- 
doubtful whether any amount of advice, however 
sound, will deter men from making experimeiV 
and sacrificing both life and fortune to the satisfa^ 
tion of that desire for knowledge which is inherent 
in ever}^ active and well-developed mind. A.^ 
between the curative and experimental practice ol. 
Mesmerism and Hypnotism there can be httkj 
doubt that Mesmerism as understood by its best 
exponents is more adapted to the curative method, 
while Hypnotism is peculiarly adapted to the 
development of experimental psychology. As tcl 
which branch of the subject has the greater clain 
to our consideration, is a matter not so easil}j 
answered, seeing that a profound knowledge olj 
psychology is very necessary to the practice oi 
even curative magnetism, and the more we knoT» 
of the psychic origin of disease the better w( 
shall be equipped to successfully deal with morbici 
conditions as they arise. 

Method of Magnetizing 
These brief notes on the subject will hardly b( 
complete without some practical instruction. Tli« 
following method of inducing the mesmeric slee| 



HYPNOTISM AND MESMERISM 209 



has been found easy and reliable. If the patient is 
able to sit up, place him in a comfortable chair with 
fairly upright support at the back. Take a seat 
opposite to him. Take hold of his thumbs and 
bring your own thumbs into the palms of his hands 
iwith a gentle pressure. Now engage his attention, 
and fix your eyes steadily on his for five minutes. 
Allow him to close his eyes should they tire mean- 
while. At the end of five minutes let his hands 
fall loosely into his lap, rise to your feet and place 
your hands firmly on his shoulders for a few moments. 
Next raise your hands above his head and make 
passes downwards along the arms as far as the 
knees. Do this for five minutes. Now take his 
right hand in your left, as at first, and with your 
right make rapid but slight shampoo strokes over 
the eyes. These strokes are made with the hand 
and forearm working loosely from the elbow, and 
require practice; the palm of the hand barely 
touches the closed eyelids. At the end of half a 
minute, when you will have made upwards of 200 
strokes, give a slight jerk to the right arm of the 
patient with your left, and press with the right 
thumb between his eyes, the fingers of your right 
resting on the top of his head. 

\ If the patient has surrendered to^his treatment 
'it will be found that the arm, if lifted, will fall back 
when loosed as a dead weight. The eyelid being 
raised, the pupil of the eye will be found to have 
turned upwards and inwards to the root of the nose. 
The breathing wiU be soft and regular, and a mild 

warmth and moisture will pervade the skin. 

p 



210 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



That will suffice for the first sitting. The patient 
may be roused by a few sidelong passes right and 
left over the eyes, and by blowing into them or 
wafting a fan over the eyes. A few upward passes 
must then be made from the knees to the shoulders, 
and the patient invited to stand up and thoroughly 
shake off the influence. 

The next day at the same time and "place (this is 
important) proceed as before. It will be found that 
premonitory s3^mptoms of the magnetic sleep ^^ill 
soon be developed. The patient yawns, shiver 
and flushes in turn as if hot and cold water -wert 
running down his back ; there are spasmodic twitches 
of the arms and legs, the latter kicking out forcibly 
from time to time. When these symptoms appear 
the magnetic sleep rapidty deepens and fascination ' 
or rigid catalepsy may be induced. For curative 
purposes it is not necessary that the cataleptic 
stage should be reached, for once the magnetic sleep 
is obtained, the patient is not only susceptible to 
curative agency but also is capable of localizing the 
complaint and prescribing a method of treatment 
which the magnetizer should do all in his power 
to carry out. For surgical purposes, however, 
catalepsy and complete insensibility are essential, 
but my readers wdll hardly require further instnic 
tion under this head than is to be found in the w^ork^ 
by Dr. James Esdaile and others who have success- 
fully applied magnetism to clinical practice. 

* The state in which the phenomenal side of the automatic 
faculty is conspicuously displayed. 



PART II 



THE OCCULT ARTS 

ON THE ART OF DIVINATION AND THE USE 
OF THE AUTOMATIC FACULTY— THE SUB- 
CONSCIOUS INTELLIGENCE—CLAIRVOY- 
ANCl^, PSYCHOMETRY, DREAMS, ETC. 
TO WHICH IS APPENDED AN 
ESSAY ON ALCHEMY 



P 2 



CHAPTER I 



DIVINATION 

In the succeeding sections of this work I intend 
to deal with that aspect of the subject of Occultism 
which depends for its evidence on the exercise of the 
mediumistic or divinatory faculty. What has been 
said in Part I has relation to the exercise of a pur- 
posive faculty, guided by intelligence and experience. 
It represents Determinism in its application to the 
hidden laws of Nature. We are now, however, 
concerned with the automatic faculty, the intuitive 
and divinatory process of the human mind. Many 
of the methods by which the automatic faculty 
finds expression are allied to the purposive methods 
of the Occult arts. Cartomancy or divination by 
cards, for instance, can only be effected after a 
preliminary understanding of the meanings' attach- 
ing to the cards , and this is in no sense an automatic 
or unconscious process, but a voluntary and empirical 
one. We do not begin to employ the automatic 
faculty until we shuffle the cards with a view to 
ascertain the unknown elements. Even the dis- 
position of the cards for this purpose is a purely 
voluntary empiricism. It controls our interpreta- 

213 



214 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



tion and our prognostics. The construction of the 
cards, the meanings attached to them, and the 
method of laying them out for a divination are all 
prejudicial elements of the art. The automatic 
faculty triumphs over these limitations in the simple 
act of " shuffling" — and therein lies the whole secret 
of Nature. Let us suppose for a moment that we 
decide upon a certain combination of cards falling 
together that they shall signify Death. The odds 
against these cards coming up in the required order 
and combination are thousands to one on any occa- 
sion. That they do occasionally turn up is not, 
however, so remarkable as that, whenever they do, 
a death immediately follows, and the faculty of the 
Cartomante lies in predicting to whom that judgment 
is determined. 

In seership or scrying by means of the crystal, 
etc., a distinction exists between the purely involun- 
tary or passive use of the faculty of clairvoj^ance 
and that in which media are used. Moreover, 
some passives see directly and describe things as 
they actually are or will be at the time indicated, 
while others do not see otherwise than by symbols 
which require rational interpretation. 

In Geomancy also the automatic faculty is directed 
by definite methods and is supplemented by the use 
of the rational faculty in the process of interpreta- 
tion. Marks made haphazard in the sand or upon 
a piece of paper have no meaning for those who are 
ignorant of geomantic symbolism, so that inasmuch 
as the symbols gain their meaning by the intention 



DIVINATION 



215 



of the mind, there is a consent between the rational 
and the instinctual faculties in man. It is by reason 
of this consent in nature that the methods of 
divination we are about to consider are rendered 
possible. 

Nevertheless, it is not possible to apply any 
dogmatism or arbitrary methods to the interpreta- 
tion of s3rmbols. We cannot, for instance, determine 
that a flight of two crows is a symbol of death and 
one of seven crows a marriage, and straightway 
go forth to observe if death or marriage is our 
immediate fate. A symbol is such by reason of its 
analogy and correspondence with certain principles 
in nature which are reflected in our minds. Thus 
we may speak of the universe as a symbol of the 
Deity, and of man as a symbol of the universe 
(which indeed was anciently depicted as the Grand 
Man, Adam Kadmon, etc.), and these are not arbi- 
trary relations but have their origin in a natural 
correspondence which exists quite apart from our 
recognition of it. The symbol is the means by which 
we express our recognition of that relationship. 
Figures are primarily symbolical; if we use them 
to denote quantities it is a mere convention. Every 
material form is a symbol of the forces which 
generated it. 

When we come to the consideration of the auto- 
matic faculty, we have to suppose a superior degree 
of intimacy between the soul of Nature and that 
of the individual in whom the divinatory faculty is 
active. It is undoubtedly a fact that the more 



216 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



practical the individual may be the less intimate are 
his relations with that subconscious or submerged 
part of his nature which is related to the Universal 
Soul. 

Individual consciousness cannot actively engage 
in that which is external and that which is internal 
at one and the same time, except the person be in 
a state which is altogether abnormal. The normal 
mind is active in the waking consciousness during 
the day and active in the sleeping consciousness 
during the night. The waking consciousness is 
otherwise known as the attentive mind, and it is 
by the depolarization of this that sleep is induced. 
In certain phases of hypnosis both aspects of the 
mind may be simultaneously active in part, and the 
same phenomenon is observed in somnambulism. 

The following diagrams illustrate (1) the normal 
waking consciousness, (2) the normal sleeping 
consciousness, (3) the hypnotic or somnambuHc 
semi-consciousness, and (4) permanent dislocation 
of the mental axis in cases of insanity : — 



/ 2. 3 ^ 




The faculty of self-depolarization and of diving 
down into the region of the submerged consciousness 
appears to be naturally developed in the genuine 



DIVINATION 



217 



medium and the diviner. Others may induce this 
faculty by the use of suitable media such as the 
hypnotic disc, the crystal or " the magic mirror." 
In others, again, it is induced only by hypnotic 
treatment. 

It is chiefly when in doubt that we make our 
appeal to it, and no Divination would be possible 
without its consent of function. 

It has been affirmed, with some show of reason, 
that the subconscious mind is the intelligence prin- 
ciple of the evolving human entity, and that it is 
the storehouse of the digested memories of all past 
incarnations. Others, however, affirm that it is 
nascent and rudimentary, the intelligence of the 
animal soul, in distinction from the rational prin- 
ciple of the human soul. But whatever we may 
argue concerning its status and functions in the 
human economy, we cannot deny that its powers 
transcend those of the supraliminal mind and that 
its association with the Soul of things is far more 
intimate. 

All divination, in effect, consists in the ability 
to bring into the region of our normal Avaking 
consciousness the things which lie hidden in the 
womb of Time. Some of the means by which this 
is effected will now be explained. 



CHAPTER II 



THE TAROT 

Divination by means of cards is a very ancient 
practice. It has been affirmed that the cards as 
we know them were invented for the purpose of 
beguihng the hours of a feeble-minded monarch. 
My only comment on this statement is that any 
king who believed the story would be very easily 
beguiled. I do not presume to say when cards were 
first used for gaming purposes, but the Tarot from 
which ordinary plajdng-cards are obviously derived, 
has a ver}^ ancient origin and moreover a very 
profound one. It is said that Hermes the Thrice || 
Great engraved the symbols of the Tarot upon 22 
laminae of gold. Various expositions of the Tarot 
have appeared from time to time, and aU agree in 
tracing a connection between the Twenty-two 
Major Keys and the letters of the Hebrew alphabet, 
beginning with Aleph. Several attempts have been 
made to associate the sjmibols of the Tarot with the 
Three Divine Principles, the Twelve Signs and the 
Seven Planets, but all attempts appear to me fanciful. 

In addition to the Twenty-two Major Keys 
there are fifty-six Minor Keys, and these are the same 

218 



THE TAROT 



219 



as the ordinary pack of 52 cards, with the exception 
that there are 4 knights, one of each suit, in addition 
to the knaves. These knights or heralds precede 
the ace of each suit. Of the 52 remaining cards 
we have four suits corresponding to the four seasons 
of the year — Cups, Batons, Deniers and Swords, 
otherwise called Hearts, Clubs, Diamonds and 
Spades. 

These are disposed as follows : — 

Spring . . . Diamonds 

Summer . . . Clubs 

Autumn . . . Hearts 

Winter . . . Spades 

The 52 cards correspond to the 52 weeks of the 
solar year. Several works have recently appeared 
setting forth the meanings of the Tarot cards and 
the methods of employing them. 

The Tarot Keys 

Various methods have been invented for the use 
of the Tarot cards, which those who desire to follow 
the art of divination b}^ this means w^ill find fully 
set forth in the works of Mons. Encausse (Papus), 
L'Abbe Constant (Eliphas Levi), and P. Christian, 
to which I would add the more recent work by 
Mr. A. E. Waite.i 

It will suffice if I here give the interpretation of 
the 22 Major Arcana, about which many ingenious 
theories have been circulated from time to time. 

^ The Key to the Tarot. London : Wm. Rider & Son, Ltd. 



220 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Every Arcanum has a threefold application 
having relation to the spirit, soul and body of man 
or the spiritual, intellectual and material worlds 
according to those Kabalists who have attempted 
an exposition. But I conceive a fourfold applica- 
tion, viz. the Spiritual, the Intellectual, the Psychic 
or Emotional and the Material or Physical; for the 
soul of man has two distinct aspects, the Nous, or 
mind, and the Antinous^ or passional principle; 
these being otherwise referred to as the Higher and 
Lower Self or the Human and Animal Man, the formo 
or Corpus being altogether material and of no active 
power save what it derives from the aninial soul^j 
investing it. On these lines the following interpre- 
tation may be found a useful key to the 



1. The Magician — represented b}^ a figure of a 
man holding a baton or wand over the three sym- 
bolical forms : the Cup, the Sword and the Denier. 
Around him are springing up roses and lilies. Over 
his head is a double nimbus in the form of the figure 
8. This is the magician, he who is master of the 
four worlds, the four elements and the four principles, 
who is capable of ^xercising the creative will — an 
adept. \ 



In the Spiritual world he stands for the Creative 



In the Intellectual world — The pure volition. 
Transformation; resolution; the ability to propound 
and to resolve a problem; to control the mind. 



Twenty-two Arcana 



Will. 




/ 



THE TAROT 



221 



In the Psychic world — Desire, which is the lower 
jxpression of the will ; the ability to generate and to 
iestroy; the control of the psychic forces and the 
nastery of the passions. 

In the Physical world — The control of the ele- 
ments; the mastery of physical forces; the power to 
acquire and to dispose of the material benefits of 
life. A great inventor. 

2. The High Priestess. — The figure of a woman 
seated, her head surmounted by a solar disc between 
horns. On her breast is a cross, and on her lap the 
Tora or Book of the Law, while at her feet is the 
lunar crescent. She is seated between the pillars 
of the temple called Jachin and Boaz — Security and 
Strength. It represents Isis^ Maya and the Virgin 
Mother of the world. This Arcanum is also called 
" The Door of the Hidden Sanctuary," 

In the Spiritual world it denotes the Divine Sophia, 
the creative imagination, the universal matrix, in 
and through which the supreme will is manifested. 

In the Intellectual world. — The Binary or reflection 
of Unity, the law of alternation, the pairs of opposites, 
positive and negative, etc. ; the reason, which weighs 
and balances, discerning by comparison of known 
things. 

In the Psychic world — Attraction and repulsion; 
the relations of the sexes; love and hatred. 

In the Physical world — Chemical affinity (as acids 
and alkalis); trade, commerce, interchange, barter. 
The woman related to the man for the furtherance 
of the ends of destiny. 



222 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



3. The Empress, otherwise Isis-Umnia. A female 
figure reclining. She holds the symbol of Power 
in her hand, and at her feet is the Ankh or sj^mbol 
of life — Venus. At her feet the corn springs full- 
eared and plentiful. She is surrounded by the 
beauties of nature. She represents Nature in 
association with the superior world, or Super-nature. 
She is the first product of the Supreme Will and 
Imagination, the progenj^ of Divine Wisdom and 
Love, and unites in herself intelligence and power 
in their highest manifestation. 

In the Spiritual world this Arcanum denotes 
the knowledge of the two worlds, the manifest and 
unmanifest; the past and future united in the 
eternal Now. 

In the Intellectual world — Ideation, the productive 
power of the mind, discrimination. 

In the Psychic world — The art of generation, 
fecundity, parentage. 

In the Physical world — The power of expansion, 
of multiplication; growth, development; wealth, 
plenty. 

4. The. Stone Cube, also known as the Emperor, 
A man of mature age seated upon the Chair of Initia- 
tion, the Masonic Cube. In his right hand is the 
sceptre of deific power, the ansated cross; and in his 
left the globe, the symbol of possession. 

In the Spiritual world this figure represents the 
realization, successively and continuously, of the 
Divine Virtues in oneself. 

In the Intellectual world — The realization of the 



THE TAROT 



223 



idea of related and dependent existence; affirmation; 
negation; discussion and solution. 

In the Psychic world — Attainment of happiness 
by the satisfaction of desires; the realization of the 
dual nature in male and female successions. 

In the Physical world — The realization of material 
effects. The reward of effort and correct judgment. 
The concrete. Foundation, establishment. 

5. The Hierophant, or Master of the Secrets. On 
his head is the Mitre, in his left hand the triple Cross. 
His right hand is uplifted with the sign of the Bene- 
diction. At his feet are the Keys of the Kingdom, 
which unlock the Gates of Life and Death, of Heaven 
and Hell. He is the symbol of the Grand Master. 

In the Spiritual world it denotes the Universal 
Law, by which the infinite manifestations of the 
Divine Being are regulated. 

In the Intellectual world — Religion, the connection 
between the Infinite and the Finite, the One and the 
many. 

In the Psychic world — The regulation of the 
passions ; self-control ; discipline. 

In the Physical world — Liberty within the limits 
of the law; direction and control of natural forces. 

6. The Two Ways, or The Lovers. Beneath the 
outspread hands of a flaming Cherub stand a man 
and woman, with the Tree of Life and the Tree of 
Knowledge upon either hand. Around the Tree of 
Knowledge the Serpent is coiled. 

In the Spiritual world this Arcanum symbolizes 
the knowledge of good and evil; the conscience. 



224 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Li the Intellectual world — The laws of Necessity 
and Liberty, of Duty and Privilege. 

In the Psychic world — The choice between denial 
or consent to the promptings of the lower nature. 
The determination of conduct. The experience of 
indulgence and abstention. Instinct. 

In the Physical world — The antagonism of natural 
forces; dissociation; disintegration; fractures, 
divorce, parting. 

7. The Chariot of Osiris. The figure of the Sun- 
God stands in a car drawn by two sphinxes, the 
one black and the other white. It represents the 
illumination of the lower nature by the Higher Self, 
of the earth by the solar orb, of the soul by the 
Spirit. 

In the Spiritual world — The sacred Septenary, 
the ascendency of Spirit over Matter; the penetra- 
tion of the mysteries by the light of Divine 
Intelligence. 

In the Intellectual world. The dispersal of doubt 
and error by the light of the intellect. Mental 
acumen. 

In the Psychic world. The dissemination of vital 
energy by magnetic vigour; geniality and warmth 
of nature ; vitality. 

In the Physical world — The gamut of the seven 
senses. Radiation; energy; force. The fulfilment 
of ambitions. 

8. Justice, or the Sword and Balance. Justice 
is seated and vested in the robes of the judge. 
In the left hand she holds the scales evenly 



THE TAROT 



225 



balanced, and in her right the sword uphfted. 
She represents the impartiality of Heaven, and pro- 
claims that God is no respecter of persons, that 
Heaven has no favourites, but always rewards 
virtue and punishes vice. 

In the Spiritual world — Divine justice. 

In the Intellectual world — Pure reason, correct 
judgment, comparison, equity. 

In the Psychic world — The attainment of peace 
and happiness by moderation, temperance and 
impartiality. 

In the Physical world — The balance of forces. 
The law of equilibrium. Attraction and repul- 
sion. Compensation. Sense of Value. Rewards 
and punishments. 

9. The Veiled Lamp, or the Hermit. The figure 
of a sage or philosopher carrying a lamp in one hand 
and a staff in the other. He represents the pilgrim 
soul, the seeker after truth. 

In the Spiritual world it denotes the realization 
of the Divine selfhood b}^ manifestation or 
embodiment. 

In the Intellectual world — Prudence and circum- 
spection, discrimination of true and false, of right 
and wrong; classification. 

In the Psychic world — Selection, choice, likes and 
dislikes; morality. 

In the Physical world — Molecular construction; 
science; discovery; distinction of caste; order and 
arrangement; carefulness, caution. 

10. The Sphinx, or Wheel of Fortune. The Rota 

Q 



226 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



or Wheel on which is seated the Sphinx upholding 
the sword. Around the wheel are the letters of 
the law as defined in the Tarot, and the four fixed 
signs of the Zodiac, the man, lion, bull and eagle. 
It represents the law of correlated succession. 

In the Spiritual world — The Law of Karma; 
spiritual cause and effect; spiritual selection. 

In the Intellectual world — The rational faculty; 
mduction and deduction ; connectedness ; perception 
of relativity and time intervals, progression. 

In the Psychic world — The regulation of the 
emotions and passions and the application of the 
psychic forces by the moral law. Regime, training, 
orderhness. 

In the Physical world — The law of action and 
reaction; good and bad fortune; the cyclic law 
of events; periodicity; rise and fall; revolution; 
circulation. 

N.B. — This symbol is that of the aspirant to 
Occult Initiation. The symbols of the man, bull, 
lion, and eagle or serpent denote the four maxims : 
Know, Will, Dare, Keep silent, which are imposed 
on all neophytes. These are the keys to the attain- 
ment of power. 

11. The Muzzled Lion, or Strength. A woman 
closing the mouth of a lion by a strength which 
demands no effort. 

In the Spiritual world — The omnipotent. 

In the Intellectual world — Moral and intellectual 
force ; the determination of energy to the accom- 
plishment of things by knowledge of the law. 



THE TAROT 



227 



In the Psychic world — The use of the psychic 
forces in the process of development; the conquest 
of the animal nature. 

In the Physical world — The conservation of 
energy; control and direction of force; mastery 
of the elements; vitality; rejuvenation. 

12. The Sacrifice, or the Hanged Man. A man 
with a golden halo is suspended b}^ one foot from a 
tree; the free limb being placed so as to form an 
inverted figure t7. It represents the Divine Giving- 
forth, the revealed law. 

In the Spiritual world — The sacrifice of the spirit 
to matter for the ends of evolution. 

In the Intellectual world — The laAV of repression ; 
antagonism; inversion and self-sacrifice. 

In the Psychic world — Madness, offensiveness, 
misanthrophy. 

In the Physical world — Depolarization; reversal; 
penalty; reaction; loss and undoing. 

13. The Reaping Skeleton, or Death. The figure 
of a skeleton riding upon a horse, to whom even 
the great ones of earth do homage. It represents 
the Divine Law of reversion, the going back of 
things to their source; inbreathing. 

In the Spiritual world — It denotes manifestation 
of the Divine activity and life. Creation and 
transformation. 

In the Intellectual world — The law of action 
and reaction ; introspection ; inductive reasoning ; 
ecstasy. 

In the Psychic world — Disappointment ; denial 

Q 2 



228 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



of affections ; reclusiveness ; deprivation of psychic 
force ; catalepsy. 

In the Physical world — Death ; ruin ; paralysis ; 
collapse ; nullity. 

14. The Two Urns, or Temperance. An angelic 
figure pours pure water from one vessel to another. 
On his forehead is the symbol of Life, and on his 
breast the ineffable name, Adonai, and the triangle 
within the square. It represents the Divine life 
in activity. 

In the Spiritual world — The eternal movement 
of life. 

In the Intellectual world — The combination of 
ideas; friendship; sociolog}'. 

In the Psychic world — The interplay of the 
emotions; reciprocal affection; intercourse; social 
life. 

In the Physical world — The relations of the 
sexes ; chemical combination ; amalgamation ; public 
intercourse. 

15. Typhon, or The Devil. The Evil One seated 
upon a throne in the Inferno, his footstool an iron 
cube to which male and female devils are chained. 
It represents the spirit of Discord. 

In the Spiritual world — The principle of evil, 
the refractory will opposed to the predestined order 
of things. 

In the Intellectual world — Magic, mystery; the 
unknown; controversy; freethought; fatahsm. 

In the Psychic world — Anger; passion; hatred; 
malice and fear. 



THE TAROT 



229 



In the Physical world — Antipathy ; discord ; strife ; 
repulsion; riot and lawlessness. 

16. The Blasted Tower, or the Lightning Flash. 
A toAver struck by lightning. A crown is seen 
falling from the pinnacle, and also two men. 

It denotes the Divine visitation. 

In the Spiritual world — The overthrow of spiritual 
pride; the descent of Typhon; the fall of the angels. 

In the Intellectual world — The pride of intellect 
and its consequence ; the law of retribution ; insanity. 

In the Psychic world — Psychic repercussion; 
ostentation ; the humbling of the autocrat. 

In the Physical world — Cataclysms; earthquakes, 
storms; overthrow; reversal; ruin; fatality; sudden 
death; catastrophe; accidents. 

17. The Star of the Magi, or the Star. A female 
figure pouring water from one vessel into a lake 
and from another upon the dry land. Above her 
are the seven stars, among which there shines the 
great Pole Star of the Magi. It represents the 
Divine Expectancy. 

In the Spiritual world — Faith, the realization of 
Hope. The manifestation of the unrevealed. The 
beatific Vision. 

In the Intellectual world — Absolute knowledge; 
the evidence of experience; illumination; astrology. 

In the Psychic world — Expectancy; geniality; 
sympathy; charity; optimism; confidence. 

In the Physical world — Birth ; success ; relief ; 
sustenance. 

18. The Twilight, or the Moon. A night scene, 



230 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



the luminar}' distilling dew upon the earth, while a 
dog and a wolf are baying the moon and a crab 
is crawling from the water. It denotes the Great 
Infinitude. 

In the Spiritual world — The ab^'sm of the Infinite; 
the womb of Time; the Divine amplitude; infinity; 
spiritual darkness. 

Inthe Intellectual world — The darkness of negation; 
imbecilit}^; lunacy; vacuity; time and space as 
distinguished from duration and distance. 

In the Psychic world — Doubt; despair; hesitancy; 
vacillation and inconstancy. 

In the Physical world — Darkness; emptiness; 
denial; enemies; snares and ambushes. 

19. The Resplendent Light, or the Sun. A child 
with the banner of Life seated upon a white horse. 
The child's head is adorned by a chaplet of flowers, 
while above him shines a brilliant sun. It represents 
the Divine Effulgence. 

In the S piritual world — It is the supreme Heaven ; 
the Presence of the Divine Being; the Kingdom of 
Heaven; the angelic life. 

In the Intellectual world — The first principle; the 
origin and source of things; the laws of being. 

In the Psychic world — Vital energy; magnetic 
power; radiant joy; happiness; benevolence. 

In the Physical world — Life ; energy, force ; success, 
honours; elevation, attainment. 

20. The Resurrection, or the Judgment. The Angel 
of Life sounding the Trumpet^ while the dead rise 
from their tombs. It represents the Great Vocation. 



THE TAROT 



231 



In the Spiritual world — Spiritual awakening; 
the call to the Divine Life and Presence ; the Divine 
Consciousness. 

In the Intellectual world — Revelation of genius; 
aspiration. 

In the Psychic world — Responsiveness; activity; 
conversion; moral regeneration; new regime. 

In the Physical world — Response to stimulus; 
reflex action; elective affinity; elevation; mission; 
office; utility; work. 

21. The Crown of the Magi, or the World, In 
the centre of a circle is seen the figure of a woman, 
representing Nature. The circle is variously a 
serpent with its tail in its mouth, representing 
eternity, and a wreath of laurels denoting conquest 
or attainment. At the four corners are seen the 
four fixed signs, denoting stability and endurance, 
the four quarters of the world and the four "elements." 
It denotes immortality. 

In the Spiritual world — Divine continuity. 
Immortality. 

In the Intellectual world — The mystery of the 
ages. Adeptship. The law of continuity. Supreme 
knowledge. 

In the Psychic world — Patience; endurance; 
steadfastness; fidelity; morality; integrity; perfect 
satisfaction; the virtuous enjoyment of all dehghts. 

In the Physical world — Position; power; honour; 
distinction; wealth; long life; happiness; inheritance. 

22. The Blind Fool, or Folly. A vain and be- 
dizened youth, carrying a staff and bundle upon his 



232 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



shoulder, holds in his hand the flower of daUiance. 
With haughty mien he walks blindly to the vei^e 
of a precipice. It is the symbol of the Di^iDe 
Inscrutability. 

In the Spiritual world — The law of Divine 
Necessity. 

In the Intellectual world — Fatalism; egotism; 
blind credulity; ignorance; error. 

In the Psychic world — Unrestrained passions; 
selfishness; vanity; speculation. 

In the Physical world — Inconsequence; blindness; 
danger ; ruin ; detachment, isolation ; conspicuous 
folly. 

These interpretations are not presumed to be 
exhaustive nor to follow any other order than that 
of the Tarot cards, which, needless to say, have been 
shuffled considerably since their delivery to the world 
by the thrice great Hermes. They represent the 
three stages of Initiation, with their ten, seven 
and three steps, culminating in Attainment (21) or 
Failure (22). He who can so dispose the symbols 
of the Tarot, or Golden Book of Hermes, will need 
no other initiation than he can himseli effect. 



CHAPTER III 



CARTOMANCY 

The following methods have reference to the 
ordinary pack of 32 cards, the twos, threes, fours, 
fives and sixes being rejected. 

The Shuffle 
This should be done without effort, prejudice or 
design. The cards should lie loosely in the left 
hand while the right manipulates them, the mind 
meanwhile resting intently upon the object desired 
of the divination. If the consultant is not expert 
at shuffling, so that it cannot be done automatically 
and without the attention being fixed upon it, the 
cards should be laid face downwards upon a table 
and mixed by a light circular pressure with both 
hands. They are then brought together to form a 
pack. 

The Cut 

The cards being placed face downwards, the pack 
must be cut with the left (the passive) hand into 
three lots, turning them face upwards. 

The Cartomante 
then takes the lots one by one, taking note of the 
cards which lie exposed on the top of each lot. 

233 



234 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



The pack is then put together in the same order as 
before the Cut. 

A variet}^ of methods may be followed in laying 
out the cards. Much depends upon the object in 
view as to what method should be employed. It 
will doubtless be sufficient if I recite several of the 
more approved methods, leaving the reader to make 
selection of one or more of them as occasion may 
require. 

But first let us learn the meanings of the cards. 
The Suits 

Diamonds have relation to money, profit, loss. 
They are governed by the cards which are in touch 
with them. In questions of time they denote speed. 

Clubs denote business, profession, position; mental 
pursuits. 

Hearts govern domestic affairs, social relations, 
love, affection. 

Spades denote sickness, death, loss, disappoint- 
ment, delay, distance. 
> 

Time 

Diamonds de^pote the morning. 
Clubs, midday. 
Hearts y evening. 
Spades, night. 

Complexions 

Diamonds show very fair people, with flaxen or 
sandy hair and blue eyes. If aged, white-headed, 



CARTOMANCY 



235 



Cluhs show persons of medium colour, inclining 
to be dark, with brown hair and eyes. 

Hearts show rather fair people, with fresh com- 
plexion, brown hair and blue or grey eyes. 

Spades, very dark people, with black hair and 
dark complexion, deep broAvn eyes. 

Position 

Diamonds show officials and persons in authority; 
also very old people. 

Clubs show professionals and such as live by the 
use of their intellect. 

Hearts denote social and domestic attendants; 
also lovers and friends. 

Spades, lawyers (acting under diamonds) ; widows, 
widowers; persons in mourning; also those of mean 
caUing, artisans, etc. 

Intervals 

Diamonds denote speedy effects. 

Clubs, punctuality. 

Hearts, leisurely results. 

Spades, delay, impediments or failure. 

Sex 

Kings of the suits stand for men of the appro- 
priate colouring {see " Complexions "). 
Queens represent women. 

Knaves denote the thoughts of persons indicated 
by the king or queen of the same suit. 



236 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

Specific Meanings 
Diamonds. 

Seven stands for a gift, jewellery, children. 
Eight, roadway journeys, short travels. 
Nine, speed, sharpness; wounds, quarrels; sudden 
events. 

Ten, a city, town; success. 
Ace, money; a ring; a letter. 

Clubs. 

Seven, victory, success; achievement by intelli- 
gence. 

Eight, papers, documents; a firm friend; agree- 
ments, contracts. 

Nine, merrymaking; pleasure; society. 

Ten, distant journey by land; business; success 
by the use of faculty; surmounting. 

Ace, good fortune; success; preferment. 

Hearts. 

Seven, a small wish ; slight gratification ; domestic 
changes. 

Eight, clothes; invitations; love and courting; 
furniture. 

Nine, the wished-for thing ; gratification; joy. 
Ten, marriage; a fortunate change; success. 
Ace, the house; a cot or cradle; good fortune. 

Spades. 

Seven, an upset; a removal; disorder; a reversal. 
Eight, night-time; sickness; loss; a split or quarreL 



CARTOMANCY 



237 



Nine, disappointment ; delay ; death; loss ; undoing 
and failure. 

Ten, water ; a voyage ; a great distance ; things 
remote. 

Ace, the grave; a foundation; a post or position. 

The nine of Diamonds is called the " Sword " 
and " the curse of Scotland." The ace of Clubs 
is called " the Horseshoe," and other cards have 
their own appropriate symbolic names. 

Combinations 

Every card has its own specific meaning, but is 
capable of conveying a flexed meaning hy combina- 
tion with other cards. Thus you may have a clutch 
of two or three cards touching one another, the result 
being indicated by the combined meanings of the 
cards involved. The following combined meanings 
will aid in the process of interpretation : — 

A Clutch of Two. 
Eight of Hearts and Ace of Diamonds, an affection- 
ate letter ; a proposal of marriage ; a letter of 
invitation. 

Seven of Clubs and Ten of Diamonds, successful 
business; financial victory. 

Nine of Clubs and Ace of Spades, a will. 

Seven of Spades and Ace of Hearts, a change of 
residence. 

Eight of Diamonds and Ten of Spades, a wet 
journey. 



238 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM ig| 

Ten of Clubs and Ten of Spades, a long voyage. 
Nine of Diamonds duad Seven of Spades, an accident; 
a flight. 

Nine of Diamonds and Nine of Spades, death. 

Eight of Hearts and Eight of Clubs, a contract. 

Seven of Spades and Eight of Hearts, a change of 
clothes, or furniture. 

Nine of Diamonds and Eight of Clubs, a writ; a 
summons, or telegram. 

Similarly all pairs of cards may be combined to 
form a reading. The meanings derived will have 
reference to any person indicated by the Court Card 
they may touch. In this respect 

Cards above the person signified denote that lo 
which he is striving. 

Cards below denote that which lies at his feet, 
things accomplished. 

Cards to the left show what is thrown away or to 
be avoided; the results of past action; antagonisms. 

Cards to the right indicate that which the future 
holds; the outcome of present action. 

A Clutch of Three, 

Three Aces, a rise in position. 

Three Kings, success. 

Three Queens, scandal; company. 

Three Knaves, embarrassments. 

Three Tens, a rise in position. 

Three Nines, delay, if including the Spade Nine; 
disappointment, if the Heart Nine is absent. Other- 
wise, speedy success. 



CARTOMANCY 



239 



Three Eights, success. 

Three Sevens, an upset; derangement. 

A Clutch of Four, 

Four Aces, a denial ; refusal. 

Four Kings, a court case ; a meeting ; a convention. 

Four Queens, slander; publicity. 

Four Knaves, distraint ; imprisonment ; an impasse. 

Four Tens, great success. 

Four Nines, robbery; bankruptcy; failure; dead 
loss. 

Four Eights, achievement ; success ; merrymaking. 
Four Sevens, walled in; confinement; stoppage. 

Note. — A preponderance of red cards in any com- 
bination is more hopeful than if they were black. 

A Run. 

A run or sequence of Diamonds shows financial 
competence; of Hearts, domestic and social happi- 
ness ; of Clubs, good business and intellectual achieve- 
ments; of Spades, illness, misfortune, failure. 



CHAPTER IV 



VARIOUS METHODS 

1. The Wheel of Fortune 

In this method the 32 cards only are used. The 
" positions " correspond to the twelve astrological 
Houses (which see), and have the same significations. ^ 
The cards are laid out in the order indicated by the 
numbers in the following diagram, and the pairs 
are read in relation to their positions. 

The 13th, 14th, 15th and 16th cards are called 
the governing cards. The 17th is the key card. 
The three cards left over are what goes out of 
the life. 

Diamonds belong to the 1st House; Clubs to the 
10th; Hearts to the 7th; and Spades to the 4th. The 
ace of any suit is in its strongest position when 
occupying its own House. The kings are in best 
position when they are the governing cards of their 
own angles, e. g. the King of Diamonds in the 13tb 
position; the King of Clubs in the 14th; the King 
of Hearts in the 15th; and the King of Spades in 
the 16th position. 

Each of the Houses can be occupied by one of 
two cards, which will then be in position of greatest 

240 



VARIOUS METHODS 241 



strength; and the angles will have three cards, 
similarly placed in positions of strength. Thus : — 

1st House is strengthened by Ace of Diamonds, 
7 Hearts, or 10 Spades. 

2nd House, 8 Hearts, Jack of Spades. 

3rd House, 9 Hearts, Queen of Spades. 

4:th House, Ace of Spades, 10 Hearts, or 7 Clubs. 

5th House, Jack of Hearts, 8 Clubs. 

6th House, Queen of Hearts, 9 Clubs. 

1th House, 7 Diamonds, Ace of Hearts, 10 Clubs. 

%th House, Jack of Clubs, 8 Diamonds. 

Uh House, Queen of Clubs, 9 Diamonds. 
l^th House, Ace of Clubs, 10 Diamonds, 7 Spades. 
nth House, Jack of Diamonds, 8 Spades. 
\2th House, Queen of Diamonds, 9 Spades. 



The Wheel. 




B 



242 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



The cards being shuffled and cut, they are 
out as shown above. The cartomante will t 
begin the interpretation, by giving the combin 
meaning of cards 30, 31, 32, throwing them away 
of no further consequence. 

The reading of the future begins with 18 — 1 — 13; 
the pair 18 — 1 being read together in relation to 13, 
which controls the combination. This pair 18 — 1 
has relation to the Consultant. 

Next pair, 19 — 2, is read in connection with 
finance. Next pair, 20 — 3, in regard to letters and 
relations. 

The 12 pairs are finally exhausted in the same way. 
The key card is that which for the time being domin- 
ates the life and fortunes, the means by which succeai 
or failure will come, and if a Court Card a person (A 
that colouring will dominate everything. It is he 
or she who can say yes or no, confirming or denyiJ 
the means. 

If the cards read well in the pairing, and appear 
to promise good fortune, the key card will show the 
means by which this good will come, and vice versa. 

When the angles or cardinal points — the 1st, 10th, 
7th and 4th cards — are good, the whole fortune 
will be greatly enhanced for good. But when evil 
cards occupy these positions, any good will not be 
of a permanent or secure nature. 

The angular cards, 1, 10, 7 and 4, are to be referred 
to the governors, numbers 13, 14, 15, 16, respectively, 
and thence to the key card. 

The wheel may be set out thrice at a sitting. 



VARIOUS METHODS 



243 



Ally questions can be answered from the second 
tirage or setting, after the general prognostics have 
been obtained. In answering to a specific question 
the cartomante will only consult those sections 
of the wheel which have relation to the matter 
preferred. Anything in the nature of a second 
general reading is to be avoided. It is the first 
setting of the Wheel only which is to be relied on 
for a true prognosis. 

2. The Star 

The Consultant's card is first taken from the 
pack and set in the centre of a small round table. 
This card will answer to the sex and colouring of the 
Consultant. 

The latter then takes the 31 cards remaining and 
shuffles them thoroughly, desiring to know what 
is immediately surrounding him or her. The cards 
are cut. 

The cartomante now takes the cards and lays 
them out as shown in the diagram on page 244, 
where C is the Consultant. The rest of the cards 
are then laid aside. 

The 13th card is laid upon the top of C. It is 
the Court of Final Appeal, and if a good card, 
especially a Heart, it will give a hopeful issue, 
whatever may be otherwise predicable. 

In reading from the Star the 5th and 7th are 
obstacles and are to be read together, and also in 
combination with or reference to 9 and 11. They 
have a bearing upon what is past. 

K 2 



244 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Cards 1 and 3 are read together, and in reference 
to 9 and 10. These cards will show the aspirations, 
hopes and intentions of the Consultant. 

Cards 2 and 4 are read together, and referred also 
to 11 and 12; the augury having significance in 
regard to fortune achieved, the present condition 
and what lies at the feet of the Consultant as his own. 

The Star. 



3 













7 




s 




C 




6 




S 



Cards 6 and 8 are read together and in relation 
to 10 and 12, in reference to what is coming; the 
future ; the result of present action. 

After the general reading note the cards touching 
the Consultant or centre card and also the 13th card; 
also the general tone of the cards above and to the 
right. For if the cards above and to the right are 
red or predominantly so, or Clubs touched by Hearts 
or Diamonds, and especially if the 13th card is a 



VARIOUS METHODS 245 



good one, then you may safely promise the attain- 
ment of the ambitions and a brilliant future. 

When the tirage has relation to a specific question, 
the Nine of Hearts must be present and the Nine 
of Spades absent, or the wish will fail of fulfilment 
or be abandoned. 

3. The Tablet 

The 32 cards are all employed in this method of 
divination. Aitev shuffling and cutting the cards 
are laid face upwards in four rows of eight cards 
each, from left to right, working downwards. 

The Consultant being found by the sex and com- 
plexion, the count is made from this to the ninth 
card in every direction, the cards being paired up 
and read together with those which lie in contact 
with them. 

The cards surrounding the Significator or con- 
sultant card must be taken special note of as indicat- 
ing events near at hand, the environment, etc. 

The House-card or Ace of Hearts is then taken, 
and the count made from it in the same wa^^, to 
find out what fortune attaches to the home. If 
there is a dominant wish the Nine of Hearts is taken 
as Significator, and the count made in the same 
manner as before. If it counts up to the Consultant 
or the House-card, there will be realization of the 
hopes and desires. 

Count can also be made from the left-hand card 
in the top row (that which was first laid down). The 
ninth card in every case, and the ninth from the 



246 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



ninth continuously, are noted and read in connection 
with those touching them. 

Finally, the cards are taken up in pairs, the 1st 
and 32nd, the 2nd and 31st, and so on, ending with 
the 16th and 17th. These pairs are read together 
and prognostics drawn from their combined 
meanings. 

Many other methods of laying out the cards are 
in vogue, and there is one which has special applica- 
tion to the events which occur from day to day, 
but I am not privileged to give this in its true form, 
and must therefore content myself by omitting it 
entirely. The above methods will, however, serve 
for all practical purposes, and will be found 
to contain a complete justification of the use of 
Cartomancy. 



CHAPTER V 



CRYSTAL-GAZING 

Fortunately I do not feel called upon to give 
a scientific explanation of the phenomenon known 
as Clairvoyance. The facts are numerous ; the 
evidence is unimpeachable ; and the exercise of the 
faculty is too well attested the world over to leave 
any manner of doubt as to its claim to a place in 
the category of occult phenomena. 

Two facts, however, appear to have been estab- 
lished in regard to it, viz. : (1) The faculty is not 
normal to the same degree in all persons; (2) in those 
in whom it is a more or less constantly active faculty 
it is nevertheless beyond the control of the will. 

The function of the brain — which may be regarded 
as the bulbous root of a nervous plant whose branches 
grow downwards — is duplex; to affect and to be 
affected. In its active or positive condition it 
affects the whole of the nervous and muscular 
processes in man, finding expression in vital action. 
In its passive or negative condition it is affected 
by impressions coming to it through the organs of 
sense, the results being expressed by nervous and 
mental action. It is this latter phase of brain 

247 



248 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



function with which we are concerned in the study 
of clairvoyance, whether natural or induced. 

The range of our sense-perceptions puts us con- 
tinually in relations with the material world, or 
rather with a certain part of it only. But the gamut 
of sensation is limited in us. Many insects, birds 
and quadrupeds have keener sense-organs than we. 
The photographic plate can register beyond the 
highest range of our sense of sight. The X-Rays 
have put us in relations with a new order of impres- 
sion-records quite beyond normal sense perception. 
The animalculse and microbic life, itself microscopic, 
have yet their own sense-organs related to a world 
of life beyond our ken. We know most positively 
that Nature does not cease to exist where we cease 
to perceive her. Yet there are people foolish 
enough to require the evidence of the senses in proof 
of things which cannot normally be perceived and 
who would scout the idea that visions may be seen 
in a crystal unless they could be pointed out and 
perceived by them. 

The relation of our sense-organs to the several 
degrees of matter, to solids, fluids, gases, etc., vary 
very considerably with different persons. The aver- 
age wool-sorter would leave many an artist behind 
in his discrimination of colour-shades. Odours are 
not only differently sensed by various individuals, 
but also they affect people differently. 

The perception of sound also affords evidence of 
a wide range of variability in the acoustic sense. 
Neither is it wholly a matter of quantity. Sounds, 



CRYSTAL-GAZING 



249 



colours, odours and flavours have a qualitative 
value which differs with the individual percipient. 
Hence arises the variety of " tastes," of likes and 
dislikes observable in a mixed community. The 
experience is a general one, but the principle involved 
appears to have escaped recognition simply because 
it is a psychological and not a materiail or physical 
one. But to come to the practical part of our 
subject, let us examine first of all what we under- 
stand by the terms Clairvoyance and Crystal-gazing. 

Clairvoyance or Clear Vision may be natural or 
induced. Natural clairvoyance is more common 
among certain communities than others. It has 
been stated that the inhabitants of basalt territory 
are disposed to natural clairvoyance, which, if true, 
would certainly lead to the conclusion that the 
faculty is normal to man and under certain favouring 
conditions will become active. It is an established 
fact that certain sensitive persons are nervously 
affected by the presence of water, and this has been 
utilized by some for the purpose of finding springs 
and underground currents. Such persons are known 
as " Dowsers." If these are affected by the presence 
of underground water it is quite reasonable to suggest 
that others may be similarly affected by the presence 
of basaltic rocks beneath the surface of the land. 

Natural clairvoyants, then, may be regarded as 
those in whom the faculty is more or less persistent. 
In coming into a locality they will describe things 
which have already taken place there as if they were 
presently conscious of them, or as if the events were 



250 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 




actually taking place before their eyes. At other 
times they will describe events which are subse- 
quently enacted. There appears to be no sense of 
time attaching to the vision. 

Induced clairvoyance is, in effect, nothing more 
than the faculty of natural clairvoyance brought 
into temporary activity by suitable excitation. 

The Crystal is a ready means of developing 
clairvoyance where a tendency to it is. known to 
exist. It is clear pellucid quartz or beryl, sometimes 
oval in shape, but more generally spherical. Baron 
Reichenbach credited it with highly magnetic 
qualities capable of producing, in a suitable subject, 
a state analogous to the ordinary waking trance 
of the hypnotists. Reichenbach has shown, by a 
series of experiments upon sensitive and hypnotized 
subjects, that metals and other substances produced 
marked effects in contact with the human body. 
The same substance was found to affect different 
patients in diverse manner. The hypnotic experi- 
ments of Dr. Charcot, the well-known French bio- 
logist, have also demonstrated the rapport existing 
between the sensitive and foreign bodies in contact; 
as, for instance, when a bottle containing poison 
was taken at random from among a number of others 
and placed on the back of the patient's neck, the 
hypnotized subject would at once develop all the 
symptoms of poisoning by arsenic, strychnine,prussio 
acid, etc., it being afterwards ascertained that 
the bottle thus applied actually contained the toxine 
whose effects had been portrayed by the subject. 



CRYSTAL-GAZING 



251 



It is not, therefore, a matter of surprise that the 
crystal, which is a highly " magnetic " body in the 
sense that Reichenbach uses the term " odylic," 
should produce marked effects upon a certain order 
of sensitives. The fact that it does not act similarly 
upon aU subjects seems to indicate that the difference 
is not in its action but in the predisposition of the 
subject. Where the Crystal does not answer it is 
often found that the black concave mirror is effective. 
I have prepared a mirror of this nature after the 
recipe of Sir Richard Burton, and the effects have 
fully justified the claim that for purposes of clair- 
voyant development the " Magnetic Mirror " is 
not to be surpassed. A bowl of water has been 
found effective as a medium in some cases, and we 
learn that Jacob Boehme, while engaged in his work 
as a cobbler, was suddenly entranced b}^ the sight 
of the sun's rays falling on a vessel containing water. 
From that time his interior vision was opened, and 
we have in consequence a number of remarkable 
works from an unlettered man, including " the 
Aurora," " the Four Complexions," " the Signatura 
Rerum," and other works. 

As to the medium employed for inducing clair- 
voyance, it cannot be definitely prescribed. It 
must remain a matter of experiment for each 
investigator. The degree of sensibility to stimulus 
of this kind differs with the subject. There are 
some in whom the psychic faculties are more active 
than in others. In some these powers are hereditary, 
in others they are developed by an innate tendency 



252 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



aided by favouring circumstances. In most persons 
the natural powers take a more practical turn, making 
them successful in mundane affairs rather than in 
those that are psychic and spiritual. All are not 
constituted alike, and it is well that it is so. The 
distribution of natural gifts proceeds from the celes- 
tial world, and is so ordered that each person born 
on this planet may take his part in the economy of 
life. The spiritual needs of mankind are included 
in this economy, and there are born into the world 
from time to time those who are specially endowed 
with the faculty of spiritual interpretation, with 
psychic gifts such as clairvoyance, telepathy, psycho- 
metry, etc., such persons being the natural channels 
of communication between the superior and inferior, 
or the internal and external worlds. They are to 
humanity what a certain order of microbic life is 
to the body of man — organic interpreters, translat- 
ing the elements of food into blood, nerve, fibre, 
tissue, etc., agreeably to the laws of their being, 
Among any people who are alive to the paramount 
importance of maintaining the open door between 
this world and the spiritual universe, such media 
are cared for and protected and suitable conditions 
are supplied for the exercise of their faculty. It 
was so in the case of the Sybils among the Greeks; 
it is thus also in India to-day. 



CHAPTER VI 



PRELIMINARIES AND PRACTICE 

In the practice of Clairvoyance by natural means, 
patience is very necessary. Admitting that the 
germ of the faculty is there, Nature requires not 
only suitable conditions, but also adequate time in 
which to display her powers. Here again we find 
temperamental differences ; and it may be useful in 
this place to indicate by what means and by what 
persons seership may most readily be attained. 

In regard to the subject, medium or seer, there 
are two distinct temperaments in which the faculty 
may be expected to develop very readily. There 
is the nervous temperament associated with a high 
muscular development, classified as the "mental 
motive " temperament. It is characterized by 
great activit}^ of body and mind, a certain nervous 
tension and excitability, prominent features, full 
osseous development, prominent brows, intent gaze, 
and sallow complexion. Mr. Evan Roberts, who 
figured so prominently in the Welsh Revival of 1905, 
is a characteristic example of this class of subjects. 

The other class in whom the passive temperament 
is present and to whom visions come by reflection 
as images mirrored in a moveless lake, are known 

253 



254 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

by the following characteristics : full and lymphatic 
habit, pale or delicate complexion, blue e3^es, straight 
fine hair, small, plump and cold hands, and a languid 
disposition. 

There are many variants from these two main 
types, of course, but they are cited as being very 
distinctive, and also they obtain their development 
by quite opposite means. 

The positive seer works with effort, throwing out 
the soul-images by the power of the will, perceiving 
them with more or less accuracy, and thereafter 
turning them over in the mind, reasoning and 
questioning concerning their import and meaning. 

The passive seer, on the contrary, works not at all 
and makes no effort, the visions coming impercept- 
ibly, almost unconsciously, and having generally a 
literal interpretation or fulfilment. 

In the case of t]jp positive seer the visions are 
symbolical and seldom capable of a literal applica- 
tion, even though they may be found to have a 
material fulfilment. With the passive seer it is 
otherwise, the visions being actual visions of what 
has happened or will thereafter transpire. 

Of these two kinds of seership the passive is the 
more serviceable because more perspicuous, but it 
has the disadvantage of being largely under the 
control of external influences, and so frequently 
incapable of being exercised at all. 

The positive type of seer exercises an introspective 
vision, searching inwardly towards the soul-world 
whence revelation proceeds. The passive seer, on 



PRELIMINARIES AND PRACTICE 255 



the contrary, remains in statu quo, open to impres- 
sions coming inwards towards the perceptive faculty, 
but making no effort towards them. The success 
of each depends upon being allowed the free and 
uninterrupted exercise of that method which is 
natural to their respective temperaments. 

In practice it is necessary that self-possession 
and confidence in one's own soul-power should be 
maintained. Faith is the firm rock upon which 
all revelation must rest. Let the intention be pure 
and a desire for Truth constantly present in the 
mind. Clairvoyance is not an undisputed possession, 
but a gift of the Spirit, and accepted as such in a 
spirit of humble recognition it is more capable of 
proving a real and lasting blessing than that " terror 
of the soul " it is sometimes seen to be. And if 
under the best conditions the quest is unsuccessful 
after a prolonged period of ^nest trial, it must 
be taken as sufficient evidence that the faculty 
of Clairvoyance is not in the category of one's indi- 
vidual powers. Possibly the same qualifications 
brought to bear along some other line of psychic 
development will result in a commensurate degree 
of success. 

So far, then, in regard to the preliminaries. A 
word or two now as to practice. 

Having obtained a good rock crystal (the glass 
balls sold as such are quite useless) or a black con- 
cave mirror with a base of bitumen, the same 
should be kept out of the Sun's direct rays, and 
when not in use may be conveniently kept in a 



256 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 




black velvet or silk bag, which will not scratch the 
surface. 

It must not be thought that the visions are in 
the crystal or mirror itself. The}^ are in the sub- 
conscious mind or soul of the seer; but the mirror 
serves as a medium for visuaHzing the impressions 
which come up before the mind's eye, and also 
produce inhibition of the basilar portion of the 
brain through the optic thalami, thus placing the 
attentive mind in a passive condition. Etheric 
perturbation caused by combustion disturbs the 
odylic substance, and therefore no direct rays of 
light should be allowed to faU on the mirror. The 
diffused light just after sunset is the best for pur- 
posing and seering, and the position of the seer 
should be facing west with the direct light on the 
back of the mirror and only reflected rays upon its 
surface. 

If by artificial hght, the gasaher, candle or lamp 
should be behind the mirror, the latter being between 
the light and the seer. 

The crystal or mirror must be in contact with the ^ 
sitter, and no other person should be within arm's i 
length. 

A person seated behind the seer may act as 
prompter or director of the seance, and another 
similarly placed may act as recorder. The posi- 
tions are then as shown in the diagram. 



PRELIMINARIES AND PRACTICE 237 






o 



/ 



O 



The Director will maintain an even and quiet 
tone, suggesting from time to time what may be 
looked for. Thus : — 

Director. There is a house in S. Street; it is 
No. 17. You will enter by a gate and go along a 
short pathway to the door, which is of a green colour. 
You will go through the door and along the vestibule. 
Turn into the room on the left. Now tell me who 
and what you see there. 

The direction should be . made by easy stages, 
and no step should be taken until the seer confirms 
the previous direction by saying, " Yes, I am 
there," or similar form of assent. The director 
will then know how the seer is progressing. The 
" push-off " is very necessary in the early stages of 



258 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



development, and the above suggestion will be 
found extremely useful. 

When once the seer is " on the move," so to speak, 
he can be left to himself and will then either recoil 
at once to a complete consciousness of his physical 
surroundings or will go on to the exercise of the 
clairvoyant faculty. 

The Recorder will make notes of everything that 
is said during the seance; and the results should be 
tested and proved so that imagination may not 
pass for clairvoyance, as it is apt to do before the 
faculty is really developed. 

At no time during the seance should the director 
lose psychic touch of the seer, but as soon as a direc- 
tion is satisfied another should be given with, as 
far as possible, a connecting link, so that the transi- 
tions are rendered natural and not abrupt. Sudden 
dislocations are apt to break the spell under which 
the seer is carried away. 

No seance should last more than fifteen minutes, 
and sittings should be made at the same time of 
day and in the same place repeatedly, so that a 
cumulative effect is produced. A psychic habit 
is induced by this means, and it is extremely 
valuable in all functions of an automatic 
nature. 

Visions when fully developed are of two kiads, 
Direct and Symbolic. In most cases it wiU be found 
that answers to detached questions take a symbolic 
form. Passive seers usually have direct visions, 
and positive seers favour the symbolic form. The 



PRELIMINARIES AND PRACTICE 259 



former feels first, and then sees; the latter first sees, 
and then thinks. 

Special attention must be given in the early stages 
to the important process of direction. During 
the process of abstraction which precedes every 
vision, the consciousness is gradually withdrawn 
from the physical surroundings. The seer forgets 
that he is in this or that place, or in the presence of 
this or that person. He forgets that he is gazing 
into the mirror or crystal. He hears nothing 
consciously and sees nothing save that which is 
passing before the eyes of his soul. For the time 
being he loses sight of his own identity. When, 
therefore, the soul is suddenly arrested by an 
apparition which it has not consciously evoked, 
the reaction is apt to be violent and rapid and 
frequently carries the seer back to his normal 
condition. 

The process of direction, however, if properly 
conducted, tends to establish a condition of pre- 
paredness in the seer which is decidedly beneficial. 

If there is a suspicion of telepathic communication 
between the seer and the director or recorder, it 
can be obviated by directing the seer to a point 
where the knowledge of those present at the seance 
is equally nil. All independent intelligence com- 
municated by the seer can be subsequently checked 
and tested. 



£ 2 



CHAPTER VII 

VISIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 

The passive or direct vision is presumably a 
representation of the actual state of things 
perceived, whether relating to the past, present, 
or future. The circumstantial account given by 
the seer is sufficient to indicate that it is a direct 
vision. 

The symbolic vision is, however, fraught with 
many difficulties for those who are unacquainted 
with symbolism and the method of interpretation. 
Something, therefore, may be said on this point. 

Symbols are thought-forms which convey, by the 
association of ideas, a definite meaning to the mind 
which perceives them. They depend entirely upon 
the Laws of Thought and the correspondence 
between the spiritual and material worlds, between 
the subject and object of our consciousness. 

Among the ancients, symbols were the original 
form of record, of communication, and of writing. 
The hieroglyphics of the Egyptians, the word- 
pictures of the Mayas of Central America, the ideo- 
graphic writing of the Chinese are all forms of 
symbolism derived from natural objects. The 
Hebrew alphabet is quite symbolical. Any letter 

260 



VISIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 261 



speaks to us of the nomadic people who were 
^' dwellers in tents." Such names as ox, tent, 
tent-door, tent-peg, camel, fish, fish-hook, eye, 
hand, basket, rope-coil, ox-goad, water, are names 
of letters which cannot fail to convey an idea of 
the primitive Semites. They are all names of 
natural objects, and they are all symbols. Bring 
together the letters yod (hand), daleth (tent-door) 
and oin (eye), and you have the word yedo. The 
hand denotes action, power; the door, an entry, 
initiation ; the eye, sight, perception,-- -literally, 
opening the door to see; ideographic ally, knowledge. 
Similarly, in Chinese the words for wall, face, and 
man, when brought together as a symbol, indicate 
a wall-facing man, b}^ which we understand a 
prejudiced and bigoted person, one who will not 
see or enlarge his horizon. 

All symbols may be interpreted by their known 
natures, qualities and uses. Thus an arm will 
signify defence, power, protection; a mouth speech, 
revelation; an ear news, information; if distorted, 
scandal, abuse. The sun prosperity, life, honours; 
the moon crescent, prosperity, increase, improve- 
ment; when gibbous, loss, decay, decline. The 
sun eclipsed, death of a man; the moon eclipsed, 
death of a woman; bread, food, sustenance, know- 
ledge, preservation; and these are all natural inter- 
pretations. Every symbol has reference to the 
Three Worlds, the physical, intellectual, and spiritual, 
i.e. to Nature, Man, and God. 

If the question be concerning the material world, 



262 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



a ship as a symbol would show commerce, trade 
a voyage, good or bad according to the condition 
of the ship ; as if in full sail under a clear sky, prosper- 
ity is signified; if in distress or with flagging sails, 
an unfortunate condition is signified. 

If the question has relation to the intellectual 
world, the same sj^mbol would denote the inter- 
change of ideas, good or bad news, etc.; if to the 
superior world, the same symbol would denote that 
communication with the spiritual world is increasing 
or decreasing, as the symbol may indicate. A pirate 
ship might thus refer to plunder, slander, infringe- 
ment of rights, or death. 

Symbols are almost infinite in number, and the 
interpretation of them requires unprejudiced skill, 
but they are nevertheless an important subject 
for study, and the use of the Crystal or Mirror by a 
positive seer can hardly be beneficial without a 
profound understanding of this subject. 

Although every symbol has some general significa- 
tion in agreement with its natural qualities and 
uses, yet it obtains a particular meaning in relation 
to the individual. This is also the case in dreams, 
where every person is a natural seer. Few, however, 
pay that attention to dreams which their source 
and nature warrant. The Crystal is but a means 
of bringing the normal dreaming faculty into 
conscious activity. 

No definite rule can be laid down as to the inter- 
pretation of visions, and the seer or seeress will 
be found the best interpreter. Yet the differences 



VISIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 263 



of meaning, whether in dreaming or visions, of any 
particular symbol is of common experience. Thus 
to dream of a naked child imports trouble to some 
people, while others have a standard dream of 
wading in water whenever trouble is to be faced. 
To dream of butcher's meat means financial troubles 
to some people, while to others it imports gain by 
speculation. 

The controlling factor in this matter is probably 
to be found in the constitution of the psychic and 
mental faculties of the seer as expressed in the 
nativity. A great deal may be said for a system of 
interpretation that has for its basis the dominion 
of the signs of the Zodiac at the birth of an individual 
and also the horary positions of these signs at 
the time of the visions or dreams as the case 
may be. 



CHAPTER VIII 
SOME EXPERIENCES 



It may serve in some part to illustrate the fore- 
going remarks if I here recite some experiences 
which have come within my knowledge and have 
been either witnessed by me or have been the result 
of my own exercise of the faculty of induced 
clairvoyance. Being of a positive type of mind, 
and not normally clairvoyant, the visions have 
chiefly been of a symbolic character. 

A lady friend came to me in June 1896 and 
asked me to look at the Crystal for her, as her 
mind was much exercised on a certain point. In 
due course she was told that she would hear news 
from abroad concerning the birth of a child in some 
hot country; it would be a boy, and would arrive 
in the month of February of the following year. 
This was not at all what the lady was inquiring 
about, although I had no means of knowing what 
was in her mind as no intimation of any sort had 
been given to me by her. Nevertheless, she did 
hear such news, and in February 1897 a boy was 
born to the lady's sister in India, the late Queen 
Victoria being godmother to the child. 

I next told her that on a certain date, while 
264 



SOME EXPERIENCES 265 



travelling, she would meet with an accident to the 
right leg. On that day my friend actually slipped 
between the platform and footboard while getting 
into a train and suffered severe abrasion of the 
shin of the right leg, together with serious muscular 
strain from which she suffered for several days. 

It was further said that this lady would hear some 
good news concerning her son in connection with 
papers and a contest. This was to happen in the 
month of October, and at that time her son passed 
his examination for the military college with honours. 

As an illustration of the direct or passive vision, 
the following is of interest : — 

Mrs. H. the seeress was consulted by a lady of 
some ability in a special line of literature, though 
this fact Avas not within the knowledge of the 
seeress. The lady was told that she would go up 
a staircase into a dingy room with a roll of papers 
under her arm. She would see a dark man who 
was thick-set and of quiet demeanour. The man 
would take the roll, and it would be a source of 
good fortune to her at a later date. 

These circumstances were literally fulfilled by 
the lady taking a manuscript to a publisher, who 
accepted and published it. The description of the 
man was quite accurate, as I who know him can 
testify. 

These two cases will serve as illustrations of the 
two orders of vision, the symbolic and the literal. 
The symbolism of the former case not being recorded, 
however, but merely the interpretation and its 



266 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

fulfilment, it will be of interest to cite another 
instance in which the symbolism is preserved : — 

Vision. — A public square is seen in which was 
the effigy of a lamb mounted upon a pedestal. A 
flash of lightning is seen to strike the image, melting 
off one of its ears. A Catholic priest came along 
and pointed at the figure. 

Interpretation. — A member of the community to 
which the consultant belonged would thereafter 
be converted to the Roman Church. 

Fulfilment. — B}^ the next mail the consultant 
learned that such was the case, an important 
member of the body having gone over to the 
Catholics as predicted. 

Vision. — A man is seen dressed in black, wearing 
the habit of a judge. He holds some papers which 
he endeavours to conceal beneath his robe. He 
appears unsuccessful. The papers are too large. 
A snake is seen at his feet. It rises up against him. 

Interpretation. — A certain man who is indicated 
by his profession will be guilty of obscuring the 
truth and of misrepresentation. He will be the 
subject of criticism from a source that is not 
suspected. 

Fulfilment. — The man conspicuously indicated 
had followed the legal profession. He was convicted 
of having issued misleading and fraudulent testi- 
monies with intent to deceive. Criticism led to 
inquiry and conviction. 

Vision. — The same man is seen lying on a bed. 
He is m extremis. 



SOME EXPERIENCES 267 



Interpretation. — The man so indicated will be 
cut off by death three years from this time. 

Fulfilment. — His death took place by strangula- 
tion due to a throat affection exactly three years 
from that date. 

It is not always conspicuous from what source 
the seer derives his interpretations. We have to 
remember that the condition in which the seer 
voices his predictions is a psychological one, whether 
natural or induced, and in that state natural symbols 
take on a very different significance to that Avhich 
they would hold in the normal waking consciousness. 
It is similarly the case with dreams. They may 
be perspicuous and natural, or wholly symbolical. 
The influence they have upon the dreamer while 
asleep bears no sort of relation to their significance 
to the waking consciousness. How pregnant with 
meaning and how important and real they appear 
in the dreaming, only to dissolve into ridiculous 
triviahty and seeming nonsense the moment our 
wide-awake reason is brought to bear upon them ! 
It would appear that between the visionary and 
waking states of consciousness there is a complete 
hiatus, so that even the laws of thought undergo 
a change when the centre of consciousness is removed 
from the inner world of thought and feeling to the 
outer world of sense and action. 

Not infrequently the visionary state is induced 
by excessive emotion. Some persons of peculiarly 
sensitive nature will fall into the clairvoyant state 
while engaged in deep thought. This is akin to 



268 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



the " brown study " when '* a penny for your 
thoughts " is Hkely to prove a good investment 
if you are a student of psychology. In such cases 
the thread of thought appears to be broken and a 
vision, wholly unrelated to the subject but a moment 
ago in the mind, suddenly appears to usurp the field 
of consciousness. It is as if the soul of the sensitive, 
while probing the depths of thought, suddenly 
comes into contact with the thin partition dividing 
the outer world of thought from the inner world of 
knowledge, the domain of doubt and reason from 
that of intuition and direct perception ; and, breaking 
through this partition, the soul emerges into the 
field of light be3^ond. A rapid alternation of the 
centre of consciousness from the dream or psychic 
state to the waking or normal state will, if sustained, 
assuredly bring about the phenomenon known as 
clairvo3'^ance. Swedenborg claimed to have been 
simultaneously conscious in two worlds for days 
together. But the centre of consciousness cannot 
be located in two places or states of existence at 
one and the same time, and it may therefore 
be said that the alternation was exceedingly rapid 
and continuous, giving the sensation of being 
thus divided in consciousness. I have myself 
experienced this condition both experimentally 
and naturally, and at such times it would be impos- 
sible to say w hether I was in this or that of the two 
bodies, one corporeal and the other ethereal, through 
which I was conscious of functioning. 



CHAPTER IX 



GEOMANCY 

Probable Chinese Origin. 

This art is of very ancient origin, and is to be 
found among the earliest literary monuments. The 
Yih King, or Classic of Changes, already mentioned 
in the course of this work, employs it in the ver}^ 
highest connection. It would appear that a com- 
plete system of occult philosophy is founded upon 
the changes produced by the interplay of two 
Principles in Nature which they call the Yin and 
the Yang, or the Light and Dark, active and 
passive, male and female principles. Thence is 
derived the Law of Alternation " figured by the 
symbol — 




There is a statement to the effect that ''the One pro- 
duced the Three, the Three produced the Seven ; the 
Seven produced the Ten ; these Ten are all things." 

269 



270 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

The symbols or Kwei employed by the Chinese 
in their system of Geomancy are based upon the 
square of three, which in our section on Talismans 
was shown to be the exact rephca of the Hebrew 
Table of the planet Saturn; a square of 9 cells in 
which the numbers add to 15 in all directions. 

The philosophy of the Yih King does not at the 
moment concern us, although it is an exceedingly 
fascinating subject, and I therefore propose to pass 
at once to a consideration of the divinatory method 
employed in ancient China in connection with " the 
Reeds and the Tortoise." 

On the back of the Tortoise which stood for the 
world and humanity, and in a particular sense was 
symbolical of the Chinese Kingdom and its people, 
was inscribed the famous Key of the Pa-Tao, thus : — 




In the centre is the figure 5, which stands for human- 
ity, and the consultant. Around are the numbers 



GEOMANCY 



271 



12346789, which represent respectively the 
Five Factors, namely water, fire, wood, metal, and 
earth, corresponding to the five planets Mercury, 
Mars, Jupiter, Venus, and Saturn. 

Five Faculties, shape, speech, sight, hearing, and 
thinking. 

Eight Regulators, the controllers of food, of pros- 
perity and public works ; the minister of instruction, 
the sacrificer, the criminal judge, the receiver of 
guests, and the general of the army. 

Five Disposers, the Zodiac, the Moon, the Sun, 
the planetary hour, and the planetary aspects. 

Three Virtues, impartial justice, rigid rule, and 
temperate government. 

Examination of Doubts concerning the five divina- 
tions and the two prognostics. 

General Verifications as to rain, fine weather, 
heat, cold and wind in their seasons. 

Five Blessings, long Hfe, wealth ; tranquillity ; love 
of virtue ; foreknowledge of the end of life ; to which 
are con tasted the six extremities. 

The Tortoise being set in the midst, reeds to the 
number of 36, of which 12 are of the full length of a 
span and 24 of half-a-span each, are taken in hand. 
The geomantic marks having been made, the corre- 
sponding reeds are set around the Tortoise and 
divination is made according to the positions 
and forms resulting. An odd number is repre- 
sented by a long reed and an even number by 
two short ones. Thus we have the eight primary 
Kwei : — - 



272 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



1 5 = 

2 =E 6 = 

3 ^ 1 = 

4 = 8 ^ 

and these constitute the geomantic figures in the 
most ancient Chinese system. By combining 1 witJi 
2 3 4, etc., successively, 2 with 13 4, etc., and so 
on throughout the entire scale, as well as by doubling 
each of the primary forms, they obtained 64 distinct 
Tcwei to each of which a definite meaning and prog- 
nostic was attached. By this means they guided 
their affairs of state and their private matters. 
Similarly they divided their heavens into eight 
equal parts and attributed similar meanings to them, 
judging by the positions of the planets how the 
various departments of the public service would be 
conducted. In this scheme the emperor was placed 
in the centre of the w^heel of eight spokes, being the 
neutral point about which the wheel of the law was 
said to revolve. 

When the Tortoise and the reeds were in agree- 
ment, the result was adjudged to be highly good, and 
vice versa. The Sun stood for the King, the Moon 
for the Nobility, the planets for the ofiicers of 
State, and the stars for the People. The Tortoise 
represented internal affairs and the reeds external 
matters. The Hebrews are also kno^vn to have 
evolved a system of divination by reeds or rods, 
and the practice of geomancy or its equivalent is 



GEOMANCY 



273 



found among all ancient civilizations. It is not, 
however, my intention to examine these at the 
present time, and I may at once pass on to an 
exposition of the system in vogue among Europeans. 

The Symbols 

There are sixteen geomantic figures, the evolution 
of which appears to have been lost to us, but there 
can be little doubt that they are all traceable to 
the Chinese kwei already referred to. In the 
European system each symbol is derived from four 
lines of points, one point denoting an odd number 
in the line and two points an even number. Thus, 
if I make four lines of points : — 

12 points = 00 

10 „ =00 

11 „ -=0 

9 „ = o 

I then derive the symbol of Fortuna Major, which 
is a symbol of the Sun in its strongest degree of 
influence. 

The seven celestial bodies Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, 
the Sun, Venus, Mercury, and the Moon have each 
two symbols, one of which is Dexter, or fortunate, 
and the other Sinister, or unfortunate. The Moon's 
nodes are also represented by the Dragon's Head 
and Tail, each of which has a separate symbol. 

The geomantic symbols of the planets and the 
nodes are as follows : — 



274 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Sinister 



Dexter 



O 

oo 
o 
o 

O O 

O O 
O O 

O ^ 

O O (^/V/'^o^J 
O O 



O 

o o 



o o 



o 
o 
o 
o 



Co/7/u/?c^^b 



O 
O 
O 
O O 



© 



O O 
O O 



o o 
o 



O 



+ 



o 
o 

o o 

o 

o o 
o o 
o 

Q 

o 

o o 

o 
. o 
o o 
o o 

o 

o o 

o o 
o o 
o o 
o o 

o o 



o 
o 
o 



The Sixteen Geomantic Figures. 



CHAPTER X 



CASTING THE FIGURE 

A GEOMANTic figure is made for the purpose 
of divination by making haphazard, in the sand 
or upon a piece of paper, sixteen lines of punctures 
or dots. Before making these lines, the mind 
should be allowed to dwell steadily upon the question 
to be resolved. While thus immersed in the 
question, the hand should be allowed automatically 
to make the lines of points. 

When sixteen lines of points have thus been made, 
the number of points in each line is to be counted. 
If even, two small circles are made at the end of 
the line, but if an odd number of points are in the 
line, one small circle must be set against it. You 
will now divide the sixteen lines into groups of four 
lines each, and thus will be derived the first four 
geomantic symbols. 

Examples. 

. 12 even O O 

10 „ o o 

11 odd O ' 

9 „ O 

12 even o O 

7 odd o 

13 „ o ^ 

11 „ _o__ 

12 even q q 

10 o O 3 

13 odd o 

15 „ o 

12 even q q 

12 „ o o 

13 odd o ^ 

10 even Q O 

275 T2 



276 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Note. — The whole of the 16 lines of points must be 
completed before the countmg is begun. At the end 
of each fourth line a geomantic symbol is formed, 
and this may be separated from the next by a stroke 
as shown above. These symbols are to be num- 
bered 1 2 3 4 in the order in which they are formed. 

The automatic process, on which the divination 
rests, is completed from the moment that the 
sixteen lines of points are finished. The rest of 
the process is an empiricism founded upon ancient 
practice. It is necessary to follow the method 
closely, or the whole scheme will be vitiated. 

The next four symbols, Nos. 5, 6, 7, 8, are derived 
from the combination of the first four. Thus : 
take the top line in each of the symbols 1 to 4. 
This will form the 5th symbol. Then take the 
second line in each of symbols 1 to 4, and this will 
give the 6th symbol. Next take the third line 
of the same symbols to form the 7th symbol, and 
hnally take the last line in each of the first four to 
form the 8th symbol. 

Thus from the four symbols already given above 
we derive symbols 5 to 8 as follows : — 



S 6 7 6 

O O O O O O 

O O O O o 

CO O O O o 

o c o o o o o 



The next four symbols, Nos. 9 to 12, are derived 
by reading together symbols 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, 
7 and 8, thus : — 



CASTING THE FIGURE 



277 



/ 


z 


3 






(5 


r 




o o 


U U 


O (J 


O O 




U U 


o 


o 


o o 


o 


o o 


o o 


o o 


O 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o o 


o o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o o 


o o 


o o 


o 


o o 



OO CO oo oo 

o o o o o o 

oo oo oo oo 

o o o o o o 



Reading the first and second across, we find 4 
points in the top line, 3 points in the second line, 2 
in the third line, and 2 in the fourth line. These 
give us the 9th symbol. The others are formed on 
the same plan. 

The Two Witnesses are now formed by combining 
symbols 9 and 10, and 11 and 12, in the same 
manner, and from the 13th and 14th sjonbols 
thus derived, the Judge is finally evolved. These, 
in the illustration before us, are : — 

o o o o 

hKness O O O O /r/^y^ess. 

o o 

/s 

o o 

o o 

o o 

o o 



278 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

The first 12 symbols may now be set in a horo- 
scopical figure. 

The 1st symbol is to be placed in the 1st House, 
the 2nd symbol in the 10th House, the 3rd in the 
7th House, and the 4th in the 4th House, etc., as 
shown below : — 

Positions of Symbols. 
1st symbol in the 1st Houfee 



2nd 




10th 


3rd 


J) 


7th 


4th 


? 5 


4th 


5th 


J 5 


2nd 


6th 


> J 


nth 


7th 


>> 


8th 


8th 


>> 


5th 


9th 


J J 


3rd 


10th 


55 


12th 


nth 


55 


9th 


12th 


55 


6th 



The Left Witness, or 13th symbol, is placed on 
the left of the horoscope in relation to the 1st House; 
the Right Witness, or 14th figure, to the right of the 
horoscope in relation to the 7th House; the Judge, 
over the head of the horoscope in association with 
the 10th House, and the 16th symbol, or Appeal, 
at the foot, in association with the 4th House. 

You will then have the complete figure as here 
shown : — 



JUDGING THE FIGURE 279 



Oeomantic Horoscope. 



o o 
o o 
o o 

o.p 



o o 
o 

o o 
o 

'3 



XK 


-XL 


31 


IX 






O O 


O 


o 


o o 


o 


o o 


O O 

/o 

o o 




o 

^ o 


o 


c 
' o 


O 

' o 


o 


o o 


o 


o o 


o 


o 


o o 


o o 


o o 


o o 


o 


o o 


o o 
o ' 


o o 


o o 


o 
o 


O 8 

o 


o o 


o 


o o 


o o 


o o 


o o 


o 


T 


u 


in 


xs: 




3ZI 



o o 
o 

o o 
o 



o o 
o 

o o 
o 

The Arabic figures show the numbers of the 
symbols as generated. The Roman figures denote 
the Houses. 

Judging the Figure 

The status or nature of the person or thing about 
which inquiry is made must be carefully considered. 
The consultant is represented by the 1st House, 
and the person inquired about is denoted by the 
7th House, if unrelated to the consultant. The 
significators of the Houses follow the same plan as 
in Astrology (see Part I, section I, chap. vi.). 

In a legal suit or criminal case the 1st is the 
prosecutor and the 7th the defendant. In a match 
or contest, the challenger is denoted by the 1st 
House and the acceptor by the 7th. 



280 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 




If the question concerns gain or loss it must be 
referred to the 2nd House ; and so of the rest, accord- 
ing to the canons of Astrology; for let it be under- 
stood that the system of Geomancy was founded 
upon the accredited influences of the planets, the 
symbols taking the place of those employed by 
astronomers, and the method of computing them 
was designed to replace the anciently complex 
process of finding the positions of the celestial 
bodies. 

With the specimen figure before us, let it be sup- 
posed that the question has reference to a suit at 
law. Here we find Fortuna Major in the 1st and 
Caput in the 2nd, showing good fortune and gain. 
In the 7th there is Via (a malefic indication), 
denoting that the course of affairs is adverse to the 
defendant, while Cauda in the 8th shows his financial 
prospects as likely to suffer by this suit. 

The witnesses are both of equal strength, being 
denoted in such case by Acquisitio. 

The Judge (symbol 15) is repeated in the 5th 
House (which is the 11th from the 7th), and this 
shows the Judge to be favourably disposed to the 
defence. But nothing can overrule Destiny, and 
the 16th symbol, derived by combining the 15th 
and 1st symbols, viz. Populus and Fortuna Major, 
must inevitably give the verdict to the Prosecutor. 

Had the question been concerning a speculation, 
then Populus in the 5th upheld by the Judge, with 
the 1st and 2nd Houses well occupied, is sufficient 
augury of a successful result. 



JUDGING THE FIGURE 281 



As will be readily seen from this brief exposition 
of practical Geomancy, the basis is wholly dependent 
on the exercise of the automatic faculty; but like 
most of the divinatory processes it is linked on to 
a system which is entirely judicial. It has the 
advantage of being free from all complicated or 
intricate calculations, and where the automatic 
or divinatory faculty is actively developed it can 
be safely relied upon to give a true and speedy 
answer to all questions whatsoever. 

Similar in many respects to this geomantic art 
is the Hebraic method of divination called Kabalistic 
Astrology, of which I have already given a complete 
exposition in a separate volume, so that there is 
perhaps no need to advert to it in this place. 

It may facilitate the process of judging a figure 
if I here give an interpretation of the effects due to 
the positions of the various symbols in the several 
Houses of the horoscope. But it should be remem- 
bered that the repetition of a symbol in two or more 
Houses may materially alter its final significance; 
while invariably the summation of the figure and 
the conclusion of the whole matter is in the hands 
of the Judge; or if there be any element of doubt, 
the sixteenth figure, which is the Appeal, will give a 
conclusive verdict. 



CHAPTER XI 
SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 

o o 

V Tristitia \ 

\. In the 1st House this symbol denotes short 
life if the question be to that point; but not other- 
wise. Much vexation, sorrow and disappointment. 
The mind is melancholy and misanthropic, brooding 
and taciturn. 

2. Acquisitiveness is strong. Money will be 
acquired b}^ slow, penurious methods. Losses occur 
through forgetfulness, displacement, and lack of 
initiative. The stolen goods will not be returned. 

3. Relatives are few. The subject will outlive 
his kindred. His journeys will be unfortunate. 
Letters will be delayed. 

4. The house will prove unfortunate. Mining and 
real estate investments will cause losses. The parent 
wiU not survive except to cause trouble. The end 
of life will be miserable. 

5. Children are denied. Love affairs prove 
unfortunate. Speculations will cause trouble and 
loss. There is no patrimony or inheritance. 

6. The health is afflicted. Servants are a source 

282 



SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 283 



of annoyance and trouble, and yet difficult to get 
rid of. The occupation is not profitable. 

7. Marriage is delayed. The wife is of a sickly 
nature. Contracts are fulfilled after delay only, and 
generally show a loss. The opponent is not likely 
to succeed except he takes much time to do so. 

8. Death is the result of a protracted illness. 
There will be no dowry. Legacies, if any, will be 
the occasion of trouble. 

9. The dream is unfortunate, denoting grief and 
loss. The voyage will not be successful, and may 
prove dangerous. Publication will prove successful 
only after a long time. The lawyer will cause 
disappointment. 

10. The credit will be secure but not large. The 
position steady. The preferment will not be 
obtained. Powerful but unpopular. 

11. Steadfast friends, but some bereavement. 
A friend inquired about is unhappy. The wish will 
not be granted at once, or if obtained will prove 
disappointing. 

12. Enemies are not numerous but persistent. 
The prisoner will be convicted. The secret will be 
kept. The confinement will prove unfortunate. 

8°8 Career h 

1. A short life. A cramped and impoverished 
nature; selfish and taciturn. 

2. Much poverty. The property will be lost, or 
hidden away. Goods will be confiscated or seized. 
Anything lost will be locked away. 



284 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



3. Restraint and even hatred among relations. 
The journey will be very unfortunate. Letters 
will be lost or detained. 

4. The house will be distrained upon. No value 
attaches to the estate. Minerals cannot be worked. 
The end of life will be in an asylum or other place 
of detention. There will be dissension with the 
parents. 

5. No children or those born will be very un- 
fortunate. Speculations will prove disastrous and 
may leave the person penniless. Love affairs will 
be secret and unfortunate. 

6. The sickness will be enduring. Servants will 
cause loss. Creature comforts will, be difficult to 
obtain. The occupation will be sedentary or much 
confined. 

7. There is no love between the partners in 
marriage. Contracts are broken. The opponent 
will be withheld or rendered powerless. 

8. The wife will have no dowry or it will be tied 
in trust or chancery. Death takes place obscurely, 
or by violence and in solitude. There will be no 
legacy. 

9. Exile; the traveller will not return. The 
^ yage will not be fortunate, and the ship may be 
stranded. The dream is very unfortunate, and 
denotes privation and suffering. Legal affairs 
cause loss. PubHcations will be quite unsuccessful. 

10. A bad master. No position, credit or esteem. 
Separation or estrangement from the parents. 

11. A paucity of friends. Loss of those associated. 



SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 285 



The wish will never be fulfilled. The advice is 
evil. 

12. Many enemies. Prisoners will be detained. 
The confinement will be dangerous and tedious. 
Affairs do not improve. There is no way out of 
difficulty. 

o 

i§ Laetitia L\. 

1. The health will be good. The person jovial, 
bright and winsome, pleasant and kind to ail. A 
long life. 

2. Financial affairs will be quite satisfactory. 
But expenses will be heavy. Things lost will be 
recovered. Prosperity will increase with time. 

3. Harmony will abound betw^een relatives, but 
they will die before the subject and be a source of 
benefit to him. Journeys will be more pleasant 
than profitable. The letter will be satisfactory 
and may cause merriment. 

4. The property will give adequate profits. Agree- 
ment and affection with the parents. Mining inter- 
ests and estate investments will be fairly successful, 
but not without commensurate expense. The end of 
life will show a competence and much happiness. 

.5. Children will be bright and happy and di^s;.- 
tinguished by their good qualities. A son will be 
born, who will be tall, fair, handsome and prosperous. 
There will be a moderate inheritance. Speculations 
will be satisfactory. Love affairs will proceed 
smoothly. The affection will be returned. 

6. Servants will be honest and devoted. The 



286 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



health will be good. The sickness will be soon over. 
Food and clothing will be adequate. The occupa- 
tion should be moderately remunerative. 

7. A handsome and well-endowed wife is shown. 
Contracts will be equitable and of profit. The 
opponent will be well equipped and qualified, and 
may win. 

8. The wife will have money by a legacy. You 
will have money left to you. The colleague is 
faithful but needs watching. 

9. The voyage will be bright and prosperous. 
The traveller is well and happy. The lawyer will 
prove satisfactory. The dream is auspicious and 
prognosticates joy. Publications will be successful. 

10. Honours will be attained. The position will 
be influential, and the credit good. High patronage. 
Good social standing. The parent lives to a good 
age and is respected. 

11. Many friends. Conviviality. The wish will 
be fulfilled. Associations more numerous than 
profitable. 

12. The enemy will become a friend. The prisoner 
will be liberated. The confinement brings happiness. 
Good fortune attends alienation or sequestration. 

o°o Acquisitio l\. 
1. The life will be long and flourishing. The 
person is of full stature and well developed ; fair 
complexion. The person will prevail by influence 
and means. Well-disposed but mindful of his own 
interests. 



SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 287 



2. Much wealth. You will gain. The goods will 
be found. Success in dealing with real estate, 
stocks and shares. 

3. Relatives will be well disposed and moderately 
fortunate. The letter will bring you benefit. The 
journey will be profitable. 

4. The parent will live long and be very prosperous. 
The property will extend and be very valuable. 
Mining interests will bring profit. The end of life 
will be very fortunate and highly prosperous. 

5. Few children, but those very fortunate. 
There will be an inheritance of considerable value. 
The speculation will be successful and profitable. 
Love affairs will succeed. 

6. The sickness will be a long and difficult one, 
due to congestion or surfeit. Servants will be a 
source of benefit. The occupation will be profitable. 
Creature comforts will be plentiful. 

7. A rich wife. Will probably marry again. 
The opponent will have means to pursue the suit 
and will gain the victory. Contracts will be highly 
profitable. 

8. A dowry is denoted. Legacies will be received. 
Colleagues are staunch and faithful. 

9. The voyage will be prosperous. The lawyer 
will be grasping but capable. The dream denotes 
gain and prosperity. The publication will be highly 
remunerative. 

10. High position; honours. Good credit. The 
parent will live long. The judge will be severe but 
just. 



288 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



IL Many and influential friends who will be a 
source of benefit. The wish will certainly be ob- 
tained. Profitable alliances and good advisers. 

12. The prisoner will be detained. The exile 
will not return. The confinement will be enduring 
but safe. 

o 

o°o Pmr f 

o -J 

1. Life of moderate length. Great energy, frank 
and open character, strong temper. Executive 
ability. A good soldier or pioneer. Subject to 
fevers and wounds. 

2. Good earning capacity and always busy, but 
not able to save money. Speculative and rash. 
Loss by theft or fire. The goods will not be recovered. 
Disputes on financial matters. 

3. Dangerous journey. An irritating letter. 
Quarrels with relatives. 

4. Property spoiled by fire or plunder. Mining 
interests of no profit. Disputes with a parent. The 
end of life unfortunate. 

5. No inheritance. Children will be male. 
Superior achievements among the progeny. Specu- 
lations hardly successful. Love affairs unfortunate 
and disputatious. 

6. The health suffers from a fever. Servants 
will be thievish. Creature comforts difficult to 
maintain. The occupation is in fire, iron or 
hardware. 

7. An unfortunate and short-lived wife. Disputes 
in marriage. Contracts only occasion strife and 



SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 289 



rivalry. The opponent is strenuous but hardly 
fortunate. 

8. Money by marriage ; a small legacy. The 
colleague is too venturesome. The death is due to 
violence, or poison by acids. 

9. Dangerous voyage. A dream denoting strife 
and loss. The lawyer is alert and active. There 
is no success abroad. 

10. Position attained by own efforts. Some 
scandal. The parent is fairl}^ long-lived but of 
contentious mind. Credit good. The judge will 
show asperity and hastiness. 

11. Friends will not be good counsellors. Dissen- 
sions occur with associates. The wish will come 
speedily if at all. 

12. The prisoner will be freed. The exile is in 
danger. The confinement will be hazardous and 
painful. The distress will be raised with loss. 

8 8 Rubeus ;J 

1. A short life and a dangerous one. Violent 
disposition, unscrupulous. Brusque and forceful 
manner. Ruddy complexion. 

2. Loss and difficulty in finance is shown. The 
goods will not be retrieved. Extravagance will 
result in need. The livelihood is precarious. 

3. Estrangement from relatives. A dang|prous 
journey and accidental. The letter will be disagree- 
able and offensive. 

4. The parent will not live long, and will be of 

u 



290 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



ill-disposed nature. Mining interests will fail. The 
house is in danger of fire or accident. Property 
will depreciate. 

5. Poor and ill-conditioned progeny. Dangerous 
liaisons or love affairs. Speculations very ruinous. 
No inheritance. 

6. Poor health. Deceitful servants. Needy sur- 
roundings. Arduous but ill-paid work. 

7. A bad wife of irregular habits. Contracts 
will not prove remunerative. The opponent will 
lose his case. 

8. There will be no doAvry. The death will be 
violent and ignominious. No legacy. The colleague 
is untrustworthy. 

9. The voyage will be highly dangerous. The 
dream is of sinister import. The lawyer is not to 
be trusted. The publication will fail. 

10. Without hope of a good position. Small 
credit. The parent is irascible and badly disposed. 
The judge will prove adverse. 

11. Friends are of low degree. Associates not 
advantageous. The wish will not be granted. 

12. Vindictive enemies. The prisoner will be 
punished. The confinement will be unfortunate 
and dangerous. The exile will not return. 

88 

o Fortuna Major Q 

1. A long life. Open, honest and fearless charac- 
ter. A tall fair person. Very fortunate and well 
beloved. 



SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 291 



2. The fortunes will be excellent. Riches. The 
lost goods will be recovered. 

3. The journey will be bright and prosperous. 
Relatives will be attached and noted for high 
accomplishments. The letter will be of pleasant 
import. 

4. The parent will enjoy long life and be distin- 
guished. Property will be increased and will gain 
in value. There will be gold found. The end of 
life will be brilliant. 

5. A rich inheritance. A son of great promise. 
Favours and high fortune in love affairs. Domestic 
and social felicity. Speculations are fortunate. 

6. Excellent health. The sick will recover 
quickly. The servant is loyal and faithful. There 
will be good fare and fine clothing. The occupation 
may be artistic, but in any case will be distinctive. 

7. A wealthy wife and one who is beautiful, but 
not very long-lived. The opponent will lose the 
suit or contest. Contracts will prove moderately 
profitable. 

8. A dowry is shown. A rich legacy. The 
colleague is faithful but proud. 

9. The voyage will be abundantly successful. 
The dream is most auspicious. The lawyer will be 
distinguished and capable. Publication will be 
highly successful. 

10. High honours. A title. Patronage of 
royalty. An excellent position. Sound credit. The 
parent will live to old age. The judge is perfectly 
honourable. 

U 2 



292 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



IL Friends not very wealthy but sincere and 
of good position. Advisers not fortunate in their 
advice. The wish will be granted, but not fully. 

12. The prisoner will be released. The exile will 
return. The enemy will be powerful. The confine- 
ment highly successful. 

8 8 Fortuna Minor Q 

1. Good vitality but some feverish ailments. 
A person of small stature but proud. Freckled or 
sunburnt complexion. 

2. Moderate means. Prodigality. Things lost 
will not be recovered. 

3. Unfortunate relatives. An unpleasant letter. 
The journey will not be very fortunate. 

4. There is nothing to sustain the value of property. 
The house is not fortunate. The parent is of short 
life. Mining interests are slow in development 
and expensive. The end of life will be moderately 
fortunate. 

5. A small family, mostly boys. The child to be 
born will be male. Love affairs are not fortunate, 
but honourable. Speculations will hardly be success- 
ful and at best but moderately so. There will be a 
meagre inheritance. 

6. The sick will continue so awhile. The health 
is indifferently good. The servant is honest but 
lax. Creature comforts will be moderately abund- 
ant. The occupation will be fairly remunerative 
and honourable. 



SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 293 



7. A happy marriage but not a rich one. Wife 
lives to middle years. The opponent is not very 
influential and the result is doubtful. Contracts 
will be carried through with difficulty. 

8. A small dowry. There will be a small legacy. 
The colleague is hardly reliable. 

9. The voyage is troublesome and not very for- 
tunate. The dream denotes vexation. The lawyer 
will be of quite moderate ability, but honest. The 
publication will hardly pay. 

10. Honours of minor degree, but position un- 
stable. Credit moderately good. The parent will 
soon die. The judge will be overbearing and 
censorious. 

11. Friends induce to bad effects. Associates 
are not profitable. The wish will be denied or 
very much delayed. 

12. The prisoner will continue in custody. The 
exile will not return. Enemies are numerous, but 
of low degree. The confinement will hardly be 
fortunate and will be protracted. 

Y Puella 9 

1. The life will be happy, peaceful and moderately 
long. A fair complexion, graceful and slim figure, 
grey or blue e^^es. 

2. Wealth will accumulate but much will be spent 
on pleasure and finery. Lost things will be restored. 
Gain by women and gaming. 

3. Sisters will be genial and kind. The letter 



294 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



will be pleasant and will contain an invitation. 
The journey will be safe and moderately fortunate. 

4. The parent will be beloved, and will live to 
moderately long years. The mine will contain 
silver or copper. The house will be advantageous 
and very pleasant. Property will increase. The 
end of life is happy. 

5. A small inheritance. Love affairs numerous 
and generally of good effect. Domestic happiness. 
Successful speculations. A girl is born. 

6. The health is weak and the patient in a bad way. 
Servants will be of irregular habits and bad charac- 
ter. Creature comforts adequate, but tending to 
depreciate and diminish. 

7. A beautiful and good wife. Contracts will be 
very profitable. The opponent is strong and has 
support from women of position. 

8. A small dowry soon expended. No legacy 
of significance. Death by poison. The colleague 
should not be trusted. 

9. The dream is very auspicious. The voyage 
will be bright and fortunate. The lawyer is capable 
and will be sincere. Publications will prosper. 

10. The position can be improved or ruined by 
women's influence. The parent is of sordid charac- 
ter. The credit is moderate only. 

11. Friends will be numerous and beneficial. 
The wish will be granted and will give pleasure. 
The associates are fairly fortunate. 

12. The prisoner will be set free. The exile is in 
great prosperity. The enemy will be a woman who 



SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 295 



is short and dark. The confinement will result 
favourably and be quite normal. 

o 

o'^o Amissio $ 

1. The person is of short life, ill-favoured in 
appearance, and distorted in character. 

2. There will be loss and squandering of money. 
Riches will diminish. The lost goods will not be 
recovered. Gaming and women will be the ruin 
of this person. 

3. Few and uncongenial relatives. The journey 
will be unfortunate. The letter will speak of loss 
or be the occasion of loss. 

4. The parent has a short life. Property will 
diminish. The house is unhealthy. Mining in- 
terests will be unfortunate and a dead loss. End 
of life penurious. 

5. No inheritance or one that is lost. Love 
affairs disappointing. Death or separation comes 
to the loved one. Speculations will be ruinous. 
Children, if they live, will be ill-favoured and de- 
formed. 

6. The health is bad. The patient will not re- 
cover. The servant will cause loss and trouble. 
There will be a lack of comforts. Occupation mean 
and unprofitable. 

7. The wife will soon die or will abscond. Con- 
tracts will cause loss. The opponent lacks means 
and will lose the case. 

8. No legacies, no dowry. A violent death, or 
by poison in the system. The colleague is despicable* 



296 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

9. The voyage is unfortunate and will be the causey 
of loss. The dream is unfortunate and denotes 
failing health and fortune. The lawyer will be 
extortionate and untrustworthy. 

10. Position of no importance, or ruined by 
women. No credit. The parent will die early. 
Dishonour. The judge will be adverse. 

11. Friends will be ruinous and dissolute. Advisers 
and associates of no value. The wish will be 
denied. 

12. The prisoner will perish. The exile is aban- 
doned to his fate. The confinement will be danger- 
ous and disappointing or abortive. The enemy is a 
low-minded and despicable woman. 

S 8 

o°o Alhus ^ 

1. A sprightly, active and intelligent person, 
talkative and a busybody. Li danger of an 
accident. Sharp-witted and cunning. 

2. Gain by trade or the use of the intellect. 
The goods lost may be recovered if followed up 
quickly. 

3. Relatives will be numerous but scattered. 
The journey will be successful but worrying. The 
letter is about business and will be satisfactory. 

4. The parent is weak and irritable. The house 
is not fortunate and very unsettled. Mining 
interests are not without prospects if well worked. 
Quicksilver or silver ore may be found. Property 
will be a contentious matter and will hardly increase. 
The end of life will be restless and unsettled. 



I SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 297 

5. No inheritance of value. Love affairs unsatis- 
factory. Progeny intelligent but few. Speculations 
not very fortunate and causing anxiety. 

6. The patient will recover. The health is good. 
Servants are industrious but inquisitive and 
talkative. A mercantile or clerical occupation. 
Commensurate creature comforts, food, clothing, 
etc. 

7. A good and industrious wife with some artistic 
faculty. The opponent will hardly sustain his 
cause. Contracts will prove mainly beneficial, but 
will require hard work and alacrity. 

8. Disputes will occur about legacies. A small 
dowry, if any, and that soon dissipated. The col- 
league is very acute and cunning. 

9. The voyage will not be fortunate. The dream 
is contentious and denotes quarrelling. The lawyer 
is not dependable. The publication will fail. 

10. The position is hardly assured. Honours 
attained with patience and industry. Credit, doubt- 
ful. The parent will live long but is very aloof. 
The judge will be stern and severe. 

11. Friends will be numerous and beneficial. 
The wish will be granted. Associations will lead 
to business and profit. 

12. The prisoner has no hope. The exile will 
never return. The enemy is a trifler and has no 
position or influence. The confinement will be 
unfortunate and anxious. The distraint will be 
withdrawn with loss to you. 



298 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

o o 

o^o Conjunctio g 

1. The person is of a subtile and crafty nature 
of mean appearance, small sharp features, imfoi 
tunate and dishonest. 

2. Gain by the sharp use of faculties ; but in dang( 
of spurious methods. The goods will not be found 
or returned. The financial prospects are hazardous 
and chiefly associated with litigation. 

3. Relatives will be inimical. The journey has 
its dangers but is fairly successful. The letter 
proposes a meeting or understanding. 

4. The parent is of low degree and of short life. 
The House is unfortunate. Mining prospects are 
hardly good, bringing disputes and anxiety. The 
end of life will be full of small troubles and anxieties. 

5. The child will be a girl. The progeny are few, 
well equipped and fairly fortunate. Speculations 
are not profitable. There will be no inheritance. 
Love affairs cause anxiety. 

6. The health is rather poor. The patient may 
recover with care and attention. Servants will be 
deceptive and gossiping. There will be anxiety as 
to the livelihood. 

7. The wife will be well-disposed and intelligent, 
but will not live long. The opponent will fail. 
The contract can hardly be made to pay. 

8. There will be no dowry, but disputes arise 
about the wife's money. No legacies, but quarrels 
over the goods of the dead. The colleague is beyond 
all trust, being crafty and deceitful. 



SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 299 



9. The voyage is very unfortunate. The dream 
denotes loss, trouble and disputation. The lawyer 
is not to be relied upon, and will seek to defraud. 
The pubHcation has no chance of success. 

10. The position is sustained by the use of the 
faculties, but there are no honours. The credit 
is indifferent and liable to be assailed. The judge 
is querulous and crotchet3^ The parent will be a 
source of trouble. 

11. Friends will be of little avail. The wish will 
not be attained. Associates are not the best ad- 
visers; they can well be fewer and better. 

12. The prisoner is condemned. The exile will 
remain in oblivion. The enemy is petty and 
vindictive. The confinement will be dangerous. 
Distraint is enforced with loss. 

§ ViaD 

1. The person is tall and slender and has a clear- 
spoken and direct manner. A long and successful 
life. 

2. Gain by new openings and enterprises. Good 
fortune. The lost goods will be recovered if followed. 

3. The journey will be successful and without 
delays. Relatives are few, but well disposed. The 
letter concerns a journey and will be fortunate. 

4. The parent is well favoured and will travel 
much. The house is fairly fortunate. The pro- 
perty will be cut up. Mining is fairly successful. 
Silver may be found in small quantity. The end 
of life will be unsettled and changeful. 



300 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



5. Love affairs will be moderately favourable. 
The child will be a male. Progeny few, but gifted. 
Speculations show small profits. There will be an 
inheritance for partition. 

6. The health is good. The patient will recover. 
The servant is useful and industrious. The liveli- 
hood will be assured. The occupation involves 
travelling. 

7. A good and capable wife. The opponent will 
lack support but will proceed successfully. Con- 
tracts will be carried through. 

8. Only a small dowry. A legacy will be secured. 
The colleague may be relied upon. 

9. The voyage is successful and smooth. The 
dream denotes a journey in store and a way out of 
difficulties. The laAvyer is master of his case. The 
publication will meet with a ready reception. 

10. The parent is unfortunate and of narrow 
views and close habits. Honours are attained. 
The credit is good. The judge will be impartial 
but impatient. 

1 1 . Friends will be fortunate. Associations profit- 
able. The wish will be granted. 

12. The exile will return. The prisoner will 
escape. The confinement will quickly be over. 
The enemy is a dark, slender woman. The distraint 
is effected. 

o o 

§§ PopuluS J) 

1. The person is fair, short and of full figure. 
Moderately long life. 



SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 301 



2. Changeful but increscent fortunes. Gain by 
public service or publicity in some capacity. The 
lost goods will be restored in part. 

3. Many relatives, but also many troubles with 
them. The journey is good. The letter is concern- 
ing a public affair, and is of good import. 

4. The parent is fortunate, but changeful. There 
will be gain from property. The house is fortunate. 
Mining interests will be supported. The end of 
life will be by the sea or in the midst of an assembly. 

5. The child will be female. Love affairs fickle 
and uncertain. Speculations fairly successful. A 
small inheritance which will be divided. 

6. The health will be uncertain and changeful. 
A dropsical affection. The patient is in danger of 
a relapse. The servant is not dependable. The 
occupation is connected with the public and is 
precarious. The livelihood is uncertain. 

7. The wife will be good looking and pleasant, 
but fickle. The opponent will have public sympathy, 
but will hardly succeed. Contracts more numerous 
than profitable. 

8. A legacy is lost, but disputes and falls into 
Chancer}^ No dowry. The colleague is vacillat- 
ing and inconstant. Death by drowning or in a 
public place. 

9. The voyage will be fairly fortunate. The 
dream denotes publicity and increase. The lawyer 
is too much occupied and cannot be relied upon. 
The publication will become popular. 

10. The position is unstable and the credit 



302 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



doubtful. Honours may be achieved by public ai 
or recognition. The parent is unfortunate, short 
lived and very restless. The judge will be controUe 
by public opinion. 

11. Friends more numerous than useful or depend 
able. Associates will change with circumstances 
The wish will be granted at the full of the moon. 

12. The prisoner will be released by petition o 
not at all. The exile will come back to his country 
The distraint will not be effected. The confinemen 
will be difficult but safe. The enemy is a short 
stout and fair woman, a great busybody. 

f Caput ^ 

1. The person is tall and fair; of fortunate an 
honest nature; a good organizer. Long life. 

2. Abundant means. Gain by initiative and th 
use of the faculties. The lost things will be recovered 

3. Fortunate relatives and well-disposed. Th 
journey will be successful. The letter makes 
proposal and is of good import. 

4. The parent is fortunate and long-lived. The 
property is good. The house is desirable. The mines 
will yield well and will be extended. The end of 
life will be highly fortunate. 

5. The child will be a male. Progeny will be 
highly fortunate. Love affairs will prosper. The 
speculation is sure to be successful. There will be 
a rich inheritance. 

6. The health is good. The patient will recover 
quickly. The servant will be faithful and trust- 



SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 303 



worthy. Livelihood is well assured and abundant. 
The occupation may be medical and will be fortunate. 

7. A good marriage, but bereavement; and more 
than one marriage is denoted. The opponent will 
be powerful and a man to be feared. Contracts 

I will be profitable. 

8. A rich dowry. Certain legacies. The colleague 
is capable and will benefit you. Death by snake or 

i insect bite or poison. 
9. The voyage will be highly fortunate. The 
dream denotes success and a new opening. The 
lawyer will do himself credit and benefit you. 
The publication will be well received. 

10. Certain honours. High patronage. Good 
credit. The parent is long-lived but impulsive and 
headstrong. The judge will be impartial and just 
and inclining to a good cause. 

11. Faithful and good friends. Honourable asso- 
ciations. The highest wish will be obtained. 

12. The prisoner will be pardoned. The exile 
( will return quickly. The confinement will be for- 
tunate and safe. The enemy will be active and 
persistent. 

o 

o°o Cauda ^ 

1. A short life and a miserable one. The person 
is of poor aspect and mean disposition, crabbed and 
vindictive. 

2. Poor estate. A competence earned with diffi- 
culty. Failing fortunes. The goods will not be 
recovered. 



304 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



3. Few relatives and those distant or unsympa- 
thetic. The journey will be highly dangerous and 
may be fatal. The letter concerns a departure 
and is unfortunate. 

4. The parent dies early. The property is of 
no value. The mine will not yield anything. The 
house is fateful and may be demolished. The end 
of life is miserable. 

5. The child will die at birth. The progeny will 
be few and ill-favoured. There will be no inherit- 
ance. Speculations will ruin you. The beloved 
will die or become as dead to you. 

6. The health is very bad, the excretory system 
is imperfect. The patient cannot recover. The 
servant is wholly undesirable and will be a source 
of great danger. The livelihood is poor. The 
occupation is menial and undesirable, or yet 
nefarious. 

7. The wife will be ill-disposed and violent, or 
there may be no hope of marriage at all. The 
opponent has no chance of success. Contracts 
will never be completed but to your ruin. 

8. No dowry but an extravagant wife. Legacies 
are very remote from you. The death will be a 
violent one. The colleague is malicious and to be 
avoided entirely. 

9. The voyage will be fatal. The dream portends 
dire distress and trouble. The lawyer will fail to 
pursue his case. The publication is a dead 
failure. 

10. The parent is shortlived and of ill repute. 



SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 305 



Honours are distant and beyond your reach. The 
credit is assailed and cannot be upheld. The judge 
will be malicious and will exceed his functions. 

11. Friends will prove ruinous and a cause of 
danger. Associations unprofitable. The wish is 
denied . 

12. The prisoner will perish if he does not escape. 
The exile will never return. The enem}^ is very 
malicious. The confinement will be extremely 
dangerous. 

The foregoing interpretations are due to the signifi- 
cation of each of the symbols in the Twelve Houses, 
and will apply to all questions which are proper to 
each House. Judgment is not, however, to be made 
from the smgle position, but must also take into 
account the duplicated or repeated positions, the 
witnesses and the judge. Observe that the 13th 
symbol is the witness for the inquirer or consultant ; 
the 14th for the opponent; the judge is impartial 
and is related to the 10th House, while the 16th 
symbol is the final appeal and is the end of the 
matter, as denoted by the 4th House to which it is 
related. Any question can be answered by relating 
it to its proper House (see " Astrology," Part I), 
and observing what symbol falls in that House, 
how it is sustained by the witnesses, or reflected 
in other parts of the figure, and what the judge may 
determine. 

The Geomantic art is by rlo means an easy one 
except to those versed in the nature and significa- 



306 A IVIANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



tion of the symbols, the Houses, and the planetary 
affinities. 

Some attempt has been made by Agrippa and 
others to introduce the signs of the Zodiac into the 
Geomantic scheme, but the evident disagreement 
between the various methods submitted clearly 
shows that they form no part of a coherent tradition. 
It will be found in practice that the signs normal to 
the Houses can be presumed with satisfactory results; 
the 1st House and Aries, the 2nd and Taurus, and 
so on, being the foundation of the true Geomantic 
figure, the modifications being, of course, due to 
the symbols which fall into them. 

The root nature of the symbols should be known, 
for many of them are capable of considerable 
variation of meaning, according to the Houses they 
faU in, the corresponding signs, and the nature 
of the question to be resolved. 

Root Meanings of the Symbols, 

Career. — A prison. Denotes privation, confine- 
ment, restriction, inaction. It corresponds to ^ . 

Tristitia. — Sorrow. Denotes grief, disappoint- 
ment, bereavement, condemnation. It is of the 
nature of \ . 

Laetitia. — Joy. Denotes joviality, success, laugh- 
ter, good health, and confidence. It corresponds 
to 4. 

Acquisitio. — Obtaining. Denotes gain, achieve- 
ment, success, fulfilment and expansion. It corre- 
sponds to ^.. 



SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 307 



Puer. — A boy. Denotes impulse, ardour, zeal, 
impetuosity and energy. Corresponds to 6. 

Rubeus. — Redhead. Denotes a rash, passionate 
and fiery nature; accidents, violence. It corre- 
sponds to 6 . 

Fortuna Major. — Great fortune. Denotes success, 
honours, illumination and protection. It corre- 
sponds to the Sun 0. 

Fortuna Minor. — Lesser fortune. Denotes the 
above in less degree; benefits conferred rather than 
attained. Corresponds to 0. 

Puella. — A girl. Denotes pleasure, gaiety, bright- 
ness, things that are pretty and sweet, attractive 
but elusive schemes, a promise but not a certain 
fulfilment. It corresponds to $ . 

Amissio. — Loss. Denotes bereavement, reversal, 
expenditure, loss (whether of faculty, position, 
money, etc., according to its House), and is un- 
fortunate. It corresponds to ? . 

Alhus. — White head. Denotes intelligence, ex- 
perience, wisdom, judgment, and is fortunate, of 
the nature of ^. 

Conjunctio. — Union. Denotes combination, coun- 
sel, coming together, support, partnership, marriage. 
It is good or bad according to the House-sign 
with which it is associated in the figure. Of the 
nature ^. 

Via. — A way, or road. Denotes a passage or 
way through, an entrance and exit, a direct course, 
a means to an end, connections, singleness, com- 
munication. Of the nature of the New Moon. 



308 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 

Populus. — People. Denotes a mass, swelling, 
gathering together, a crowd, plurality, the tide of 
opinion. It is fortunate and of the nature of the 
Full Moon. 

Caput. — ^The head. Denotes entering in, accession, 
increase, ascending, acquiring and absorbing. Of 
the nature of the Dragon's Head or Moon's Ascend- 
ing Node ^. 

Cauda. — The tail. Denotes going out, recession, 
decrease, descending, losing and relinquishing. Of 
the nature of the Dragon's Tail or Moon's Descending 
Node 15. 

The Pairs 

It will be observed that the sixteen symbols are 
brought into relations as eight pairs of opposites. 
Thus : 

Acquisitio and Amissio. 
Laetitia Tristitia. 
Puer Puella. 
Albus Rubeus. 
Fortuna Major Fortuna Minor. 
Caput Cauda. 
Populus Via. 
Conjunctio Career. 

These " pairs of opposites," which are at the root 
of the ancient Chinese system of Geomancy, have 
no relation to the natures of the respective planets 
involved, or the signs or Houses ruled by them, but 
they are founded upon the natural antithesis of 



SYMBOLS IN THE TWELVE HOUSES 309 



certain spiritual principles which begin with the 
yin and the yang, the dark and light sides of the 
manifested universe, and extend to all the relation- 
ships of the cosmic elements. Those who would 
pursue the subject should take in hand the text 
of the Yih King with the commentary by Con- 
fucius, who said of this great work that if he lived 
to one hundred years he would devote thirty to 
the study of it. What has filtered through to 
the Occident is a simple but practical system 
of Geomancy which I have here attempted to 
display. 



CHAPTER XII 



PSYCHOMETRY 

The trained occultist is capable not only of mani- 
festing intense psychic activity under the direction 
of his will, but also on occasion of maintaining a 
perfect passivit}^ which enables him to receive and 
register impressions of a subtile nature from the 
external world and to give free play to the sub- 
conscious side of the mind-sphere. 

The psychometric sense is that by which we 
receive impressions coming to us imperceptibly 
through the sense-organs. The functions of this 
sense imply not only the existence of a subtile aura 
attaching to every material object, but also the 
ability to perceive the effects produced in ourselves 
by attention to the auric emanations of such objects. 

The occultists affirm the existence of an aura to 
every solar system, to every planet of that system, 
and to every person or thing upon that planet. 
This aura is a plastic sensitized medium of an 
etheric nature which interpenetrates and extends 
beyond every material body. It is the storehouse 
of every experience attaching to the body it is 
related to. A piece of rock will thus preserve 
to us not only the record of the earth of which it is 
a part, but also the individual record of its detached 

310 



PSYCHOMETRY 



311 



existence; and this will be the case with every 
minutest particle, in less degree of intensity, of 
any body whatsoever. The greater the mass the 
stronger will be the auric emanation. In the case 
of the molecule, the aura would seem to correspond 
with the heat-sphere; but unlike the aura, the 
size of the heat- sphere will depend on the elasticity 
of the atoms composing it, and this again on the 
activity of its electrons. 

The aura which surrounds the earth has been 
called Alkahest, " the Astral Light," and the 
Memoria Mundi. It is the universal library of 
fact and fiction to which every sensitive, every 
writer, every inventor, every occultist, has conscious 
or unconscious access. Not only does it contain 
the record of all that has happened in the world, 
but also all the thoughts that have been projected 
from men's minds, and all the plots and schemes 
and glorious ideals which have found place in the 
imaginations of sinners and saints the world over. 
This recording film, this cinemato-phonograph, is 
capable of reproducing its records or rather we are 
capable of perceiving them, wherever the faculty 
of clairvoyance or clairandience is developed to a 
sufficient degree to be able to penetrate beyond the 
riot of auric emanations by which we are continually 
and immediately surrounded. But even without 
either clairvoyant or clairaudient faculty, we may 
contact this emanation by the Psychometric sense. 

It is inferred from the conditions under which 
Psychometry is practised that the range of this 



312 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



sense is not comparable with that of either " clear " 
seeing or hearing. In the exercise of the faculty it 
is necessary to have some object such as a letter, 
a lock of hair, a glove, belonging to the person 
concerning whom inquiry is made. 

This object is then held for a short while between 
the hands of the psychometrist or " Passive " 
and sometimes it is raised to the level of the forehead 
and placed between the eyes. 

If the Passive is sufficiently sensitive to get en 
rapport with the subject, there will arise before 
the mind's eye a series of pictures or scenes, or yet 
only vague apperceptions of form, colour, distance, 
locality, time, etc. These must nevertheless be at 
once communicated byword of mouth to a Recorder, 
however detached and irrelevant they may appear. 
The mind of the Passive must be kept entirely free 
from speculation, reasoning or guessing. If the 
automatic facult}^ is allowed free play it will inevit- 
ably lead to correct impressions after it has been 
allowed a certain amount of free exercise. 

\^Tien it is considered how seldom in daily life 
this subconscious self is allowed to function, it is 
hardly to be wondered at that a faculty which has 
lain dormant since childhood should, upon being 
aroused by the will, take occasion in the first place 
to stretch its limbs and gather its forces. Give it 
opportunity and time in which to carry out the 
behests of the Will, and it undoubtedly will prove 
itself a faithful servant. 

The psychometric sense is in all respects analogous 



PSYCHOMETRY 



313 



to that exercised by the passive seer in the act of 
crystal-gazing or "scrying"; only it does not 
necessarily or generally extend to vision, but rests 
in a certain apperception or " impression " which 
takes no definite mental form. 

There are, moreover, certain difficulties always 
to be encountered in the exercise of psychometry. 
" Clouding " may result from a state of incomplete 
rapport, which does not always rest in the degree 
of sensitiveness enjoyed by the Passive. It may 
well be due to the fact that the glove or article 
submitted for contact has not sufficiently strong 
associations with the person to whom it belongs. A 
letter, for instance, has frequently but slender 
association with the writer of it, while it is saturated 
through and through with the magnetism of the 
recipient owing to its having been long carried about 
by him. 

" Overlapping " may arise from cross-influences, 
as when an article, long in the possession of one 
person, is given as a memento or keepsake to another, 
and then is submitted for contact b}^ the Passive. 
In such case the whole of the later associations have 
to be waded through and obliterated from the test 
before the information sought concerning the original 
possessor can be arrived at. Meanwhile, the 
psychometric sense is becoming tired and blunted 
in its perception, so that little that is to the actual 
point of inquiry may be elicited at first. In a second 
or third test from the same article the familiar 
surface ground will be traversed more speedily and 



314 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



there is then every likelihood of a satisfactory 
conclusion. 

Obliquity " may very easily result from the 
error of apptying remarks concerning one set of 
impressions to the wrong person. Thus if I go to a 
Passive to make an inquiry about a person named A, 
and take with me an article which was at one time 
in A's possession, but has some time been held b 
me, the Passive may very well be voicing some 
valuable information about myself while I am erron- 
eously trying to apply it to the subject of my inquiry, 
namely A. Until therefore the Passive has given 
some unmistakable indication that he or she is 
on the track of the actual point of inquiry, care 
must be exercised in the interpretation or application 
of any remarks that may be made. 

It is usually found that the best results are obtain- 
able under conditions of complete isolation both 
physical and mental. If the mind of the Passive 
is troubled about his own affairs or is labouring under 
the least degree of physical discomfort, there will 
be a surface-ripple or superficial disturbance of the 
mind-sphere which will effectually prevent the 
Passive from getting down to those still, mysterious 
depths of consciousness in which the secrets of the 
ages lie hidden. 

" Misinterpretation " may occur in cases where 
the clairvoyant faculty lends itself to the psycho- 
metric and evolves a symbolic figure by way of 
expression. 

Thus I was once asked to psychometrize an 



PSYCHOMETRY 



315 



envelope taken haphazard from a packet of papers 
then in the possession of Colonel Olcott at Madras. 
On applying the envelope to my forehead I was 
presently affected with a sense of distance and some 
degree of giddiness. The inference was that I was 
in contact with conditions which implied estrange- 
ment, loss or obscuration, and* that the position 
referred to was an elevated one either physically or 
spiritually. Following on this immediate perception 
I saw a black vault like an ebon sky in which flamed 
a comet. This passed away and nothing more was 
seen or sensed. I suggested that the comet was a 
stranger to the system, implying a person of wander- 
ing habits, one who had distinctive merits or a 
certain celebrity — a possible " cjniosure for wander- 
ing eyes.'' And then comet — from Latin coma, the 
hair — was there an}^ suggestion there ? Assuredly 
there was, for on disclosure I saw that the envelope 
contained a lock of black hair which I was told 
was that of Damodar K. Mavalankar, a young 
student of Occultism, who had been fired with an 
ambition to go to Tibet and who last was heard of 
from Darjeeling before crossing into Tibet. In- 
voluntarily there sprang to m}^ mind the words of 
Tennyson : " And some of them have followed 
wandering fires, lost in the quagmire." In some few 
minds there still lingers a belief — or it may be only a 
hope — that the pilgrim will one day return. 

Another instance of a more direct sensing owing 
to the illumination of the sjnubolic element, was 
afforded me by a lady who had an eye to the value 



316 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



of test conditions. This lady handed me a box of 
some three inches cube, wrapped around with a 
paper which was tied and sealed. On holding this 
in my hands I presently perceived a wide flowing 
landscape of undulating fields on which were cattle 
grazing. I remarked with interest that the}^ were 
of milky whiteness. On the neck of one of superior 
proportions a bell was hanging. I heard this bell 
ring, and from that point I gathered no other im- 
pressions save that the country to which this 
scene belonged was Greece. 

On opening the package at request, I found it 
to contain the box first mentioned, and within, 
secure^ packed and stuffed with soft paper— the 
identical cow-bell of which I had received both 
clairvoyant and clairaudient impression ! 

Providing the student is willing to be perfectly 
honest with himself and frank with others, there is 
nothing that should prevent him from acquiring 
a mass of first-hand evidence of the existence and 
exercise of this psychometric faculty. 

I would particularly recommend a reading of 
Denton's The Soul of Things as being one of the 
earliest and most convincing of the many works 
extant dealing with this subject. i 

Dowsing 

The psychometric sense is very clearly displayed 
in the process of water-finding by means of the 
hazel-rod, called " Dowsing." The following account 



PSYCHOMETRY 317 



of some successful experience of this sort will prove 
of interest. 

" A few weeks ago," says the Westminster Budget 
of December 1893, " there took place some opera- 
tions with the divining-rod by Mr. S tears, of Hull, 
who was called to Mr. S. Campion's farm at East 
Hesluton, near Malton, to search for a water supply. 
At that time he marked two places near the farm- 
house where, he said, the presence of water was 
indicated by the rod. Since then Mr. E. Halliday, 
plumber, of Malton, has bored an artesian well at 
one of the places indicated and found a plentiful 
supply of water at a depth of 87 feet, after going 
through sand, clay and a bed of what Mr. Halliday 
says is quartz and lead ore. Mr. Campion, who 
was previously without a supply of pure water, is 
delighted with the results of the visit of the diviner, 
and has faith in the power of the rod. These and 
other experiments were conducted in the presence 
of Julia Lady Middleton, the Hon. Geoffrey and 
Mrs. Dawnay, Lord Middleton 's agent, and others. 
Mr. Stears also claims to be able to locate minerals 
as well as water, and affirms that not one person in 
ten thousand can use the rod successfully." 

I do not know how Mr. Stears arrives at his figures, 
and I do not suppose that one person in ten thou- 
sand has ever attempted to employ the faculty. 
As a fact well within the experience of students of 
Occultism, and fully illustrated nearly a century ago 
in a book called Welton's Rod, it serves but to 
enforce the fact that the divinatory faculty extends 



818 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



to all the senses, including that of sight, that of 
hearing, of smell, of touch, and even, as here, the 
nervous sense of feeling, which is not the same as 
touch, but is an auric sense extending over a very 
wide area. 

As yet, however, the majority of people are 
oblivious of the fact that such psychic faculties 
exist, and even those who possess them and have 
them in something like working order are conscious 
of having but little control over them. The func- 
tions of the higher senses are as yet imperfectly 
understood. Every sense has its octave, but 
the involuntary functioning of any " sense octave " 
is apt to be regarded as a sign of insanity by those 
who have no knowledge of the psychic faculties. 
Even genius has been related to insanity and 
Lombroso and Nordau have sought to prove genius 
is often a form of insanity. It should rather be 
regarded as an exaltation of faculty which relates 
its subject to a plane of consciousness removed from 
one's normal experience by some degrees. Thus 
while new centres of activity are being opened up, 
and are as yet under imperfect control, whole areas 
of the brain are left in neglect. Hence, to the casual 
observer, genius is not distinguishable from some 
incipient forms of insanity. The eccentricity of 
genius is one of the most significant indications of 
the functioning of the subconscious part of the 
mind. In just the same way the opening up of 
new centres of activity in the psychic nature of man 
is frequently attended by temporary loss of control 



PSYCHOMETRY 



319 



over the normal brain functions. Loss of memory 
(amnesia), hysteria, absent-mindedness, unconscious 
utterance of one's thoughts, illusions and hallucina- 
tions, irritability, indifference to one's surroundings, 
spasmodic muscular actions and similar eccentri- 
cities, are among the products which signalize the 
evolution of the newly-acquired psychic facult3^ 
These s^'mptoms will, however, subside as soon as 
the new faculty has been established. Nature is 
jealous of her offspring, and all her forces are con- 
centrated in the process of generation. The abnor- 
malities incident to the period of gestation clearly 
prove this. Once her end is attained, however, 
she resumes her normal functions. Those who aim 
at the development of psychic faculties must there- 
fore be prepared to pay toll to Nature, according 
gladly whatever she demands by way of tribute. 
" The universe is thine. Take what thou wilt, but 
pay the price." 

And what is the price of seership, of the divinatorj^ 
faculty, of any of these superior gifts of Nature ? 
What is it worth to oneself ? That is the price we 
may be expected to pay. 



CHAPTER XIII 



DREAMS 

According to the Yoga Philosophy of India, 
the states of consciousness are primarily threefold : 
(1) JagratUy or waking consciousness; (2) Svapna, or 
sleeping consciousness; and (3) Sushupti, or spiritual 
consciousness. That which is normal to the dream- 
life is svapna. It is convenient to regard the ego 
or conscious individual as a thread (sutrdtma, the 
thread-soul, as the Hindus call it), upon which is 
a bead representing the centre of consciousness. 
If the thread be divided into three coloured sections, 
we shall then have the three planes of life upon 
which the centre of consciousness can function. 
In the present instance we are concerned with the 
middle stage or plane, that of dream-life. There is 
a neutral or nodal point separating each of these 
stages of consciousness from that above it. As 
regards the mass of people, the jagrata, or waking 
consciousness, is the norm. But in mystics and 
visionaries the svapna, or dream-consciousness, is 
the norm, and just as the ordinary, matter-of-fact 
person passes in sleep from jagrata to svapna, so the 
visionary to whom svapna is normal, passes in sleep 
to sushupti. 

320 



DREAMS 



321 



This being understood as the concomitant result 
of variety of evolution or individual development as 
distinguished from mere intellectual accomplishments, 
we may next consider the nature and cause of sleep 
and then pass to a study of dreams, their nature and 
significance. 

During the activity of the body during the day 
every muscular action, every mental effort, is followed 
by the breaking down of a number of minute cells 
all of which discharge their vital contents into the 
system. This vital content of the cell is called in 
the Yoga philosophy prdna. It is like an electrical 
charge. So long as it remains in the cell it can be 
used and directed at will in the form of a current 
of energy, but when the cell is broken up the force 
is dissipated into the free ether of space, and goes 
to swell the sum total of latent energy in the world. 
When this process of breaking down has gone on in the 
system for some time, the body is flooded with the 
vital principle, and if this were to go on to any great 
extent, disease and death would be the inevitable 
result. Vitality is not to be measured by the amount 
of the prdna in the body, but by the amount of 
it we have under our control. There is a good 
deal of life in a putrid carcase, but none of it is 
co-ordinated or under control. 

For the purpose of reabsorbing the vitality and 
repairing the cellular structure of the exhausted 
battery, Nature has provided that exhaustion shall 
be followed by sleep ; as day is followed by night and 
summer by winter. When the powers of recupera- 

Y 



322 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



tion become impaired, when this subtile Archseus 
passes beyond our power of automatic refreshing 
then age and disease begin to assert them 
selves. 

Ad rem. — We sleep because we are exhausted 
we awake because we are refreshed. When we ar 
asleep we dream, because the immortal soul of us 
that which we call the Man (manas, or mind 
never sleeps, since it is never exhausted, and th 
transference of its activity and of its dual function 
to a higher or more interior plane of consciousnes 
is the cause of dreaming. 

Of what nature, then, are dreams ? Obviousl 
they are only the perceptions of the soul in it 
middle or twilight state of consciousness. Dream 
land is shadow-land, neither darkness nor pur 
light, but a chiaroscura of mingled perceptions 
Dreams are primarily of three kinds : — 

(1) Those which arise as memories of the wakin 
state of consciousness; (2) those which have thei 
origin in the current changes of thought and feelin 
taking place in the dreaming state; and (3) thos 
which descend as illuminations from the superio 
plane of spiritual consciousness. 

These three kinds of dreams may be called th 
memory dream, the phantastic dream, and the clear 
dream. They are related to the physical, psychic 
and spiritual principles in man. 

The transition from one stage to another is calle 
mutation, and the sleeping condition is then know 
as the higher or lower mutative sleep. The follow 



DREAMS 



323 



ing diagram shows the various stages of conscious' 
ness : — 




Every kind of dream is in some measure illumina- 
tive, for even though the dream may consist entirely 
of our memory-products, it is the selective faculty 
of the soul which, taking a little here and a little 
there, fashions the fabric of a dream and builds up 
the mosaic from the multitude of detached experi- 
ences. The dream thus presented to the mind 



324 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



is reflective of a state of existence which is interior 
to that of the waking perception and to that extent 
instructive to it. Excessive or indiscreet feeding 
will cause disturbed dreams, nightmare and a sense 
of oppression, and this instructs us that even though 
mind forms matter, it is certain that matter condi- 
tions mind, and that undigested or unassimilated 
food, which would hardl}- trouble the wakeful mind, 
becomes a source of impediment to the soul that 
would willingly spread its wings were it not hindered 
and restrained by its care for the body. A good 
tenant cannot go away upon a holiday leaving his 
house in disorder, for should he do so it would be a 
constant source of anxiety to him. It is right that 
he should find it clean-swept and garnished at such 
time as he would again take possession. 

The greater number of dreams are of this psycho- 
physiological nature and origin, and must chiefly 
be interpreted in relation to the body or those mun- 
dane events which bear upon the immediate personal 
interests of the dreamer. 

Dreams that are disconnected from the physical 
senses are in the nature of soul images, for the 
soul thinks in symbols and understands by natural 
interior perception of their significance. Hence, 
frequently the allegorical or symbolic dream carries 
with it to the waking perception a sense of its true 
significance. All true dreams can be interpreted 
by natural correspondence, and anybody who is 
versed in symbology, not as an archaeological science 
but as a soul-language, can interpret dreams. 



DREAMS 



325 



But in order to apply such interpretations to the 
individual dreamer it is necessary to know to what 
order in the sidereal world such individual may 
belong. In so far as the individual is reflected 
in the horoscope of birth by means of his physical 
persona, it becomes possible to use the astrological 
key for the interpretation of dreams. 

To many people flowers mean sickness, while to 
others they signify jo}^ and festivity. A probable 
explanation of this difference lies in the fact that 
certain persons are in the habit of being visited 
with gifts of flowers during illness, and there is 
hence an associated idea of flowers and sickness; 
while others not so fortunately placed as to be 
recipients of floral condolences have only associated 
flowers with the brightest days of their lives, for 
flowers belong to the summer days and to the 
country, where leisure and rest are usually sought. 

In similar manner names have a distinct signi- 
ficance when closely associated with events of our 
waking life . Thus I know a lady to whom any name 
with the syllable nor in it is disastrous; and 
" Normanhurst " was lost by her through an un- 
fortunate financial crisis; " Norma " was the name 
of a fine pedigree St. Bernard dog that died from 
pneumonia brought on by careless exposure while 
the animal was with the veterinary surgeon ; "Norsa" 
was the name of a ship christened by her which 
went down on its first voyage; "Norland" was 
the name of a place in which her child was rendered 
speechless through a faU ; and I regard this as 



326 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



sufficient reason why, without being able to ascribe 
any reason for her prejudice, the name of Nora 
puts her on the defensive whenever she meets a 
person of that name. The soul in the dream-state 
instinctively surrounds itself with the images of 
those things, their forms, colours, names, which 
in waking experience have been associated with 
happiness whenever its interior state is a happy one ; 
and, on the contrary, when its unclouded perception 
of the future is fraught with prognostics of evil 
import, it throws down upon the brain of the sleeping 
personality the images of such things as, within 
the experience of that personality, are associated 
with danger or hurt to mind, body or estate. 
With such soHcitude does the soul watch over its 
physical instrument that it will forewarn it of any 
danger that is likely to befall it providing the 
conditions for conveying and registering such a 
message are present. 

Similarly the Spirit of Man watches over its 
Psyche, or female counterpart, and in clear dreaming 
conveys to it that degree of spiritual instruction or 
admonition which it is capable of receiving or of 
which it has present need. 

This Spirit has its own imperishable vehicle, the 
solar body, into which the soul or lunar body is 
merged after the death of the physical. The 
solar body is called the " golden bowl," the holy 
grail; the lunar body or thread-soul is called the 
" silver cord," and the physical body is called 

the pitcher " and the vessel of clay. Thus in 



DREAMS 327 

Ecclesiastes we read : " And desire shall fail, because 
man goetli to his long home, and the mourners go 
about the streets : or ever the silver cord be loosed, 
or the golden bowl be broken, or the pitcher be 
broken at the fountain." 

These things are necessary to be known before we 
can attempt to regulate our knowledge concerning 
the nature and origin of dreams. 

The symbolism of dreams has therefore a three- 
fold application : a material, a psychic, and a 
spiritual or mental. We call that spiritual which 
arises in the mind from the illumination of the 
spirit, that psychic which arises from the 
emotions, and that physical which has its origin 
in material experiences. The spiritual dream is 
distinguished from the psychic by its being 
unattended by any degree of emotion as doubt, 
anxiety, trouble or fear; but only a sense of great 
beatitude, the mind being detached from the 
vision and regarding it as a magnificent spectacle. 
The psychic dream, on the contrary, is attended 
by a distinct emotional disturbance, and if the 
dreamer does not actually take an active part in 
the scene as one of the dramatis personce, it at 
least identifies itself sympathetically with one of 
the actors and experiences by repercussion just as 
much as if it were taking an active part. What a 
mother feels for her child in joy or sorrow, in pleasure 
or in pain, the Psyche feels for the images of its 
creation, for they are indeed its children. It is 
^ rare, but nevertheless certain, fact that men 



328 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



experience in their physical bodies that which they 
have been dreaming. Thus I have recently read of 
a man who dreamed that he was lying upon the 
sands exposed to a burning sun, and on awaking 
he continued to experience the burning sensation 
in his face, and going to the mirror discovered to 
his vast astonishment that his face was actually 
and most thoroughly sunburnt. This phenomenon 
is known as astral repercussion. 

I once saw the wraith of a living person walk into 
the room where I was sitting in company with 
others, and it was observed that the wraith, which 
appeared in all respects a figure of flesh and blood 
and properly clothed, knocked his head against 
the projecting corner of a wardrobe and instantly 
disappeared in thin air. The next morning the 
person whose wraith we had seen appeared with 
his eye bandaged up and explained that he had 
a bruised swelling and must have been stung in 
the night by a mosquito. We, however, told him a 
different story. 

Paracelsus says : " Artists and students have 
frequently obtained instruction in their dreams 
regarding things which they desired to learn. The 
imagination was thus free and commenced to 
work its wonders. It attracted to it the Evestra 
of some philosophers, and they communicated their 
knowledge to them. 

" Such occurrences frequently take place, but it 
often happens that part of that which is communi- 
cated is forgotten on awaking to the outer world. 



DREAMS 



329 



In such case it is necessary to observe strict silence, 
not to speak to anybody, nor to leave the room, 
nor take any note of things ; but to eat nothing 
and remain still ; and after a while we shall remember 
the dream." 

I have found that if, on awaking frorq. a dream 
part of which is obscure or forgotten, I continue 
in the same position, keeping my eyes closed to all 
external things, and then go over the dream in my 
imagination, the missing part is generally restored, 
as if I had dreamed the dream all over again. 
Every one knows how readily a disturbing dream 
may be dispelled by changing the position of the 
body. It is sometimes more convenient to change 
the position of the mind. 

" The astral life," says a weU-known occultist, 

is most active in man during his sleep. The 
sidereal (solar) man is then awake and acts through 
the evestrum (or astral body), causing occasionally 
prophetic dreams, which the person will remember 
on awaking. But there are also elusive dreams, 
caused by other influences, and man must therefore 
use his reason and discrimination to distinguish 
the true from the false." 

But, according to Paracelsus, " There may be 
more reliance placed in dreams than in the revela- 
tions of the necromantic art; because the latter 
are usually false and deceptive, and although the 
element als which use the astral bodies of the dead 
on such occasions will give correct answers to 
questions and often confirm their assertions with 



330 A IVIANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



oaths, yet no implicit confidence can be placed in 
what they say because they do not wish to speak 
the truth nor are they able to speak it. 

" Therefore the patriarchs, prophets and saints 
preferred visions and dreams to any other method 
of divination. . . . Supernatural dreams take 
place at times among the present generation, but 
only the wise pay any attention to them. Others 
treat them with contempt, although such dreams 
are true and do not deceive. 

" There are some people whose natures are so 
spiritual and their souls so exalted that they can 
approach the highest spiritual sphere when their 
bodies are asleep. . . . Dreams, visions and 
omens are gifts of the sidereal man, and not of the 
elementary body. . . . The elementary body 
has no spiritual gifts, but the sidereal body possesses 
them all. Whenever the elementary body is at 
rest, the sidereal body is awake and active, because 
the latter needs neither rest nor sleep ; but whenever 
the elementary body is fuU}^ awake and active, 
the activity of the sidereal body is then restrained, 
and its free movements are impeded or hindered 
like those of a man who is buried ahve in a tomb." 

A man who is content with the rushlight of his 
own reason will hardly welcome the effulgent rays 
of the universal sun. What benefit can such people 
derive from the most perspicuous dream ? 

LocaHzation of dreams is a very remarkable 
phenomenon. Yet almost all persons have some 
select spot, some haunt to which they repair from 



DREAMS 



331 



time to time in their dreams. It is always the same 
place and thoroughly well known to the dreamer, 
though quite outside all waking recognition. At 
such places one meets the same persons, and the 
dream is continuous of that which preceded it. 
For many years I had such a place w^here I met 
and discussed with one whose name I afterwards 
saw in an old Italian book of biographies, and since 
then I have not been able to revive the experience in 
my dreams. But I know that in some cases these 
localizations are retrospective and are reminiscent 
of a former life, while in others they are prospective 
and have reference to a place and environment 
which will eventually be known in experience.^ 

" The interpretation of dreams," says Paracelsus, 
" is an art that is known to the wise." Many books 
proposing to interpret dreams have appeared from 
time to time, but from their contents it is readily 
seen that they are designed to impress the ignorant 
reader or to express the ignorant author, for by no 
rule of art or understanding of universal symbolism 
(which is the only language known to the soul of 
man) can the interpretations be justified. A very 
valuable initiatory w^ork has been delivered to us by 
Emanuel Swedenborg, the Swedish seer, in his 
Hieroglyphic Key to Natural and Spiritual Mysteries. 
I consider it a misfortune that the enhghtened author 
did not see fit to extend his work, but so much as 

1 See the Occult Review, August 1910, in which many remark- 
able cases are given. 



332 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



appears is of the utmost value, especially when the 
sense is extended beyond the ordinary limit of the 
mere word. 

The present work does not permit of a thorough 
exposition of the symbolism of dreams, and it is 
not therefore thought advisable to attempt the task 
of formulating a system of interpretation. Such a 
system, however, does exist and has been reflected 
in all the scriptures of all peoples from time 
immemorial. The universe and man are consen- 
taneous. There is an universal symbolism, an 
universal language, and — if you please — an universal 
Dream-book. But this same^book needs reading. 



CHAPTER XIV 
SORTILEGES 

Among all the methods of divination which 
have found favour in the eyes of the uninitiated, 
none has received greater recognition than that 
of sortileges or " drawing lots." Admitting the 
sanctity which attaches to any body of scripture 
to be acknowledged by the consultant, what method 
of obtaining a knowledge of the will of Heaven 
could be more facile or more dependable than to 
take haphazard a text from the revealed Word ? 

The Bible among Christians, the Koran among 
Mohammedans, and the religious books among 
various nations have been consistently used for 
purposes of divination by sortilege. Various of 
the religious books of India are consulted in the 
same manner, and like ourselves they have books 
constructed for purposes of divination. In all 
sortileges drawn from holy writ the direct action 
of the divinatory faculty is relied upon, and the lot 
drawn is accepted as the expressed will of Heaven 
in regard to the matter about which the inquiry 
is made; the belief in such a divination being that 

333 



334 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



the Spirit not only directs the mind to this means 
of resolving its doubts, but also guides the hand 
to an appropriate and true selection. 

In the case of books constructed specially for the 
purpose of divination, of which there are a great 
number, the automatic or divinatory faculty is 
by means of numbers, geomantic points and other 
intermediaries, so that in effect the diviner is guided 
to a sortilege or oracular sentence which is designedly 
in apposition to the question and presumed to satisfy 
it, being favourable or otherwise according to the 
lot or number involved. 

The usual method of making such books of divma- 
tion is to formulate a certain number of questions, 
from which the diviner may choose such as answer 
nearest to the matter in hand, and then to arrange 
a codex by which each question is related to a variety 
of answers, so that at some point or other in the 
process the automatic faculty may avail itself of 
the element of " chance." Thus, while there is a 
great variety of methods, the principal factor in all 
cases is the exercise of the automatic or divinatory 
faculty. 

And if we rightly consider the matter there is no 
reason why such sortileges should not be true and 
effective, for it is constantly under observation 
that problems which cannot be solved by the volun- 
tary exercise of the faculties will be speedily and 
successfully surmounted by the automatic or 
involuntary action of the brain. Such cases are on 
record in connection with the experience of som- 



SORTILEGES 



335 



nambulism or sleep-walking, from which it appears 
that a person may retire to sleep with the mind in a 
state of anxiety concerning some problem of study, 
some article lost, some circumstance forgotten, and 
during sleep the person will rise from his bed 
and go about without harm or danger to himself 
and accomplish with great ease that which had been 
upon his mind before falling asleep. The morning 
finds the problem solved, the lost article restored, 
the forgotten incident carefully set down in Avriting. 
These facts prove two things : (1) that the soul of 
man knows more than it can impress upon a tired 
or disturbed brain ; and (2) that all action is fol- 
lowed by reaction. Concerning the first of these, it 
is well known that intuitive knowledge transcends 
reason and that instinct surpasses the highest use 
of the senses. What intuition is to the mmd of 
man, instinct is to the animal soul. Both are in 
the nature of direct and unerring knowledge, but 
the one is related to the imponderable and the other 
to the material world. When the brain is at rest, 
and when Reason, the great Doubter, has done its 
best and failed, then the soul is able to throw down 
the images of its thought upon the clear and unruffled 
surface of the mind, as if it should say, " Be still 
and know that I am the lord ! " 

As to the second deduction from experience, one 
may quote Scripture to the same effect : Ask and 
ye shall receive; seek and ye shall find; knock 
and it shall be opened unto you." But it is also 
possible, and to the ordinary mind may be more 



336 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



acceptable to cite a common experience of every- 
day life. A name is forgotten which it is important 
should be recollected; we worry over it, we twist 
and turn about in the storehouse of the memory to 
find that particular name; we go through the 
alphabet in the hope of getting a lead-off in the right 
direction from the initial letter; we make various 
futile attempts at a combination of sounds; but 
all to no purpose. We give it up and turn for dis- 
traction to some other theme. No sooner has the 
attention become entirely diverted than, spontan- 
eously and perfectly, the much-sought name springs 
to the brain, the eye, the tongue on the instant. 

The moral of this is : When you have ploughed 
and sown, leave the harvest to Nature ; or, as I have 
heard it otherwise put : " When you can't crack a 
nut, give it to a monkey," which means, I take it, 
that Nature is all-sufficient and that what she can 
make she can break, by one means or another. 
And this is the faith of the devout ; for, having tried 
by all rightful means to compass an end, and finding 
the task beyond his powers, a man does well to leave 
the issue in higher hands. By doing so he affirms 
his faith in the beneficent power of his Creator. 

An instance of the kind of sortileges referred to 
as " indirect," may be found in the " Wheel of 
Pythagoras," though it is difficult to trace any 
connection between this and the philosopher of 
Croton. A person desires an answer to a question. 
Such answer may be propitious or adverse, of 
immediate fulfilment, or delayed, according to the 



SORTILEGES 



337 



quarter of the heavens to which the divination 
refers. 

The letters of the alphabet are valued for this 
purpose as follows : — 

2 Y 11 UN 21 G 

3Z 12ELRP 26 C 

4 A F S 13 X 28 H 

6 BT 16 K 

8 Q 18 DW 

9 OUV 19 M 

The days of the week, with their corresponding 
numbers and the planets governing them, together 
with their numbers, are contained in the following 
Table :— 



SUN. 


MON. 


TUES, 


WED. 


THURS. 


FRI. 




106 


52 


52 


102 


31 


68 


45 


34 


45 


39 


114 


78 


45 


55 





D 


6 






? 


h 



In order to effect the divination, it is first of all 
necessary that the diviner should think of a number, 
and set it down. To this must be successively added : 

1. The initial of the Christian name. 

2. The number of the day of the week. 

3. The number of the planet answering to the day. 
The sum of these four numbers is then to be 

divided by 30, and with what remains the diviner 
must refer to the 

z 



338 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Wheel of Pythagoras. 











If / 3. ^.p' 


/<9. 20. 2/. \ \\ 




/ 9. //. /J./^ 


2^, 26. 2/. \ U 




I ^ .6 . /2. 


p p p ^ p /9 \ 


\V \ /P. 23, 


2 9 30 / II 











If the number is found in the 1st quarter of the 
Heavens, success will come speedily. 

If in the 2nd quarter, success will be delayed. 

If in the 3rd quarter, failure will be met with 
speedily. 

If in the 4th quarter, failure will attend in the 
end, and after delay. 

Moreover, the four quarters correspond to the 
seasons, I Spring, II Summer, IV Autumn, III 
Winter. 



SORTILEGES 



339 



Also to the four physical types, I — tall and fair, 
II — short and fair, III — short and dark, IV — tall 
and dark. 

If the question be in regard to time of day, its 
Spring corresponds to the morning, the Summer 
to the afternoon, the Autumn to the evening, and 
the Winter to the night. 

Here it will be seen that the divination is regulated 
from the commencement of the number thought of 
in connection with the subject of inquiry. 

When in India I learned a system of arudha, i. e. 
the undiscovered, which is based entirely on this 
occult law of the geometrical relations of thought. 
By means of this I have constantly been able to 
find things that were lost and to give circumstantial 
answers to questions propounded, to define the 
nature of a person's thoughts and perform many 
other apparently marvellous feats. But the only 
marvellous thing in the whole matter is the aforesaid 
correspondence, which exists between a person's 
thoughts and the number which spontaneously 
springs into his mind in association with such 
thoughts. An instance or two will suffice to show 
the method followed. 

On taking our places at table one evening, my 
vis-a-vis suddenly discovered that her coral necklace 
with pendants in gold had disappeared. I at once 
engaged to find it for her. After dwelling intently 
on the image of the thing in her mind she gave me 
the number 43. I then said she had been a short 
journey and that the necklace was lost at a place 

Z 2 



340 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



where there was an iron fencing, and that she would 
know the spot by the fact that a horse was standing 
close to it. I assured her she would recover the 
articles, and on learning that she had only been for 
a short walk of a mile or tAvo along the riverside, 
I elected to go in search of the thing myself, which 
I did without delay, fearing that the conditions 
which then obtained would presently alter. Walk- 
ing quickly in the direction indicated, I found 
the footpath by the river flanked b}^ continuous 
hedges and trees, beyond which were fields. But 
at last I came to a place where the hedgerow was 
broken and some old iron rails had been set to 
fill the gap, and there also was the horse with his 
head over the railings. It was now quite dusk, 
and I had to strike several matches in succession 
to obtain light enough. But almost the first thing 
I saw was the broken necklace, not much scattered, 
upon the ground ; and I returned with it in complete 
satisfaction. 

Speaking of this system to a gathering of occult 
students on a recent occasion, I was asked to give 
them an illustration of it. I therefore asked my 
hostess to think of any event in her past life, as, 
for example, marriage, and then give me the first 
number that came into her mind. But I warned 
her not to think of her marriage, as I had suggested 
it. Presently she gave me the number 25. I was 
surprised, and my first comment was that she had 
thought of something connected with her marriage. 
On admitting that this was the case, I said it con- 



SORTILEGES 



341 



cemed a short journej^ a removal from the house, 
and a jewel which was a gold ring set with a blue 
stone, most probably a turquoise. 

In confirming this divination, the lady informed 
us that she had set out for a drive with her husband, 
starting from home, and had met with an accident, 
in which she lost a gold ring set with a turquoise, 
and that was the subject of her thought. The 
ring had been a wedding present. 

Another kind of sortilege or divination akin to it, 
but somewhat in the nature of a Kabala, is contained 
in a manuscript by Borri written in old Italian. 
The method is as follows : — A question of. any sort 
being written down, the number of words in the 
sentence are noted and successively the number of 
the letters in each of the words. These numbers 
are set in a row, and are then added by pairs from 
right to left, the nines being excluded and the 
remainders set down in a second row. The same 
process is followed out continuously until, at length 
only two numbers remain to be added together, and 
the sum of them gives the final number, which may 
be 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9 on the one hand, or on the other 
2, 4, 6, or 8. If the number be odd, the result is 
adverse; but if even, the augury is good. 

An example will serve for all cases. Let the 
question be — 

Will my operation be successful ? The number of 
the words is 5, and the number of letters in the words 
successively are 4, 2, 9, 2, 1. The word successful 
has ten letters, but rejecting the nine, 1 is left. These 



342 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



figures are then set out in order from left to right : 

5 4 2 9 2 ] 
9 6 2 2 3 
6 8 4 5 
5 3 9 
8 3 
2 

and added together in pairs, rejecting the nines when 
the sum of an}^ two exceeds that number. As a 
final result we have the figure 2, which shows that 
the operation will be successful, and that speedily ; 
for the smaller the number the quicker will be the 
realization of the good or evil thus prognosticated. 

From a similar configuration Cagliostro, following 
the methods of the Illuminati, would have foretold 
that the winning number of the next lottery would 
be 22,246; but his method was more complex and 
involved the extraction of a series of numbers. 
The divination in the above example rests upon the 
unpremeditated and spontaneous use of words 
which are employed to express the question in mind. 
It is perhaps needless to add that the forcing of a 
sentence by studied art is not in the nature of an 
appeal to the automatic or subconscious part of 
one's nature, and no reliance can be placed upon 
an answer thus obtained. Neither is it possible 
to successfully engage the divinatory faculty upon 
all and trivial occasions. The use, as distinguished 
from the abuse of the faculty, consists in its employ- 
ment only upon serious occasions and concerning 
issues which cannot be otherwise known. 



SORTILEGES 



343 



There is in Nature a conspiracy between the 
voHtional faculty and the rational faculty, and 
another between the automatic faculty and the 
intuitive faculty, and these alliances are set in 
opposition to each other, so that the ascendency of 
the one means the subjugation of the other. This 
being understood, and also that the Rational Soul 
and the Psyche are opposed to one another by 
nature and constitution and method, the one being 
as it were the man and the other the woman within 
us, there remains to us the choice of either. But in 
the Adept, who has brought his nature into equili- 
brium and has celebrated the Nuptials of the Soul, 
these two act as one to the production of the most 
perfect results. 



ALCHEMY 



It has always been within the scope of practical 
magic to attempt the Magnum Opus, which consists 
in the production of the Elixir Vitce and the Lapis 
Philosophorum. Those who have failed in the 
great work have consoled themselves with the belief 
that there is an alchemy of the soul of greater 
consequence to immortal man than the mere trans- 
mutation of gross metals. Hence we have the two 
schools, everywhere in evidence in the literature 
of this subject, the Alchemists who claimed that all 
metals sprang originally from a single menstruum 
and are convertible by art ; and the Higher Alchem- 
ists or Mystics, who saw in the principles and pre- 
scriptions of the spagyric art nothing but a sublime 
system of spiritual philosophy having direct reference 
to the spiritual regeneration of man. 

The Alchemists affirmed that the ens of gold or 
silver could be extracted and a subtile tincture made 
by which all the gross metals such as copper, lead, 
etc., could be impregnated and changed to the pure 
gold or silver, copper lending itself more agreeably 
to the tincture of gold and lead to that of silver. 

344 



ALCHEMY 



845 



They affirmed, moreover, that this ens of gold could 
be fixed and rendered as a red ''powder of projection" 
which, being applied alchemically to Mercury, would 
change it into gold. 

" All metals in the earth are generated from 
Mercury," says one writer, " and thus Mercury is 
the first matter or prima materia of all metals." 

Avicenna illustrates this dictum, to which he 
gives consent, when he says : "As ice, which by 
heat is dissolved into water, is clearly generated out 
of water, so all metals may be resolved into Mercury, 
whence it is clear that they are generated out of it." 

Bernard of Trevisa is quoted to the same effect : — 

" Similarly quicksilver is the substance of all 
metals : it is as a water by reason of the homogeneity 
which it possesses with vegetables and animals, 
and it receives the virtues of those things which 
adhere to it in decoction." And he further says : 
" Gold is nothing but quicksilver congealed by its 
sulphur." 

Elsewhere he says : " The solvent differs from the 
soluble only in proportion and degree of digestion, 
but not in matter, since Nature has formed the one 
out of the other without any addition, even as by 
a process equally simple and wonderful she evolves 
gold out of quicksilver." 

Now, in the name of Occultism I affirm that the 
conclusions of Bernard Trevisan are as fully entitled 
to credence among the scientific as that of Sir William 
Crookes, whose Protyle or Mother-substance lies at 
the base of all modifications of matter, and is respons- 



346 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



ible for the genesis of the elements. The same 
daring thinker has been credited with the statement, 
though I have not mj^self seen it, that it is scientific- 
ally conceivable that we may take copper or any 
other metal and, having resolved it into that prime 
element from which it is a differentiation, thereafter 
shunt it on to the lines which make for gold. 

The alchemical idea is that all metals are generated 
from, and are indeed only modifications of, a 
primum ens or original matter, and that they are 
mutually convertible ; the medium in all cases being 
Mercury, which is the coagulated menstruum of 
this Mother-substance. 

Again : The sages have it that gold is nothing 
but quicksilver perfectly digested in the bowels of the 
earth, and they have signified that this is brought 
about by sulphur, which coagulates the Mercury and 
digests it by its own heat. Hence the sages have 
said that gold is nothing hut mature quicksilver ^ 

Certainly it does not seem improbable that 
chemical science should be able to bring about in 
a short time that which Nature produces in the 
course of years or even ages. And the alchemists 
may be right in their assertion that all metals have 
a common base in Mercury, and that this Mercury 
is the menstruum of all metals, and itself the coagu- 
late of the Prima Materia. We do not know cer- 
tainly what these metals are, nor by what process 
they are delivered to us by Nature, but we know 

1 The Alchemical Writings of Edward Kelly, by A. E. Waite. 
London : Wm. Rider and Son, Ltd. 



ALCHEMY 



347 



that primarily they all come from the same homo- 
geneous and universal substance, which some call 
ether, others protyle, the elementum, akasa, primum 
ens; meaning, in effect, one and the same thing. 

The honour of having revived the principles of 
Alchemy is accorded to Hermes the Thrice Great, 
and hence it is called the Hermetic Art. According 
to Bernard of Trevisa, Hermes found seven tablets 
of stone at the foot of Mount Hebron, on which the 
principles of the seven liberal arts had been inscribed 
before the flood. From Hebron the arts penetrated 
to Persia, Chaldaea, and Egypt ; and were variously 
called by them Magia, Kabala, and Sophia. 

The principles of Alchemy have a dual application, 
the spiritual and the terrestrial ; and these are repre- 
sented by the Triangle and the Square, or the 
Pyramid and the Cube, or again the square pyramid, 
i. e. a pyramid with a square base, the area of which 
base is equal to the area of a circle whose radius is 
the perpendicular axis of the pyramid. Such a 
pyramid is that which was completed by Khufu or 
Cheops under the superintendence of one of the 
Hyksoi. " The One emaned the Three, the Three 
evolved the Seven," as expressed in the symbol 
on page 348. 

When reversed we find the Mason's Apron, part 
of the insignia of the craft, but the fact that the 
thing is worn upside down need not trouble us, for 
we know that the Little Man or Microcosmos is 
but the inverted reflection of the Grand Man or 
Macrocosmos. 



348 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Alchemy teaches us also that the elements are 
mutually convertible, and how one comes to pre- 
dominate over others and whence the substance of 
metals is generated. The Four Elements were 
figuratively spoken of as Fire, Air, Water and Earth, 
and their qualities are fourfold, hot, cold, moist and 




dry. Two are imponderable and two heavy. The 
substance of all metals is the living Mercury, as 
distinguished from quicksilver. To this Nature 
added sulphur and also salt, and these three things 
digested together and coagulated. 

" The mineral principles are living Mercury and 
sulphur. From these are generated all metals and 
minerals, of which there are many species, possessing 
diverse natures." 



ALCHEMY 



849 



Gold is a perfect body, of pure, clear red Mercury, 
and pure, fixed, red, incombustible sulphur." 

Primum Ens 
Sulphur — Mercury — Salt 
Gold 

With what perfect facility the writings of the 
ancient Alchemists lend themselves to the higher 
interpretation may be illustrated by an extract, 
which formed part of the treatise written for the 
edification of King Rudolf of Hungary by Edward 
KeUy :— 

" When the soul of gold has been separated from 
its body, or when the body, in other words, has. been 
dissolved, the body of the Moon should be watered 
by its proper menstruum and reverberated, the 
operation being repeated as often as is necessary, 
^. e. until the body (of the Moon) becomes supple, 
broken up, pure, dissolved, coagulated. This is 
done, not with common fire, but with that of the 
Sages, and at last you must see clearty that nothing 
remains undissolved. For unless the Moon or 
Earth is properly prepared and entirely emptied 
of its soul, it will not be fit to receive the Solar seed ; 
but the more thoroughly the Earth is cleansed of 
its impurity and earthiness, the more vigorous it 
will be in the fixation of its ferment. This earth 
or Moon of the Sages is the trunk upon which 
the solar branch of the Sages is engrafted. This 
earth with its water, putrefies and is cleansed; for 



350 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



heat, acting on a dry substance, causes whiteness. 
Azoth and fire wash Laton, or earth, and remove 
its opacity." 

Obviously, the Mystic, who has no sense of the 
greed of gold in him, who regards values as in relation 
only to their ultimate products, and finds the virtue 
of all things to consist only in their uses, may be 
justified in his Higher Alchem}^ He reads the 
above quotation, not literally, but allegorically, 
and paraphrases in accord with his perceptions, 
somewhat as follows : — 

When the spiritual Soul is freed by death from 
the body, the animal soul reverts to its own sphere 
and is afterwards reincarnated, the operation taking 
place as often as is necessary, in fact, until it has 
become so highly evolved as to constitute an apt 
matrix for the implanted germ of the solar body. 
And this is to be effected, not by means of the ter- 
restrial, but the celestial fire, which is the Fire of the 
Holy Spirit ; and at length it will come to pass, after 
many incarnations, that the Lunar Body or astral soul 
will be purged of all impurities. For unless the astral, 
and the physical by means of the astral, is entirely 
emptied of its soul which is the brute or passional 
nature, and the cupidity of the lower mind, it will 
not be fit to receive the spiritual seed. But the 
more completely the lower nature is purged, the more 
perfect will be the union of the spiritual soul with 
its Psyche. This Psyche is the stock upon which is 
engrafted the spiritual branch bearing seed fruit, 
whose seed is in itself, a tree springing up as a Tree 



ALCHEMY 



351 



of Life. The body, with its astral or fluidic counter- 
part, putrefies and is cleansed; for the fire of the 
Spirit, acting on the dry substance of the dead body 
of Adam, produces in it a whiteness and purity 
and renders it crystalline by the removal of its gross 
elements. Thus the whole body becomes full of 
light, spiritualized and free from corruption, and the 
Psyche partakes of the immortality of the Solar Man. 

The key to this interpretation is as here shown 
in the glyph of 



The Great Resolvent. 




Spiritual Soul or Solar Body. 

]) Animal Soul or Lunar Body. 
Terrestrial Soul or Earth Body. 

$ The Human Soul or Intelligence Principle. 



Yet it would be altogether foolish to presume the 



352 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



Higher Alchemy of the Mystic to be the only possible 
application of the Arcana. The spiritual interpreta- 
tion infers the material in this world of relativity. 
The one is based upon the other. They are in apposi- 
tion. The salting of the earth is the work of the 
Initiates of all ages. They themselves have effected 
the Higher Alchemy of the Soul, or they possess 
the key to the lower or chemical art, for they 
know the correspondence of things spiritual and 
natural. If the Abbot of Glastonbury essayed the 
Magnum Opus before he was himself prepared, he 
had only himself to blame that his vessels w^ere 
overturned by the elemental forces he invoked 
without understanding ; for one inversion is followed 
by another, and the material can never take pre- 
cedence of the spiritual without incurring great 
risk of hurt. Hence, the admonition : Seek ye first 
the Kingdom of God and all these things shaU be 
added unto you. 

But what was found by the despoilers included 
only a manuscript and two small ivory vessels, one 
containing a red powder and the other a white 
powder ; and these, for the sum of one guinea, passed 
into the possession of Edward Kelly, who afterwards 
allied himself to Dr. Dee. Then later on we find 
these two colleagues engaged, under the patronage 
of King Rudolph, in making transmutation, for 
which work Kelly obtained the distinctions of a 
Marshal. That Kelly was no Alchemist, but only 
a usurper and profligate user of the treasure trove 
of Glastonbury, appears from the fact that " the 



ALCHEMY 



353 



powder, diminished by excessive projection, became 
exhausted; it was squandered still further in futile 
attempts to increase it; and when the Emperor 
(Rudolph) commanded his guests to produce it in 
becoming quantity, all experiments proved failures. 
. . . The impotence of the exhausted Alchemist 
was attributed to obstinacy, and the guest was 
changed into a prisoner . . . confined in a dungeon 
of Zobeslau. To regain his liberty he promised 
to manufacture the stone, on condition that he 
was permitted to return to Prague and take 
counsel with Dr. Dee. To that city he was per- 
mitted to go back, but his house was guarded, and 
as fresh experiments in the composition of the trans- 
muting powder were abortive as ever, the alchemist, 
seized with rage, made a futile attempt to escape, 
which ended in the murder of one of his guards." ^ 
This incident resulted in a second imprisonment, 
and although at the instance of Dr. Dee, Queen 
Elizabeth was pleased to claim Kelly as her subject, 
the King of Hungary would not release him, but 
held him on the grounds of the murder of one of 
his own subjects. From this second incarceration 
Kelly attempted to escape by means of a rope, 
but falling from a height he sustained injuries which 
led to his death at the age of forty-two. Sir Edward 
Kelly was born at Worcester on the 1st August 
(O.S.), 1555, at about four o'clock in the afternoon, 
and those who care to examine his horoscope will 

1 Edward Kelly : Alchemy and the Alchemist Sy by Louis 
Figuier. 

A A 



354 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



observe that the conjunction of Mars, Uranus and 
Jupiter in the Midheaven is in singular conformity 
with his strange and eventful career, promising as 
it does a rich windfall fraught with the danger of 
the Sword in the Balance ! Nor is it possible 
to overlook the significance of the planet Neptune 
in opposition from the lower meridian, with its 
sinister indication of plots and schemes directed 
against his person and reputation; in which event 
one sees that this exploiter of treasure trove and 
usurper of the supreme title of Adeptus came by 
some of his own in the final settling of accounts. 
That he was actually possessed of the Powder of 
Projection and the method of Projection, there 
seems no reason to doubt, for else he had not 
been able to satisfy the numerous demands 
of his royal patron and newly-made friends at 
Prague. But that he was not master of the art 
and had no knowledge or means of increasing the 
Powder of Projection or making more, even when 
it would have saved his life, not to mention the 
satisfaction of his own cupidity, is also a matter 
beyond all question. His writings on the alchemical 
art are chiefly valuable on account of their reference 
to the writings of others. There is, however, the 
great probability that the Book of St. Dunstan, as 
it is called, and so mentioned by Dr. Dee, in connec- 
tion with " the powder found at the digging in 
England," is the original manuscript of the Glaston- 
bury sage, or at least founded upon it, and so of 
much value to the purpose of this inquiry. There 



ALCHEMY 



355 



seems to be some warrant for the belief that Kelly 
did, so far as his knowledge extended, seek to satisfy 
the demands of King Rudolph, inasmuch as he 
hoped thereby to regain his liberty. The King, 
however, was not to be appeased by obscure dis- 
courses on the Hermetic Art. He wanted the plain 
rules of procedure for the making of gold, and this 
Kelly could not give him. Yet for all that there is 
reason to think that he probably gave him of his 
best. 

Beside the art of the Transmutation of Metals, 
the Alchemic Art is applied to the production of 
certain powerful medicines, including the Elixir 
Vitce, Paracelsus has stated that there is a gold 
which can be rendered permanently fluid — an 
aurum potahile, and he speaks also of the production 
of Tinctura Physica in a work of that name. He 
has left us a prescription for the making of the 
magic Electrum, a combination, according to 
alchemic art, of the seven " primary metals." He 
also gives instructions for the making of the Primum 
Ens Melissce and the Primum Ens Sanguinis. I am 
of opinion that Paracelsus' prescriptions are to be 
taken literally, but some of his commentators, being 
solicitous of popular opinion and not wishing to be 
thought crude, advise that they should be taken in 
an occult sense, whatever that may mean, when the 
whole process is in itself the very expression of 
practical occultism. Paracelsus himself affirms that 
he had seen the Electrum Magnum on frequent 
occasions, and he recites many of the wonderful 



356 A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM 



phenomena produced by its means. When the 
learned are disposed to accept Paracelsus at his 
word the world will be more generously disposed 
concerning this great philosopher, who stands in 
singular distinction from the majority of Initiates 
in his freedom from all ambiguity and obscurantism. 
It is in the same spirit of unfettered freedom of 
thought that I have endeavoured to treat of some 
aspects of Occultism and allied subjects, with, I 
trust, no greater hurt to my reputation among 
those whose opinion I value. 



THE END 



Richard Clay & Sons, Limited, London and Bungay. 



SOME PUBLICATIONS 

OF 

WILLIAM RIDER & SON, LTD. 



MATTER, SPIRIT AND THE COSMOS: Some Sug- 
gestions as to a Better Understanding of the Whence 
and the Why of their Existence. By H. Stanley 
Redgrove, Author of " On the Calculation of Thermo- 
Chemical Constants." Crown 8vo, cloth gilt, 2S. 6d. net. 

" Another evidence of the revolt that seems to be gradually rising 
against the materialism of the late nineteenth century. As a student 
of science, the author may be considered as at least an unprejudiced 
advocate for the reality of spirit." — The Scotstnan. 

*' His arguments are convincing with respect to the whole or 
absolute purpose of the cosmos." — The Academy. 

*'The writer's conclusions . , . have been arrived at by processes of 
reasoning which are undoubtedly bold, ingenious and original." — Light. 

THE TAROT OF THE BOHEMIANS: The Most 
Ancient Book in the World, for the Exclusive Use of 
Initiates. By Papus. Translated from the French by 
A. P. Morton. New edition, revised throughout, with 
introduction by A. E. Waite. Crown 8vo, ornamental 
cloth gilt, gilt tops, 384 pp., profusely illustrated, 65. net. 

"Probably the most complete exposition of the whole subject that 
can be obtained in the English language." — Light. 

" Well illustrated, and garbed beautifully." — The Theosophist. 

*' M. Encausse's very considerable learning cannot be gainsaid," — 
Manchester Courier. 



A PACK OF 78 TAROT CARDS : Exquisitely drawn 
and coloured, from new and original designs by 
Pamela Coleman Smith. Each card has a separate 
allegorical meaning. This is without question the 
finest and most artistic pack that has ever bee 
produced. Price 6^. net, post free. 

" The most wonderful pack of cards that has ever been seen since th 
days when Gringonneur illuminated three packs for the amusement ol 
King Charles VI. of France, in the year of our Lord 1392." — Arthu 
Msichen in T.F.'s JVeeHy. 

THE KEY TO THE TAROT: Giving the history of the 
Tarot Cards, their allegorical meaning and the methods 
of divination for which they are adapted. By Arthur 
Edward Waite. Royal 32mo., cloth gilt, 2s. net. 
Essential to the interpretation of the Tarot Cards. 
The Cards and Key will be supplied together in neaf 
box for 8^. post free. * 

YOUR FORTUNE IN YOUR NAME OR KABALISTIC 
ASTROLOGY. New edition, largely revised. Demy 
8vo, cloth gilt, 96 pp., 2S. 6d. net. By " Sepharial." 

The first edition of this popular work on Kabalistic Astrology having 
been entirely sold out, the publishers arranged with the author for this 
corrected and revised edition to meet the public demand. 

A MANUAL OF CARTOMANCY, Fortune-Telling and 
Occult Divination, including the Oracle of Human 
Destiny, Cagliostro's INIystic Alphabet of the Magi, &c., 
&c. Fourth edition, greatly enlarged and revised, by 
Grand Orient. Crown 8vo, cloth gilt, 252 pp., 
2S. 6d. net. 

"To the curious in such matters this book will afford much interest- 
ing information." — Fa// Ma//. 



Philosophy 



JESU5: THE LAST GREAT INITIATE. Translated 
from "Les Grands Inities" of Edouard Schure, by 
F. Roth WELL, B.A. Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. net. 

" The Light was in the world, and the world was made by it, but the 
world knew it not." — ^JOHN i. lo. 

"When a man listens to the Divine Call a new life is created in him, 
now he no longer feels himself alone, but in communion with God and 
all truth ready to proceed eternally from one verity to another. In this 
new life his thought becomes one with the Universal Will." 

KRISHNA AND ORPHEUS, the Great Initiates of the 

East and West. By Edouard Schur^. Translated 

by F. RoTHWELL, B.A. Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. net. 

'* M. Schure has in this little volume admirably succeeded in present- 
ing the two subjects of his research most vividly to the reader's mind. 
It is impossible to rise from the perusal of this work without having 
acquired fresh information and data for future use. Mr. Rothwell, so 
far as the fluency and crispness of his English can prove it, has made an 
admirable translation." — Glasgow Herald. 

PYTHAGORAS, and his System of Philosophy (The 
Delphic Mysteries). By Edouard Schure. Translated 
by F. Rothwell, B.A. Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. net. 
"Know thyself, and thou wilt know the Universe and the Gods." — 
"A thoughtful history and exposition of the great teacher." — The 
Scotsman. 

"In this excellent translation the reader is familiarised with the life 
and philosophy of Pythagoras." — The Daily Express. 

HERMES AND PLATO : The Mysteries of Egypt and 
the Mysteries of Eleusis, by Edouard Schure. 
Translated by F. Rothwell, B.A. Crown 8vo, cloth, 
\s. 6d. net. 

" Happy is he who has passed through the Mysteries. He knows the 
source and the end of life." — Pindar. 

" M. Schure has presented a picture of ancient religious indoctrin- 
ation that will give an excellent general idea of the scope and signifi- 
cance of the Greek and Egyptian mysteries." — Light. 

" To not a few the book will be an introduction to a new writer, an 
acquaintance which they will be anxious to deepen into friendship." — 
Expository Times, 



RAMA AND MOSES: The Aryan Cycle and the Mission 
of Israel. Translated from " Les Grands Inities" of 
Edouard Schur^, by F. Rothwell, B.A. Crown 8vo, 
cloth, 2s. net. N.B. — This volume completes the series. 

WITH THE ADEPTS : An Adventure among the Rosi- 

crucians. By Dr. Franz Hartmann. New and Revised 

Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth gilt, i8o pp., 2s. 6d. net. 

"It is full of thought on the higher things of life, and attempts 
seriously to grapple with many mysteries of the life that now is, as well 
as that which is to be. " — Woolwich Pioneer. 

THE BOOK OF THE SIMPLE WAY. By Laotze 
(" The Old Boy "). A New Translation of " The Tao- 
Teh-King." With Introduction and Commentary by 
Walter Corn Old, M.R.A.S. Crown Svo, cloth, 
25 net. 

"Laotze remains a prince among philosophers . . . and is still as 
good reading as he was some five or six centuries B.C." — The Times. 

** An excellent translation of the teachings of this ancient sage. . . . 
As an editor and expositor Mr. Old is both well-informed and sympa- 
thetic. ' ' — Glasgaiv Herald. 

OBERMANN. By Etienne Pivet de Senancour. 

Translated from the French, with Biographical and 

Critical Introduction by Arthur Edward Waite. 

Crown Svo, 6j. net, ornamental cloth, gilt tops. 

" A Spiritual Autobiography, rich in the invitation to think, alive 
with the quest of truth, and yet full of speculative unrest. . . . The 
value of this edition is greatly enhanced by the critical appreciation with 
which Mr. Waite has enriched a book that deserves to be much more 
widely known." — The Standard. 

*' An excellent translation." — The Times. 

*' Mr. Waite must be well known as a learned and enchanting Mystic ; 
even those who are not mystics or even thyrsus-bearers hold him in 
respect. We are therefore not surprised that he treats Obermann an 
* A great book of the soul,' and .De Senancour as a 'man of vision*! 
belonging at his best to eternity." — The Daily Chronicle. I 



W. RIDER & SON, Limited, 164 Aldersgate Street, London, EX. 



PUBLICATIONS OF 

William Rider & Son, Ltd 



THE NEW THOUGHT LIBRARY. 

Crown 8vo. Crimson cloth extra, gilt tops 3s. 6d. net. 



The " New Thought Library " has been designed to include only 
the best works in this class of literature. The first twelve volumes 
are now ready. 



Have you a Strong Will P How to Develop and 
Strengthen Will Power, Memory, or any other Faculty or At- 
tribute of the Mind by the Easy Process of Self Hypnotism. By 
Charles Godfrey Leland. Fifth edition, containing the 
celebrated correspondence between Kant and Hufeland, and 
an additional chapter on Paracelsus and his Teaching. Price 
3s. 6d. net. 

The Gift of the Spirit. A Selection from the Essays of 
Prentice Mulford. Reprinted from the "White Cross Library." 
With an Introduction by Arthur Edward Waite. Third Edition. 
Price 3s. 6d. net. Bound in Red Lamb-skin, gilt edges, 5s. net. 

The Gift of Understanding. A further Selection from 
the Works of Prentice Mulford. Reprinted from the "White 
Cross Library." With an Introduction by Arthur Edward Waite. 
Price 3s. 6d. net. Bound in Red Lamb-skin, gilt edges, 5s. net. 

Essays of Prentice Mulford. Third Series. Price 

3s. 6d. net. 

Essays of Prentice Mulford. Fourth Series. Completing 
the entire set of the Essays published in America under the title 
of " Your Forces and How to Use Them." Price 3s. 6d. net. 

These four volumes constitute by far the best Edition of the Essays of Prentice 
Mulford published in the English language. Special care has been taken to eliminate 
the errors and mistakes with which the American edition abounds. 

The Science of the Larger Life. A Selection from 
the Essays of Ursula N. Gestefeld. Price 3s. 6d. net. 

Every Man a King, or Might in Mind Mastery. By Orison 
Swett Marden. Price 3s. 6d. net. 



Cathedral House, Paternoster Row, London, E.C. 



4 



WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Limited. 



New Evidences in Psychical Research. Bv J. 

Arthur Hill. With Introductory Note by Sir Oliver Lodge, F.'R.S. 
Crown 8vo. cloth gilt, 224 pp., 3s. 6d. net. 

Christianity and Spiritualism. (Christianisine et 
Spiritualisme.) By Leon Denis. Translated by Helen Draper 
Speakman. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. net. 

The writer contends that Spiritualism offers tangible proofs of immortality, and 
thus carries us back to the pure Christian doctrines. 



Here and Hereafter, f Apres la Mort.j Being a Scien- 
tific and Rational Solution of the Problems of Life and Death, 
and of the Nature and Destiny of the Human Ego in its Succes- 
sive Lives. Translated by George G. Fleurot from the French of 
Leon Denis. Second edition, revised, cloth gilt, cr-own 8vo, 352 
pp., 3s. 6d. net. 



Mors Janua Vitae P A Discussion of Certain Communi- 
cations purporting to come from Frederic W. H. Myers. Bv 
H. A. Dallas. With Introduction by Sir W. F. Barrett, F.R.S^ 
Crown 8vo, cloth gilt, 2s. 6d. net. 



Colloquies with an Unseen Friend. Edited by 
Walburga, Lady Paget. Crown 8vo, white linen, 3s. 6d. net. 

Contents. — Reincarnation. Atlantis. Conditions of Communication with the 
Invisible. Historical Sketches. Humanitarianism and the Advance of the World. 
The French Revolution and Secret Societies. War and Politics. St. Francis. 



Death : Its Causes and Phenomena. By Hereward 
Carrington and John R. Aleader. Ornamental black' cloth, gilt, 
8|in.x5Jin., 552 pp., 8s. 6d. net. 

PrefacB". PartI. — Physiological. The Scientific .Aspect of Life and Death. 
Trance. Cutalsepy, Suspended Animation, Premature Burial. Old Age: Its Scientific 
Study. My own Theory of the Nature of Death (Herew ard Carrington). My own 
Theory of the Nature of Death (John R. Meader). General Conclusions. 

Part 2. — Historical : The Philosophical Aspect of Death and Immortality. The 
Theological Aspect of Death. The Common Arguments for Immortality. 

Part 3. — Psychological : The Moment of Death. Death Described from Beyond 
the Veil. Death Coincidences. The Testimony of Science — Psychical Research. 
On the Intra-Cosmic Difficulties of Communication. Conclusions. Index. 



Cathedral House, Paternoster kow, London, EX. 



WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Limited. 



5 



Reincarnation and Christianity. A Discussion of 
the relation of Orthodoxy to the Reincarnation Hypothesis. By 
a Clergyman of the Church of England. Crown 8vo, stiff boards, 
96 pp., 1 s. net. 

Stranger than Fiction. Being Tales from the Byways 
of Ghost and Folk-lore. By Mary L. Lewes. Crown 8vo, cloth 
gilt, 234 pp., 3s. 6d. net. 

Will appeal to lovers of the Uncanny and to those interested in Ghost-lore 
generally. There are chapters devoted to Ghostly Phenomena ; Corpse Candles and 
the Toili (or Phantom Funeral Processions) ; Welsh Fairies ; Wise Men ; Witches ; 
Family Curses ; Spectral Animals ; etc, etc. 

A Psychic Autobiography. By Amanda T. Jones, 
Author of "Uah," "Atlantis," "Rubaiyatof Solomon," "Poems," 
"A Prairie Idyl," etc. With five Portraits and an Introduction by 
Prof. James H. Hyslop, Secretary of the American Society for 
Psychical Research. Crown 8vo, 456pp. Price 4s. 6d. net. 

Shadows Cast Before. Being Records of Fulfilled 
Predictions, collected and edited by Claud Field. Crown Svo, 
223 pp., cloth gilt, 2s. 6d. net. 

READY SHORTLY. 

Psychic Science. (La Psychologic Inconnue). A Contri- 
bution to the Experimental Study of Supernormal Phenomena. 
Translated from the French of Emile Boirac, Correspondent of 
the Institute, Rector of the Academy of Dijon. Demy Svo, cloth 
gilt, 6s. net. 

PHILOSOPHY. 

The Great Initiates. Complete Edition of Edouard 
Schure's ' Les Grands Inities," with an Introduction to Esoteric 
Teaching, and a Frontispiece Portrait of the Author. Translated 
by F. Rothwell, B.A. Two Volumes. Crown 8v^/=t:loth gilt, 
7s. 6d. net. — N.B. Volumes not sold singly. 

Jesus: The Last Great Initiate. Translated from 
" Les Grands Inities" of Edouard Schure, by F. Rothwell, B.A. 
Crown Svo, cloth, 2s. net. 

Krishna and Orpheus, the Great Initiates of the East 
and West. By Edouard Schure. Translated by F. Rothwell, B.A. 
Crown Svo, cloth, 2s. net. 



Cathedral House, Paternoster Row, London, E.C. 



6 



WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Limited. 



Pythagoras, and His System of Philosophy, (The Delphic 
Mysteries.) By Edouard Schure. Translated bv F. Rothwell, 
B.'A. Crown Svo, cloth, 2s. net. 

Hermes and Plato., The Mysteries of Egypt and the 
Mysteries of Eleusis, bv Edouard Schure. Translated by F. 
Rothwell, B.A. Crown 8 vo, cloth, Is. 6d. net. 

Rama and Moses. The Aryan Cycle and, the iMission of 
Israel. Translated from " Les Grands Inities " of Edouard Schure 
by F. Rothwell, B.A. Crown Svo, cloth, 2s. net. 

N.B. — This volume completes the series. 

With the Adepts : An Adventure among the Rosicrucians. 
By Dr. Franz Hartmann. New and Revised Edition. Crown Svo, 
cloth gilt, 2s. 6d. net. 

The Book of the Simple Way. Bv Laotze ( The Old 
Boy"). A New Translation of "The Tao-Teh King." With 
Introduction and Commentary by Walter Corn Old, M.R.A.S. 
Crown Svo, cloth, 2s. net. 

Obermann. By Etienne Pivet dc Senancour. Translated 
from the French, with Biographical and Critical Introduction by 
Arthur Edward Waite. Crown Svo, 423 pp., 6s. net, ornamental 
cloth, gilt tops. 

The Life of Louis Claude de Saint-Martin, the 

Unknown Philosopher, and the Substance of his Transcendental 
Doctrine. By Arthur Edward Waitc, Demy Svo, 464 pp., 6s. net. 

Psychic Philosophy, as the Focxdation of a Religion 
OF Natural Causes. Bv \'. C. Desertis. With Introduction 
by Prof. A. R. Wallace, O.'M., D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S. New and 
cheaper edition, cloth gilt, crown Svo, 421pp., 3s. 6d. net. 

The inferno. By August Strindberg. Translated by the 
Rev. Claude Field. An autobiographical work by the celebrated 
Swedish author, similar in character to Oscar Wilde's " De 
Profundis." Crown Svo, cloth gilt, 2s. 6d. net. 

Select Works of Plotinus, Translated from the Greek. 
A ilcw edition with Preface and Bibliographv by G. R. S. Mead, 

B. A., M.R.A.S. Crown Svo, 334 + xxxviii pp', cloth, 3s. 6d. net. 

The Wisdom of Plotinus. A Metaphysical Study, by 

C. J. Whitby, M.D. 120 pp. crown Svo, cloth gilt, 2s. net. 



Caihedral House, Paternoster Row, London, E.C. 



WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Limited. 



7 



The World We Live In. By E. A. Brackett, with 
Portrait of the Author. Crown 8vo, 121 pp., cloth gilt, gilt tops, 
2s. net. 

This book gives a singularly clear exposition of the meaning of Life, as seen 
through the spectacles of a believer in Spiritualism. 

The Alternate Sex, or the Female Intellect in Man and 
the Masc line in Woman. By Charles Godfrey Leland, F.R.L.S., 
A.M., Harvard. New and Cheaper Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, 
2s. 6d. net. 

Yoga, or Transformation. A Comparative Statement 
of the various Religions and Dogmas concerning the Soul and its 
Destiny, and of Akkadian, Hindu, Taoist, Egyptian, Hebrew, 
Greek, Christian, Mohammedan, Japanese and other Magic. By 
William J. Flagg. Royal 8vo, 376 pp., cloth gilt, cheaper edition, 
6s. net. 

Occult Science in India and among the Ancients. 

With an account of their Mystic Initiations and the History of 
Spiritism. By Louis Jacolliot. Translated from the French by 
Willard L. Felt. Royal 8vo, 276 pp., cloth gilt, gilt tops, cheaper 
edition, 6s. net. 

The Transparent Jewel. By Mabel Collins, Author of 
" Light on The Path," etc. Small crown 8vo, cloth, gilt tops, 2s. 
net. Bound in Red Lamb-skin, gilt tops, 4-s. 6d. net. An ex- 
position of Patanjali's philosophy. 

Science and the infinite, or Through a Window in the 
Blank Wall. By Sydney T. Klein. Crown 8vo, 183pp., cloth gilt, 
2s. 6d. net. 

Matter, Spirit and the Cosmos. Some Suggestions 
towards a Better Understanding of the Whence and Why of their 
Existence. By H. Stanley Redgrove, B.Sc. (Lond.), F.C.S., 
Author of "On the Calculation, of Thcrmo-Chemical Constants." 
Crown 8vo, cloth gilt, 2s. 6d. net. 

A Mathematical Theory of Spirit. By H. Stanley 
Redgrove, B.Sc. Author of " Matter, Spirit and the C smos," 
"Alchemy: Ancient and Modern," etc. Large crown 8vo, cloth 
gilt. 2s. 6d. net. 

HIGHER LIFE HANDBOOKS. 

Crown 8yo. Uniformly Bound in Handsome Dark Green Cloth. 
Gilt Ornamental Design and Lettering. 

Life and Power from Within. By W. J. Colville, 
Author of "The Law of Correspondences," "Elementary Text 
Book of Mental Therapeutics," etc., etc. 189 pp., 2s. 6d. net. 



Cathedral House, Paternoster Row, London, E.C. 



8 



WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Limited. 



The Law of the Rhythmic Breath. Teaching the 
Generation, Conservation and Control of Vital Force. By Ella 
Adelia Fletcher. 872 pp., 4s. 6d. net. 

Paths to Power. By Floyd B. Wilson, Author of " Man 
Limitless," "Through Silence to Realization," " The Discovery 
of the Soul." 229 pp., 4s. 6d. net. 

Through Silence to Realization ; or, The Human 
Awakening. By Floyd B. Wilson, Author of " Paths to 
Power," "Man Limitless," etc. 190 pp., 3s. 6d.net. 

The Discovery of the Soul out of Mysticism, 
Light and Progress. By Floyd B. Wilson, Author of 
" Paths to Power," " Man Limitless," etc. 247 pp., 4s. 6d. net. 

MAGIC, ALCHEMY AND OCCULT SCIENCE. 

Cosmic Symbolism. By Scpharial. Crown 8vo, 296pp, 
cloth gilt, 3s. 6d. net. 

This worU embodies a constructive system of universal symbology applied to 
problems of science, philosophy and relij^ion. It will be found to be a book of 
absorbing interest and of eminently practical value. 

The Tarot of the Bohemians. The Most Ancient 
Book in the W'orld, for the Exclusive Use of Initiates. By Papus. 
Translated from the French by A. P. Morton. New Edition. 
Revised throughout, with Introduction by A. E. Waite. Cr. 8vo, 
cloth gilt, gilt tops, 384 pp., profusely illstd., 6s. net. 

A Pack of 78 Tarot Cards. Exquisitely Drawn and 
Coloured from New and Original Designs, bv Pamela Coleman 
Smith. Each Card has a separate allegorical meaning. This is 
without question the finest and most artistic pack that has ever 
been produced. Price 6s. net, in neat blue box, post free. 

The Key to the Tarot. Giving the History of the Tarot 
Cards, their allegorical meaning and the methods of divination for 
which they are adapted. By Arthur Edward Waite. Royal 32mo, 
cloth gilt, 2s. net. Essential to the interpretation of the Tarot 
Cards. The Cards and Key in neat red box 8s. post free. 

The Pictorial Key to the Tarot. Being an Enlarged 
and Revised Edition of the Key to the Tarot, with seventy-eight 
full-page Reproductions of the Tarot Cards facing their descriptive 
matter, and considerable additional matter dealing specially with 
the subject of Fortune-telling by means of the Tarot. By A. E. 
Waite. Crown 8vo, cloth gilt, gilt tops, 340pp. 5s. net. 



Cathedral House, Paternoster Row, London, E.C. 



WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Limited. 



9 



The Book of Ceremonial Magic. Including the Rites 
and Mysteries of Goetic Theurgy, Sorcery, and Infernal Necro- 
mancy. By A. E.Waite. Crown 4to, gilt tops, 376pp., illustrated 
with about 180 engravings, beautifully bound in art canvas, with 
design in gold, price 15s. net. 

A Manual of Occultism. A Complete Exposition of the 
Occult Arts and Sciences, by " Sepharial," Author of "A Manual of 
Astrology," etc., etc. With numerous Diagrams, 368pp., hand- 
somely bound in cloth gilt, gilt tops, crown 8vo, 6s. net. 

Part I. — The Occult Sciences, comprising Astrology, Palmistry, Thaumaturgy, 
Kabalism, Numerology, Ta ismans, Hypnotism. 

Part II. — The Occult Arts, comprising Divination, The Tarot, Cartomancy, 
Crystal Gazing, Clairvoyance, Geomancy, Dreams, Sortileges, Alchemy. 

Astrology : How to make and read your own Horoscope. 

By "Sepharial." New Edition, with two additional Chapters, 
crown 8vo, 126pp, cloth, 1s. net. 

Hypnotism and Suggestion. A Practical Handbook. 
By Edwin Ash, M.D., B.Sc. London, M.D.C.S. New and cheaper 
Edition. Crown 8vo, 137pp and Index, cloth. Is. net. 

Hand Reading. By an Adept. New Edition uniform with 
"Hypnotism and Suggestion" with Plates. Crown 8vo, cloth, 1 s. net. 

A Manual of Cartomancy, Fortune-telling and 
Occult Divination, including the Oracle of Human Destiny, 
Cagliostro's Mystic Alphabet of the Magi, etc., etc. Fifth 
Edition, with new sections. The French Method of Telling For- 
tunes by Cards and a new Oracle called "The Heart's Desire." 
Crown 8vo, cloth 278 pp., 2s. 6d. net. 

The Book of Destiny. By Grand Orient, Author of 
" A Manual of Cartomancy." Containing The Great Oracle of 
the Gods. The Occult Science of Jewels. The Worship of 
Destiny in Business and Pleasure. The Wheel of Wisdom. The 
Mystery and Interpretation of Dreams, etc., etc. Crown 8vo., 
cloth gilt, uniform with above, about 280pp., 2s. 6d. net. 

Numbers: Their* Meaning and Magic. By Isidore 
Kosminsky. With frontispiece portrait of Author. New and 
Enlarged Edition. Re- written throughout. Crown 8vo., paper 
wrappers. 1 s. net. 

Second Sight. A Study of Natural and Induced Clair- 
voyance. By " Sepharial." Crown 8vo, 96pp., cloth boards, 
1 s. net. 



Cathedral House, Paternoster Row, London, E.C. 



10 



WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Limited. 



Cheino's Language of the Hand. A Complete Prac- 
tical Work on the Sciences of Cheirognomy and Cheiromancy, con- 
taining the System, Rules and Experience of Cheiro. Fifty-five 
Full-page Illustrations and over 200 Engravings of Lines, Mounts 
and Marks. Drawings of the Seven Types by Theo Dore. Fifteenth 
edition, 10|in. x 8|in., artistically designed black and white cover, 
gilt tops, price 1 Os. 6d. net. 

Alchemy: Ancient and Modern. Being a brief account 
of the Alchemistic Doctrines, and their relations to Mysticism on 
the one hand, and to recent discoveries in Physical Science on the 
other ; together with some particulars regarding the most noted 
Alchemists. By H. Stanley Redgrove, B. Sc. (Lond.), F.C.S. With 
16 full-page illustrations. Demy 8vo, cloth gilt, 4s. 6d. net. 

Your Fortune in your Name, or Kabaiistic As- 
trology. New and cheaper Edition. Demy 8vo, cloth gilt, 
2s. net. By " Sepharial." 

The Kabala of Numbers. A Handbook dealing with 
the Traditional Interpretation of Numbers and their Predictive 
Value. By "Sepharial," Author of "A Manual of Occultism," 
"Kabaiistic Astrology," "Prognostic Astronomy," etc., etc. 
168pp., crown 8vo, cloth gilt, 2s. net. 

Geomancy. By Franz Hartmann, M.D. Large crown 8vo, 
about 200 pp., cloth gilt, with numerous diagrams, 3s. 6d. net. 

This book is a Revised Version of the Treatise on Geomancy, or Sand-divining, 
by the well-known Austrian Physician and Occultist, following the lines of the teach- 
ing of Cornelius Agrippa. 

The History of Magic. Including a clear and precise 
exposition of its Processes, Rites and Mysteries. By Eliphas 
Levi, Author of " Tranccndcntal Magic," etc., etc. Translated 
by Arthur Edward VVaitc. 556pp., medium 8vo, cloth gilt, 
12s. 6d. net. Edition dc Luxe printed on rag paper, bound 
in white vellum, gilt, 21s. net. 

MENTAL PATHOLOGY AND THERAPEUTICS. 

Health for Young and Old, its Principles and 
Pr£\ctice. An Unconventional Manual. By A. T. Schofield, 
M.D., M.R.C.S., author of " Elementary Hygiene," " Hygiene 
for Schools," " Fit for Work," " Nervousness," " How to' Keep 
Fit," etc. Crown 8vo, 272 pp., cloth gilt, price 3s. 6d. net. 



Cathedral House, Paternoster Row, London, E.C. 



WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Limited. 



11 



Elementary Textbook of Mental Therapeutics. 

By W. J. Colville, author of "Creative Thought," etc., with 
Introduction. Demy 8vo, paper covers, 80pp, Is. net. 

The Mastery of Death. By A. Osborne Eaves. Author 
of " The Colour Cure." Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. net. 

The Art of Luck. By A. Osborne Eaves. Author of 
" The Colour Cure," etc. Sin. x 4fin. paper covers, 1 s. net. 

Psycho-Pathological Researches. Studies in Mental 
Dissociation. With Text Figures and 10 Plates. By Boris Sidis, 
M.A., Ph.D., Director of the Psycho-Pathological Laboratory of 
New York. Royal Svo, 329 pp., 8s. 6d. net. 

Abnormal Psychology. By Isador H. Coriat, M.D., 
Senior Assistant Physician for Diseases of the Nervous System, 
Boston City Hospital ; Neurologist to the Mt. Sinai Hospital 
Crown Svo, cloth gilt, 340 pp., 5s. net. 

CONTENTS. 

I. The Exploration of the Subconscious. — What is the Subconscious? 
Automatic Writing. Testing the Emotions. Analysing the Emotions. Sleep. Dreams. 

II. Diseases of the Subconscious. — Losses of Memory. Restoration of Lost 
Memories. The Splitting of a Personality. Psycho-Epileptic Attacks. 

RIDER'S MIND AND BODY HAND-BOOKS. 

These Hand-books deal with the subject of mental and bodily 
health Id the new light of psycho-therapeutics, mental healing and 
auto-suggestion. The following volumes are now ready: — 

Nature's Help to Happiness. By John Warren Achorn, 
M.D. Small crown Svo, 55 pp., cloth gilt, Is. net, paper 6d. net. 

How to Rest and be Rested. By Grace Dawson. 46 pp., 
red paper cover, 6d. net, cloth 1s. net. 

The Secret of Efficiency. By Grace Dawson, uniform 
with the above, cloth, "Is. net. 

What is Health P By Grace Dawson, Author of " How to 
Rest." Small crown Svo, 72pp, Is. net. 

Nervousness. A Brief and Popular Review of the Moral 
Treatment of Disordered Nerves. By Alfred T. Schofield, M.D., 
M.R.C.S. Small crown Svo, cloth gilt, 8S pp., 1 s. net. 

The Power of Self-Suggestion. By Rev. Samuel 
McComb, D.D. Small crown Svo, 72 pp., cloth gilt, Is. net. 

How to Keep Fit. An Unconventional Manual. By 
Alfred T. Schofield, M.D., M.R.C.S., Author of " Nervousness," 
etc., etc. Small crown Svo, cloth gilt, 80 pp.. Is. net. 



Cathedral House, Paternoster Row, London, E.C. 



12 



WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Limited. 



Fnom Passion to Peace ; or, The Pathway of the Pure. 
By James Allen, Author of "The Mastery of Destiny," "From 
Poverty to Power," " As a Man Thinketh," etc., etc. Small crown 
8vo, cloth gilt, 72 pp.. Is. net. 

Studies in Self-Healing; or, Cure by Meditation. A 
practical application of the principles of the true mystic healing of 
the ages. By Ernest E. Munday. Small crown 8vo, 79 pp., cloth 
gilt, 1 s. net. 

The Influence of the Mind on the Body. By Dr. 

Paul Dubois, Professor of Neuro-Pathology in the University of 
Berne, Author of "The Psychic Treatment of Nervous Disorders," 
" Self-Control, and How to Secure It," etc. Translated from the 
Fifth French Edition by L. B. Gallatin. Small crown 8vo, 64 pp., 
cloth gilt, 1 s. net. 

Man, King of Mind, Body and Circumstance. By 

James Allen, Author of "As a Man Thinketh," etc., etc. Small 
crown 8vo, 70 pp., cloth gilt, Is. net. 

Contents.— Forward. The Inner World of Thoughts. The Outer World of 
Things. Habit: Its Slavery and its Freedom. Bodily Conditions. Poverty. Man's 
Spiritual Dominion. Conquest : not Resignation. 

THEOLOGY. 

The Unescapable Christ, and Other Sermons. 

An Expression of the New Theology. By Rev. Edward W. Lewis, 
M.A., B.D., of Grafton Square Congregational Church, Clapham, 
Author of " Some Views of Modern Theology." Crown 8vo, cloth, 
3s. 6d. net. 

Some Better Thing for Us. By A. S. L. Second Im- 
pression. Demy 12mo, cloth gilt, 3s. 6d. net. 

Contents. — Faith: A Practical Matter. Fear: Its True Function. Truth in 
Relation to Life. The Law which Gendereth Bondage. Two Points of View. The 
Threefold Cord of Prayer. Health, Holiness and Power. 

God the Beautiful. An Artist's Creed; and The Religion 
of Beauty Contrasted with Buddhism. . By E. P. B. Second 
Edition (translated into Japanese and German). Foolscap 8vo, 
2s. 6d. net. 

Transformed Hinduism. By the Author of "God the 
Beautiful." 2 vols, f'cap 8vo, 5s. net. 

Where is Heaven P Musings on the Life Eternal. By 
Emil P. Berg, Author of " God the Beautiful," etc. 161 pp., 
f'cap 8vo, art canvas, gilt tops, 2s. net. 



Cathedral House, Paternoster Row, 'London, E.G. 



WILLIAM RIDER iSc SON, Limited. 



13 



The Chief Scripture of India (The Bhagavad Gita) 
and Its Relation to Present Events. By W. L. Wilmshurst, 
Author of "Christianity and Science: The Latest Phase," etc. 
Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. net. 

The iVIessage of the Sun, and the Cult of the 
Cross and the Serpent. By Rev. Holden E. Sampson 
Crown 8vo, 1s. 6d. net. 

Christianity and Science— The Latest Phase. By 

W. L. Wilmshurst. Crown 8vo, 92 pp., in neat brown paper cover 
6d. net, cloth 1 s. net. 

Living the Life ; or, Christianity in Being. By Grace 
Dawson, Author of " How to Rest and be Rested." Crown Svo, 
78 pp., cloth gilt, gilt tops, 1s. 6d. net ; paper, Is. net. 

A Short Study of Christianity as Christ taught it. 

The First Christian Generation. Its Records and 
Traditions. Second and Cheaper Edition. By James Thomas, 
Author of "Our Records of the Nativity," "The Pantheon at 
Rome: Who Built It?" 414pp., red cloth, gilt, crown 8vo, 
3s. 6d. net. 

The New God and other Essays. By Ralph Shirley, 
Editor of "The Occult Review." Crown 8vo, cloth gilt, 248 pp., 
New and Cheaper Edition, 2/- net. 

Contents. — The New God. Prophets and Prophecies. Prophecies and Antici- 
pations. Julian the Apostate. Mystical Christianity. The Perfect Way. Relation- 
ship of Christianity to Gnostic Faiths. Early Christian Evidences. Founders of 
Orthodox Christianity. Friedrich Nietzsche. The Strange Case of Lurancy Vennum. 
Cagliostro. 

POETRY. 

Strange Houses of Sleep. By Arthur Edward Waite. 
With Frontispiece Portrait of the Author. F'cap 4to, parchment 
gilt, 12s. net. Limited Edition of 250 copies, signed and 
numbered. 

Part I. Shadows of Sacraments. Part II. The Hidden Sacrament of the Holy 
Graal. Part III. The Poor Brother's Mass Book^ containing a Method of Assisting 
at the Holy Sacrifice for Children who are not of this World. Part IV. The Book 
of the King's Dole. 

A Book of Mystery and Vision. By Arthur Edward 
Waite. Foolscap 4to, with Special Cover designed by Mary 
Tourtel, and Frontispiece by Isabelle de Steiger. 7s. 6d. net. 



Cathedral House, Paternoster Row, London, E.C. 



14 



WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Limited. 



The Brahman's Wisdom. Verses translated from the 
German of Friedrich Ruckert. By Eva M. Martin. Small crown 
8vo. Bound with artistically designed cover in violet and lemon 
cloth, gilt. Is. 6d. net. 

No occultist who loves beautiful verse should miss buying this unique volume. 

FICTION. 

The Sorcery Club. By Elliott O'Donnell, Author of 
*' Byways of Ghostland," etc. Crown 8vo, cloth gilt, four full page 
illustrations, 6s. 

The Gods of the Dead. By Winifred Graham, Author 
of "Alary," "The Star Child," "Ezra the Mormon," etc. 
Crown Svo, cloth gilt, 6s. 

The Weird of the Wanderer. By Prospero and 
Caliban. Crown Svo, cloth gilt, 6s. 

The Vampire. By Reginald Hodder, author of "The 
Daughter of the Dawn," etc., crown Svo, cloth gilt, 6s. 

Into the Unseen. By G. H. Lusty, Crown Svo., cloth 
gilt, 6s. 

The Rake's Progress. By Marjorie Bowen, Author of 
" The Viper of Milan," etc. Crown Svo, cloth gilt, J2s.net. 

The Priestess of Isis. By Edouard Schure, Author of 
"The Great Initiates," etc. Crown Svo, cloth gilt, New Cheap 
Edition, 2s. net. 

Possessed. By Firth Scott, Author of " The Last 
Lemurian," " The Rider of VVaroona," " The Track of Midnight,' 
Crown Svo, cloth gilt, 2s. net. 

Nyria. By Mrs. Campbell Praed, author of "The Insane 
Root, etc. Crown Svo, cloth, 2s. net. 

Dracula. A new Edition of this celebrated and thrilling 
vampire story. By Bram Stoker. Small crown Svo, cloth gilt, 
416pp., 1 s. net. 

The Jewel of Seven Stars. By Bram Stoker. Uniform 
w^ith "Dracula," 1s. net. 

The Lair of the White Worm. By Bram Stoker 
author of " Dracula." Crown Svo, cloth gilt, 324 pp., 6 coloured 
illustrations, 6s. 

The Door Ajar, and Other Stories. By Virginia 
Milward. Crown Svo, cloth, 12S pp. Is. net. 

Contents. — The Door Ajar — The Knife — Between the Leaves — The Mills of God 
—The Little Silver Box—" Das Kind "—A Minor Third. 



Cathedral House, Paternoster Row, London, E.C. 



WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Limited. 15 



The Soul of the Moot*. A Romance. By Stratford D. 
Jolly. 226 pp., crown 8vo, illustrated, cloth, 2s. net. 

A novel dealing with hypnotic influence and occult metamorphosis. 

The Living Wheel. By T. L. Uniacke. A Drama in 5 
Acts. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. net. 

This story of a Spiritual Marriage presents strange possibilities of union between 
those who are of necessity separated in the physical body. 

The Twice- Born, By an Ex- Associate of the Society for 
Psychical Research. Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. net. 

Flaxius : Leaves from the Life of an Immortal. By 
Charles Godfrey Lcland, Author of " The Breitmann Ballads," etc. 
Crown Svo, 3s. 6d. net. 

The Life and Confession of Asenath, narrating how 
the All- Beautiful Joseph took her to wife. Crown Svo, paper 
covers, 1 s. net. Exquisitely printed on hand-made paper. 

THE LIBRARY OF OCCULT RECORDS. 

Crown 8yo, in Artistically Designed Blue Cloth, Gilt Lettering. 
3s. 6d. net per volume. 

This Library is designed to include a Selection from the Best Occult and Psychic 
Stories which lay claim to an inspirational origin. No fiction of the ordinary stamp 
will be given a place among these books. The following volumes are now ready: — 

Through the Mists. Leaves from the Autobiography of 
a Soul in Paradise. Recorded for the Author by Robert James 
Lees. 3s. 6d. net. 

The Life Elysian. Being more Leaves from the Auto- 
biography of a Soul in Paradise. Recorded for the Author by 
R. J. Lees. 349 pp., 3s. 6d. net. 

The Car* of Phcebus. By R. J. Lees. 388pp., 3s. 6d. net. 

The Heretic. By Robert James Lees. 566pp., 3s. 6d. net. 

An Astral Bridegroom. A Reincarnation Study. By 
Robert James Lees. 404 pp., 3s. 6d. net. 

Ida Llymond and Her Hour of Vision. By Hope 
Cranford. 3s. 6d. net. 



Cathedral House, Paternoster Row, London, E.G. 



16 WILLIAM RIDER & SON, Limited. 



THE SHILLING LIBRARY OF PSYCHICAL 

LITERATURE AND INQUIRY. 

Demy 8vo, Vols. I, II, III, IV, 1s. net each, paper covers; 
1s. 6d. net, neatly bound in green cloth. 

By Edward T. Bennett, 

Assistant Secretary to the Society for Psychical Research, 
1882-1902. 

I. The Society for Psychical Research: Its Rise 
and Progress, and a Sketch of its Work. 

II. Twenty Years of Psychical Research: 1882- 

1901. 

III. Automatic Speaking and Writing: a Study. 

With many hitherto Unpublished Cases and Examples. 

IV. The Direct Phenomena of Spiritualism : — 

" Direct" Writing, Drawing, Painting, and Music. 

GLOBES AND MIRRORS FOR CRYSTAL GAZING. 

Medium Size Globe (about 2^m[. diameter), 4s. 6d. post free in 
United Kingdom ; abroad, 5s. Larger size globe, superior quality, 
6/6 post free in United Kingdom, abroad 7/-. In box with 
instructions complete. 

Handsome Ebonite, Highly Finished Fakir Mirror, with Cover 
complete, with full instructions, 1 Os. 6d. net, post free. Smaller 
ditto, 5s. 3d. post free. 

THE OCCULT REVIEW. 

A Monthly Journal devoted to the Investigation of the 
Problems of Life and Death and the Study of the 
Truths underlying all Religious Beliefs. 

Edited by RALPH SHIRLEY. 

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION: 
British Isles, Seven Shillings, post free. 
United States & Canada, $r75 cents. Elsewhere, 8s. or its equivalent. 

AMERICA : 

International News Co., 85 Duane Street, New York. 

INDIA- ^ ^* ^' ^^'^EELER & Co., Calcutta. 

( The " Theosophist " Office, Adyar, Madras. 



Cathedral House, Paternoster Row, London, E.C. 



\ 




y,.-' "v^:*-